Home

GS610 Source Measure Unit User`s Manual

1. Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the sro E Mm 7 2 ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation f selecting or setting items or enterin RECALL MATH NULL rt 3 g g g a values using the rotary knob numeric i OUTPUT CONTROL keys lt and keys BS key and POWER msc_ Cm sweep staRT TRIG_ right arrow key For details on the no ol ree wre operation using the rotary knob numeric SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or 3 9 Press MISC to display the MISC menu Press the Setup soft key to display the Setup menu Remote Error Wire esy I F Setup Log 4W 2w Setting System Use the rotary knob and lt and gt keys to select the setup file that is applied when the GS610 is turned ON and press the PowerOnSetup soft key An asterisk is placed on the selected setup file Default tat 2005 06 28 16 31 etupl ts 2005707705 14 15 Setup txt 2005 07 08 20 33 Sawe Load Power n Setup Setup Setup Explanation The setup files are the files Setup1 txt to Setup4 txt that are saved in section 11 1 Saving the Setup Data and the factory default setup file Default txt If you select Default txt the settin
2. Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O C Cc C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store EE ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation f selecting or setting items or enterin RECALL MATH NULL AA o 9 g g a values using the rotary knob numeric ER OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and power msc Time sweep Tant me right arrow key For details on the fe ol alec one operation using the rotary knob numeric C SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or em a 3 9 1 Press SHIFT V I Q MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the IntgTime soft key to display the IntegrationTime menu Measure IntgTime Average AutoZero AutoZerolAuto T On off ims Off On Off Exec tn otf 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired integration time IntegrationTime 250ps ims dms 20ms 100ms 200ms Explanation Select from the following e When the Power Frequency Is 50 Hz 250 us 1 ms 4 ms 20 ms 100 ms or 200 ms e When the Power Frequency Is 60 Hz 250 us 1 ms 4 ms 16 6 ms 100 ms or 200 ms Note If the integration time is set to 200 ms 100 ms 20 ms or 16 6 ms the effects of noise from the power frequency can be eliminated because these settings are integer multiples of the power cycle Use on
3. Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the sro E Mma 7 2 ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation ITO of selecting or setting items or entering Le values using the rotary knob numeric R OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and POWER msc sweep staat TRIG_ right arrow key For details on the Oe al WE operation using the rotary knob numeric O 0 keys and CG see sections 3 8 or a 3 9 Turning Key Lock ON Press SHIFT TIME KEY LOCK The key lock turns ON and the KEY LOCK indicator to the left of the display illuminates When the key lock is turned ON all keys are disabled except for the power switch and the SHIFT TIME KEY LOCK key Turning Key Lock OFF Press SHIFT TIME KEY LOCK when the key lock is ON The key lock turns OFF and the KEY LOCK indicator turns OFF All keys are enabled Explanation Key lock can be enabled even when the GS610 is in the remote mode through the communication function lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SYSTem KLOCk 11 8 IM 765501 01E 11 8 Selecting the Decimal Point and Separator Notations of CSV Files Procedure Explanation DISPLAY To exit the menu during operation press O O C Cc O C E
4. Selecting the Program Sweep Mode 1 Press SWEEP to display the SWEEP menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the SWEEP mode menu Mode Last Repeat Off Rtn Keep T 3 Press the Program soft key Sweephode oft Linear Log Program Selecting the Pattern File 4 From the pattern files shown use the rotary knob or numeric keys to select the file to be used for the program sweep The selected file is underlined Sangle cow 2005 06 14 15 32 2005 06 21 10 42 SWEEP_2 TXT 2005 06 21 10 42 Mode Last Repeat Select Program Rtn Keep A File 5 Press the Select File soft key to confirm the setting When the setting is confirmed an asterisk is placed before the file name Sample csv 2005 06 14 15 32 SWEEP_1 TXT 2005 06 21 10 42 SWEEP_2 TXT 2005 06 21 10 42 Mode Last Repeat Select Program Rtn Keep i File IM 765501 01E 6 5 6 2 Setting the Program Sweep Explanation Program Sweep Sweeps according to the values in a pattern file containing an arbitrary sweep pattern Program Sweep Example e When the source mode is DC e When the source mode is pulse 8 A 5 s 8 8 oO 3 S Initial Initial Base value value 4 Trigger count value Trigger count Start Start For details on the pattern file of program sweep see section 6 6 Program Pattern File Note e Use a fixed range so that the range setting does not change during the sweep operation Sweep operation is possible in a
5. IM 765501 01E 5 9 5 5 Setting the Pulse Source Mode When the End of the Measurement and Computation Is before the End of the Pulse Generation Trigger Current source level i Pulse source end Source Pulse width Base pulse value Base pulse value I I Measurement Measure __ Compu I Measurement ment tation Source delay delay i Source measure cycle Selectable Range Source Values Source Level See section 5 2 Source Range Settings Selectable Range of Pulse Base Values The pulse base value is the same as the source value source level Note If the source range setting is auto range the range setting appropriate for the larger of the two values source value and pulse base value is applied Selectable Range of Pulse Width 100 us to 3600 000000 s Note If a capacitive or inductive load is connected the limiter is activated transiently and the settling time is increased If a capacitive load is connected the output capacitance of the GS610 is also added Be careful of the settling time lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SOURCe SHAPe SOURce VOLTage LEVel SOURCe VOLTage PBASe SOURce CURRent LEVel SOURce CURRent PBASe SOURce PULSe WIDTh IM 765501 01E 5 6 Setting the Source Delay Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O C ESC at
6. X XS IN RIG A fsweer TRL OUT act jo ETHERNET unk O ust GP O IEEEfB8 O 100 120V 220 240V AC 200VA MAX 50 60Hz AN EXT YO SERIAL RS 232 Power connector External input output connector 15 pins Used to input output signals such as trigger sweep and control signals and deliver the output signal of the comparison result See chapter 10 RS 232 connector 9 pins Used to perform communications with a PC via the RS 232 interface See section 14 2 Used to connect the GS610 to a power supply See section 3 3 USB port Used to connect to a PC with a USB interface when running the GS610 as a USB storage device Ethernet port Used to connect to a LAN 1 2 IM 765501 01E 1 3 Names and Description of the Displayed Contents The contents shown on the display are as follows Status display area Comparison result display Trigger setting display High limiter indicator Source mode and sweep Low limiter indicator mode displays Sampling error indicator Wait indicator Error indicator H 2 000 A L 2 000 A hat 1 i 96074 A Measured value 5 2 00000 V ae High limiter value Low limiter value Information Shown in the Status Displa
7. lt 7 y lt amp A OR y lt amp A y i amp A y 7 i SMP 6 RDY 4 3 STO JTOS EOS A 7 6 RDY 4 3 2 140 ih A y amp A OR y amp A Af x amp A y amp A y y i SMPEOMOVR 4 LHI LLO CHI CLO A A A A 7 6 OVR 4 LHI LLO CHI CLO Enable Register y m OR A y amp A F lt amp A y x amp A MSS 7 6 ESBIMAV 3 EAV SSBIMSB Status Byte RQS kf k A Occurrence of a F Output Service Request Queue Error L Queue 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard Event Enable E kg Register A y lt amp OR A y lt amp A Y lt amp A y i i PON 6 CMEIEXE DDE QVE 1 OPC Standard Event Register Source Event Enable Register Source Event Register Source Status Register Measure Event Enable Register Measure Event Register Measure Status Register Access Code SRE SRE STB ESE ESE ESR STATus SOURce ENABle STATus SOURce ENABle STATus SOURce EVENt STATus SOURce CONDition STATus SENSe ENABle STATus SENSe ENABle STATus SENSe EVENt STATus SENSe CONDition 16 42 IM 765501 01E 16 3 Status Reports Registers and Queues That Affect the Status Byte Registers that affect the bits of the status byte are shown below e Standard event register Sets
8. ceecceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseneeeaeeseaeeseeesas 5 8 5 6 Setting the Source Delay sissies nile eed 5 11 5 7 Turning the Output ON OFF ceceesceseeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteaeeseeeeeaeesaeeeaeeseeeeseeeeeeeeieeeneeeea 5 13 58 Zero Generatl n es yankees seceded enera loess ren A R Erena a E onae e SARA EEE ESE EEE E RRES 5 14 5 9 Offset Calibratio T ssiri innii ensien iiinis iai dienai ne nei aadik i Eaha 5 16 IM 765501 01E IX Contents Chapter 6 Sweep 6 1 Setting the Linear or Log Sweep ccecceeeceeseeeeneeeeeeeeneeceaeeeaeeteaeeeaeeseaeeseeeenaeetiaeeeaeesnatend 6 1 6 2 Setting the Program Sweep cceesceeeeeceeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeaeeeseeseaeeeseeseaeesieeseaeeteaeeeeetaas 6 5 6 3 Selecting the Termination Mode ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeenaeenaas 6 7 6 4 Setting the Repeat Count eecceeeceesceceseeeseeteeeceeeeeaeeseaeeeaeecaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeteas 6 9 6 5 Starting the Sweep Operation ececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeesceeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeaeees 6 10 6 6 Program Pattern File sssaaa ete ena owed ee ath ee 6 11 Chapter 7 Measurement 7 1 Turning the Measurement ON OFF csecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeeenaeenaas 7 1 7 2 Selecting the Measurement FUNCTION cceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeteas 7 2 7 3 Turning ON OFF th
9. 2 9 USB Storage Function The GS610 has a built in 4 MB non volatile disk GS610ROM and a 4 MB volatile disk GS610RAM If the GS610 is connected to a PC with a USB cable these disks can be accessed from the PC as removable disks Nery computer E Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Bak v gt fy GQsearch GyFolders ls GE X A EB Address E My Computer z P a Ss Local Disk C Compact Disc GS610RAM My Computer 0 E Links gt Control Panel Select an item to view its description Displays the files and folders on your computer See also My Documents My Network Places b EFE i B My Computer Non Volatile Disk GS610ROM GS610ROM is a non volatile disk that retains the data on the disk even when the power is turned OFF It contains three directories MATH PROGRAM and SETUP Equation definition files program sweep files and so forth can be stored on this disk to be used on the GS610 ioixi Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea feck gt fy GQsearch GyFolders CH ls GE X wy EE Address OOE e ee Go Local Disk C Compact Disc GS D My Computer Links gt Select an item to view its 5 object s TE Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea Back gt GQsearch Gyrolders lt 4 MS GE XxX A Eee Address is semone gt Go Links R i PROGRAM SETUP GS610ROM F Select
10. IM 765501 01E suoneiodg UOWWOD pue uoneiedaid JUSUUNASU e 3 3 Connecting to the Power Supply Before Connecting the Power To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below A Before connecting the power cord ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned OFF To prevent electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord for the instrument that was supplied by YOKOGAWA Make sure to perform protective earth grounding to prevent electric shock Connect the power cord to a three prong power outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not use an extension cord without protective earth ground Otherwise the protection function will be compromised Use an AC outlet that complies with the power cord provided and securely connect the protective grounding If such an AC outlet is unavailable and protective grounding cannot be furnished do not use the instrument Connecting the Power Cord 1 Check that the power switch is OFF 2 Connect the power cord plug to the power connector on the rear panel Use the power cord that comes with the package 3 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to the outlet that meets the conditions below The AC outlet mu
11. cq Vce Constant Synchronization operation control signal Key Points in the Operation and Setting Synchronizing two GS610s See section 10 2 Synchronized Operation Transferring the pattern files and measurement result data files using the USB storage function See section 6 6 Program Pattern File and 4 3 USB Storage Function Saving the measurement result data using the storage function See section 9 1 Storing the Measured Results Connection Procedure 1 2 3 Connect the first GS610 between the collector and the emitter of the transistor Connect the second GS610 between the base and the emitter of the transistor Connect TRIG IN on the rear panel of the first GS610 to TRIG OUT on the rear panel of the second GS610 see section 10 2 Synchronized Operation Connect each GS610 to a PC using a USB cable see section 4 3 USB Storage Function IM 765501 01E App 9 a x pu ddy Appendix 2 Application Examples Procedure Preparation 1 Create an arbitrary sweep pattern file for varying base current ls of the transistor using a general purpose spreadsheet application on your PC File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help A 7 a it Arial 10 B Z U EZE D26 X f A 1 0 05 2 0 1 3 0 15 4 0 2 5 05 6 0 3 io 0 35
12. ORIG Currently set to sweep start TURN Currently set to the end of a turn ALL Currently set to the end of all sweeps ROUT BNCO SWE ALL ROUT BNCO SWE IM 765501 01E 16 31 spuewwos UoHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands ROUTe BNCO CONTrol Function Selects the control output of the BNC output terminal interlock output control zero control or programmable or queries the current setting Syntax ROUTe BNCO CONTrol ILOCk OUTPut ZERO PROGram ILOCk Outputs the interlock state OUTPut Outputs the output state ZERO Outputs the zero state PROGram Sets the control output to programmable output ROUTe BNCO CONTrol gt ILOC Currently set to interlock state OUTP Currently set to output state ZERO Currently set to zero state PROG Currently set to programmable output Example ROUT BNCO CONT PROG ROUT BNCO CONT ROUTe DIO5 Function Sets the function output control or zero control of pin 5 control input of the external input output connector or queries the current setting Syntax ROUTe DIO5 OUTPut ZERO OUTPut Sets the function to output control input ZERO Sets the function to zero control input ROUTe DIO5 gt OUTP Currently set to output control input ZERO Currently set to zero control input Example ROUT DIO5 OUTP ROUT DIO5 ROUTe DIO6 Function Sets the function trigger start point source change measurement begin measurement end or pul
13. USB storage function USB TMG ts anpa a deiativih a a a 15 2 user defined COMPUTATION 0 ee ee ee eee teeters eteeeeeeeeeeaees 8 9 user defined computation Syntax eee eee eects 8 10 V Page VINSIW Key gitingar aaa 7 2 value entry of 3 14 VIEW see lh Ae ee eee tel ees 8 5 MISA pee oratna cc AN sats terest 2st pseu fe eA a A cette 15 1 VISA resource NAME ceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeee 15 2 volatile GISK eeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeaeeeeeneeeeeeaee 2 20 volatile disk GS610RAM Saving to eeeeeeeeeeeetees 11 2 WOMAGSMIMILCT sitio seneisccatdnecscevecisutisescnatsncrcnimeccsnnastetnrepetee 2 5 voltage measurement range settings eee 2 10 voltage source range Settings 00 cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 2 7 VSS KOY is een a ee Abs ee ie 5 1 W Page Wait INGICALOF oioi aea aaaea aaa ane 6 10 ATR e Ta ATE E EET 6 10 WAITING G Ol iscicccvesser ses tncasteerties coaterennacndieerccetcreuced tee 2 13 Web server function ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteteeeetsanees 12 7 Z Page Zero generation esssesesesiesesiiseriresrirserenterrrserenneene 2 9 5 14 ZERO KOy eana aa Ea aa N ia 5 14 PAORO EI I A E AA 5 14 5 15 Zero SOUrCe Mpedance cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeee 2 9 5 15 zero source offset Index 4 IM 765501 01E
14. commands INITiate Starts a new measurement TRG Generates a trigger FETCh Read the results 16 38 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands 16 2 12 Status Commands STATus Group STATus SOURce CONDition Function Queries the source event condition register Syntax STATus SOURce CONDition gt lt lnteger gt Example STAT SOUR COND Description For details see section 16 3 STATus SOURce EVENt Function Queries the source event register and clears the register Syntax STATus SOURCe EVENt gt lt Integer gt Example STAT SOUR EVEN Description For details see section 16 3 STATus SOURCe ENABle Function Sets the source event enable register or queries the current setting Syntax STATus SOURce ENABle lt Integer gt lt Binary Octal Hexadecimal gt STATus SOURce ENAB1le gt lt lnteger gt Example STAT SOUR ENAB 255 STAT SOUR ENAB Description For details see section 16 3 STATus SENSe CONDition Function Queries the measurement event condition register Syntax STATus SENSe CONDition gt lt Integer gt Example STAT SENS COND Description For details see section 16 3 STATus SENSe EVENt Function Queries the measurement event register and clears the register Syntax STATus SENSe EVENt gt lt lnteger gt Example STAT SENS EVEN Description For details see section 16 3 STATus SENSe ENABle
15. E The base of the natural logarithm 2 7182818 Literals Integer fixed point real number and floating point real number Example 1 0 0 1234 1 2345E 1 IM 765501 01E App 3 a x pu ddy Appendix 1 Computation Definition Specifications Strings Characters enclosed with double quotations Used as a command execution statement or as a parameter for MKTIME Example SOURCE VOLTAGE LEVEL 12 5V MKTIME 2005 12 25 18 30 Operators lt expi gt lt exp2 gt lt exp1 gt lt exp2 gt lt exp1 gt lt exp2 gt lt exp1 gt lt exp2 gt lt expi gt lt exp2 gt lt expi gt lt exp2 gt lt expi gt lt lt exp2 gt lt expi gt lt lt exp2 gt lt expi gt gt lt exp2 gt lt expi gt gt lt exp2 gt lt expi gt lt exp2 gt lt exp1 gt lt exp2 gt lt exp1 gt AND lt exp2 gt lt exp1 gt OR lt exp2 gt lt exp1 gt XOR lt exp2 gt NOT lt exp gt lt exp gt Functions RAND lt exp gt RAND EDGE lt exp gt ABS lt exp gt EXP lt exp gt LN lt exp gt LOG lt exp gt SQRT lt exp gt SIN lt exp gt COS lt exp gt TAN lt exp gt ASIN lt exp gt ACOS lt exp gt ATAN lt exp gt SINH lt exp gt COSH lt exp gt TANH lt exp gt TRUNC lt exp gt MKTIME lt string gt Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Modulo the remainder of an integer division operation lt
16. Source function Current Call CommSend dev SOUR CURR RANG 1A Source range setting 1A Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT PROT LINK ON Limiter tracking ON Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT PROT ULIM 250mv Limiter 250 mV Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT PROT STAT ON Limiter ON Call CommSend dev SOUR CURR LEV 0 33333A Source level 0 33333 A Call CommSend dev SENS STAT ON Measurement ON Call CommSend dev SENS FUNC VOLT Measurement function Voltage Call CommSend dev SENS ITIM PLC Integration time 1PLC Call CommSend dev SENS AZER STAT ON Auto zero ON Call CommSend dev TRIG SOUR TIM Trigger source Internal timer Call CommSend dev TRIG TIM 100ms Internal timer period 100 ms Call CommSend dev SOUR DEL MIN Source delay Minimum Call CommSend dev SENS DEL MIN Measurement delay Minimum Call CommSend dev OUTP STAT ON Output ON End Function SpueWUOD uonesiunwwog IM 765501 01E 16 53 16 4 Sample Programs Read the measured result Free run using internal trigger Function ReadAsString dev As Integer As String ReadAsString CommQuery dev READ End Function Function ReadAsDouble dev As Integer As Double ReadAsDouble Val ReadAsString dev End Function Sample Sequence 1 String output Real number output Set the GS610 to
17. are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering COMPARE TALE values using the rotary knob numeric OUTPUT CONTROL keys amp and keys BS key and power Ce CJ sweep omr rightarrow key For details on the TRIG ne al KEnLOCK me operation using the rotary knob numeric r0 keys amp and CB see sections 3 8 or _ 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the Setup soft key The files that are currently saved and the Setup menu is displayed e Setup Error Wire csv I F Log aw 2W Setting Sustem 3 Use the rotary knob and lt and gt keys to select the setup file to be loaded Default tect 2005 08 28 16 31 etupl ts 2005707705 14 15 Setup txt 2005 07 06 20 33 Save Load Powerdn Setup Setup Setup 4 Press the Load Setup soft key The setup file is loaded and the display returns a to the numeric display Explanation A saved setup file can be loaded to restore the settings suolouny 419y10 Note The GS610 is set to the factory default settings if the Default txt file is loaded For details on the Default txt file see appendix 3 Contents of the Factory Default Setup File Default txt lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SYSTem SETup LOAD RCL RST reset to the factory default settings IM 765501 01E 11 3 11 3 Selecting the Settings Applied at Power ON
18. d Queries that create response data during reception No query generates response data when the query is received by the controller e Commands that have parameters that restrict one another See the example of the commands given in section 16 2 6 ltems that are included in the functional or composite header elements constituting a command See sections 16 1 and 16 2 7 Buffer sizes that affect block data transmission The receive buffer size of block data is 64 KB 8 A list of program data elements that can be used in equations and their nesting limitations No equations can be used 9 Syntax of the responses to queries See the example of the commands given in section 16 2 10 Communication between devices that do not follow the response syntax Not supported 11 Size of the response data block There are no commands that return block data 12 A list of supported common commands See section 16 2 13 Common Commands 13 Device condition after a successful calibration The settings return to the conditions that existed before the calibration measurements are terminated and previous measured data are invalidated 14 The maximum length of block data that can be used for the DDT trigger macro definition Not supported 15 The maximum length of the macro label for defining macros the maximum length of block data that can be used for the macro definition and the process when recursion is used in
19. lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SYSTem BEEPer STATe IM 765501 01E suoloun 19y10 2 11 5 Displaying the Error Log Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the sro E Mm 7 2 ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation ITO f selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL h 3 a values using the rotary knob numeric ie OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER msc_ Cm sweep staat TRIG_ right arrow key For details on the fe al KROS o operation using the rotary knob numeric SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or B 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu Displaying the Error Log 2 Press the Error Log soft key to display the error log Remote Error Wire csv I F Setup Log aw 2w Setting System Clearing the Error Log Display 3 Press the Clear soft key to clear the error log 256 Filename not found Error description Clear Explanation When an error such as a runtime error or communication command error is stored in the error memory the error indicator Err illuminates at the upper right corner of the display The error log displays
20. Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the AUTO V I UMT Vs IS phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt za MENU and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or enterin CONPARE TE A values using the rotary knob numeric inc OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER msc mE sweep Tant TRIG_ right arrow key For details on the MODE no ol KROS operation using the rotary knob numeric O SHIFT r0 keys and C2 see sections 3 8 or a 3 9 There are two source range settings fixed range and auto range Changing the Fixed Range Setting Press the RANGE or V key to change the source range setting Auto Range Press AUTO RANGE under SOURCE The auto range function is turned ON and the AUTO RANGE key illuminates 5 2 IM 765501 01E 5 2 Setting the Source Range Setting Explanation Note e If you change the range setting while a capacitive or inductive load such as a capacitor or coil is connected an abnormal load may be detected due to the energy built up in the load may cause the output to be turned OFF e When you change the range setting the source level zero state occurs transiently If you wish to vary the source level continuously set the maximum range setting t
21. STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the state of the comparison operation ON or OFF 16 28 STATe Queries the state of the comparison operation ON or OFF 16 28 UPPer lt Value gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the upper limit of the comparison operation 16 28 UPPer MINimum MAXimum Queries the upper limit of the comparison operation 16 28 LOWer lt Value gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the lower limit of the comparison operation 16 28 LOWer MINimum MAXimum Queries the lower limit of the comparison operation 16 28 Store Recall Commands TRACe Group TRACe STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the storage state ON or OFF 16 29 STATe Queries the storage state ON or OFF 16 29 AUTO 1 0 ON OFF Sets the auto storage state ON or OFF 16 29 AUTO Queries the auto storage state ON or OFF 16 29 POINts lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the store count 16 29 POINts MINimum MAXimum Queries the store count 16 29 IM 765501 01E 16 9 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands Command Function Page ACTual Queries the actual number of stored points 16 29 CALCulate MINimum Queries the minimum value among the stored measured values 16 29 MAXimum Queries the maximum value among the stored measured values 16 29 AVERage Queries the average value among the stored measured values 16 29 SDEViation Queries the standard deviation of the stored measured values 16 30 DATA NUMBer lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN Sets
22. Sampling Error Indicator For the procedures see section 2 5 Turns ON when the trigger timing is not synchronized to the source measure cycle period the starting point such as when a trigger is activated in the middle of a source measure cycle Error Indicator For the procedures see section 11 5 Turns ON when there is one or more errors in the error memory 1 4 IM 765501 01E 1 4 Key Groups and Menus There are four functional key groups on the GS610 This section introduces each key group in a tree format Viewing the Tree Structure Keys SHIFT d VS IS SOURCE Activated when the SHIFT key is pressed followed by the key SOURCE Group VS IS SOURCE sart vsvis SOURCE SHIFT Pulse Base Zero Offset Soft Setup description and reference section Sets the pulse base when generating pulses section 5 2 Sets the zero source offset section 5 8 key menu shown on the display Switches the source function voltage VS or current IS section 5 1 Increas Pulse Sets the pulse base when generating pulses Base section 5 5 Zero Offset Sets the zero source offset section 5 8 __ ZeroZ Switches the zero source impedance Hiz Loz high or low section 5 8 _ Cal Executes o
23. Source measure cycle l When the sweep termination mode is Rtn l SweepOut Origin LI i i i SweepOut i 1 i TurnEnd SweepOut AllEnd LI Control Ctrl Relay cannot be turned ON Ctrl IN IntLock 4 gt Relay forcibly turned OFF Ctrl N Output js LH a CtrlOut Output OFF OFF OFF relay control ON ON ON Ctrl IN Zero TTT OT POT a C a OA oO CtrlOut Zero i i L Generate zero Generate zero ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF Status Programmable Output Output Using Communication Commands OUTP PROG ON OUTP PROG ON OUTP PROG PULS OUTP PROG PULS OUTP PROG OFF OUTP PROG OFF CtrlOut Program 10 6 IM 765501 01E 10 2 Synchronized Operation Multiple GS610s can be connected and operated in sync by using the input output signal function On the GS610 there is no configuration for setting master and slave units However the words master and slave are used in the explanations Typical synchronization operations are shown below Synchronizing the Pulse Generation and Measurement Trigger mode setting Master Internal trigger Int Slave External trigger Ext For the setup procedure see section 4 1 Setting the Trigger e Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and External Input Output Connector Master Set BNC Out to Trig and set Type to Origin or set DIO 6pin to Origin Slave Set BNC In to Trig
24. Block average or moving average at the specified count 2 to 256 Internal trigger external trigger and immediate 100 us to 3600 s 100 us to 3600 s 1 us to 3600 s 1 us resolution 1 us to 3600 s 1 us resolution 250 us 1 ms 4 ms 16 6 ms or 20 ms 100 ms 200 ms Auto detect from the power supply frequency when the power is turned ON for 16 6 ms and 20 ms 1 us resolution 1 us resolution Loads the equation definition file created in text format and performs the computation Five built in equations are pre installed Operators Functions NULL Computation addition subtraction multiplication division and exponentiation abs absolute value exp exponent of e In natural logarithm log log base 10 sqrt Square root sin cos tan asin acos atan sinh cosh and tanh Sets the NULL value to the measured value when the NULL computation is turned ON and displays values obtained by subtracting the NULL value from the measured value for subsequent measurements Comparison Operation Determines the magnitude relation between the displayed value and the reference values upper and lower and displays the result 18 4 IM 765501 01E 18 4 External Input Output Section TRIG SWEEP CTRL IN and OUT 18 5 GP IB Interface RS 232 Interface USB Interface Connector type Input output level I O logic format Minimum pulse width Interface
25. For the setup procedure see Setting the BNC Input Terminal Setting the BNC Output Terminal or Setting the External Input Output Connector in the previous section e Connecting the Instruments Connect Trig Out of the master unit to Trig In of the slave unit using the BNC input output terminal or external input output connector For the pin assignments see Signal Name and Function in the previous section Master Trig Out Origin Trigger setting Int Trigger setting Ext Synchronizing the Sweep Operation Trigger mode setting Master Internal trigger Int Slave External trigger Ext For the setup procedure see section 4 1 Setting the Trigger e Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and External Input Output Connector Master Set BNC Out to Trig and set Type to Origin or set DIO 6pin to Origin Set DIO 7pin to Origin Slave Set BNC In to Trig For the setup procedure see Setting the BNC Input Terminal Setting the BNC Output Terminal or Setting the External Input Output Connector in the previous section IM 765501 01E 10 7 indjno Nduy jeu13 x3 pue jndyno jndu ONG 10 2 Synchronized Operation e Connecting the Instruments Connect Trig Out of the master unit to Trig In of the slave unit and connect Sweep Sync Out of the master unit to Sweep Start In of the slave unit usi
26. It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred inside the instrument by reading the contents of the standard event register Reading from the Standard Event Register The contents of the standard event register can be read by the ESR command After the register is read it is cleared Clearing the Standard Event Register The standard event register is cleared in the following three cases e When the contents of the standard event register are read using the ESR command e When a CLS command is received When the instrument is power cycled IM 765501 01E 16 45 spuewwos UuoesUNWIWOD a 16 3 Status Reports 16 3 4 Source Event Register Source Event Register Status Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 0 STATus SOURce CONDition RDY yy FY YY Y YY Event Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 0 STATus SOURCe EVENt SMP RDY STOITOSIEOS Bit7 SMP Sampling Error Clearing the Source Event Register Set to 1 when a sampling error trigger is applied The source event register is cleared in the following before the completion of the source measure cycle three cases occurs e When the contents of the source event register is Bit 6 read by the STATus SOURce EVENt command Not used always 0 e When a CLS command is received Bit 5 RDY Sweep Ready e When the instrument is power cycled The bit in the condition register is set to 0 when sweep mode is enabled when
27. Po Mt a 6 Press each key and check that the name of the respective key is displayed 7 To end the test press ESC twice 17 6 IM 765501 01E 17 3 Self Test Explanation Testing the Display The display test checks for color dropouts or abnormality on the display If the display is not correct contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Key Test The key test checks whether the front panel keys are operating properly If the name of the key being pressed is highlighted the key is operating correctly If it does not contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt TST IM 765501 01E 17 7 Ey eoueudjUleW pue Hunooyseaqnol 17 4 Checking the System Status Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store E Mma 7 2 ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation Uo f selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL h 3 e values using the rotary knob numeric a OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER msc mE sweep STanT TRIG_ right arrow key For details on the no ol KROS WoE operation using the rotary knob numeric O SHIFT keys QD and CB see s
28. Procedure To exit the menu during operation press O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation DISPLAY panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the store Ca wa Dra 71 2 ro aw J ss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation N AUTO f selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL H 3 values using the rotary knob numeric iai OUTPUT CONTROL keys amp and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome sweep omr Tie right arrow key For details on the fo al pads me operation using the rotary knob numeric C r keys amp D and see sections 3 8 or 3 9 Turning the Comparison Operation ON OFF 1 Press SHIFT MATH COMPARE to display the COMPARE menu He mw we 2 Press the Compare soft key to select On or Off When the comparison operation is turned ON the MATH key illuminates He mw we Setting the Reference Value 3 Press the Upper soft key to display the Upper setup screen C ALA ftom a 4 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the upper value Upper 0 00000E 0W C on ort Upper Lower 5 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Upper 2 e L Eo 6 Press the Lower soft key to display
29. SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer MASK lt String gt String representing the address in d d d d format where d is a decimal number between 0 and 255 SYST COMM ETH MASK 255 255 254 0 SYST COMM ETH MASK Description The result varies depending on the DHCP state If DHCP is OFF the specified fixed value is returned If DHCP is ON a dynamic result assigned through DHCP is returned If the dynamic address is being assigned or the address assignment failed 0 0 0 0 is returned Syntax Example SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer GATE Function Sets the default gateway of Ethernet communication or queries the current setting SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer GATE lt String gt SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer GATE lt String gt String representing the address in d d d d format where d is a decimal number between 0 and 255 SYST COMM ETH GATE 10 0 129 255 SYST COMM ETH GATE Description The result varies depending on the DHCP state If DHCP is OFF the specified fixed value is returned If DHCP is ON a dynamic result assigned through DHCP is returned If the dynamic address is being assigned or the address assignment failed 0 0 0 0 is returned Syntax Example SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer TERMinator Function Sets the terminator CR LF or CR LF of Ethernet communication or queries the current setting SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer TERMinator CR LF CRLF CR Sets the terminato
30. Sweep Termination Mode Return Rtn The source level after the sweep operation is complete is reset to the level before the sweep operation was started In return Rtn mode a trigger for resetting the source value is needed in addition to the trigger for the measurement Therefore note that one additional trigger is needed for the GS610 to enter the start wait condition e Sweep operation when the termination mode Last is set to return Rtn Start ag P Waiting for start Sweeping Waiting for start me eae e TEA i ai Source measure cycle Sd Measj Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Stop value i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 leat a fas er ee ee a ee eee ee ae 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Source level Start value Source level Sd Source delay before sweep Meas Measurement delay measurement computation IM 765501 01E 6 7 6 3 Selecting the Termination Mode Keep The last source level of the sweep operation is retained even after the sweep operation is complete e Sweep operation when the termination mode Last is set to keep Start Sweep Waiting for start Sweeping Waiting for start state 1 ae eal ree 1n a kea nae measure Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Sa 1 1 1 l Stop value i j i i Source level i Start value Sd Source delay Source level Meas Measurement delay measurement before sweep computation lt lt Corre
31. contact your local Yokogawa Europe B V office IM 765501 01E vii Conventions Used in This Manual Safety Markings The following markings are used in this manual AN Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user s manual for special instructions The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user s manual to identify those instructions In the manual the symbol is used in conjunction with the word WARNING or CAUTION WARNING Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences CAUTION Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury _ to the user or damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Note Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Subheadings On pages that describe the operating procedures in chapters 3 through 17 and appendix the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Procedure Follow the numbered steps All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind experienced users may not need to carry out all the steps Explanation This subsection describes the setup para
32. gt TIM Currently set to constant period timer EXT Currently set to external trigger IMM Currently set to no trigger wait Example TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR Description This function corresponds to SHIFT TRIG on the front panel To apply triggers through communication set the trigger source to external and use the GET or TRG command to generate the trigger TRIGger TIMer Function Sets the period of the constant period timer or queries the current setting Syntax TRIGger TIMer lt Time gt MINimum MAXimum lt Time gt Sets the period to the specified value MINimum Sets the period to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the period to the maximum value TRIGger TIMer MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Time gt Example TRIG TIM 2 4 TRIG TIM MIN TRIG TIM TRIG TIM MIN 16 26 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands 16 2 7 Computation Commands CALCulate Group CALCulate NULL STATe Function Sets the NULL computation state ON or OFF or queries the current setting CALCulate NULL STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns NULL computation ON 0 or OFF Turns NULL computation OFF CALCulate NULL STATe 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF CALC NULL STAT ON CALC NULL STAT Description When the NULL computation state is changed from OFF to ON the NULL offset value is updated so
33. rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU C cu and gt are used to refer to the operation my ANGE of selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL Lie lt 2 values using the rotary knob numeric ioci OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome sweep omr Taic right arrow key For details on the fo al KORR me operation using the rotary knob numeric oS C r keys amp D and see sections 3 8 or S 3 9 Press VS IS Each time you press the key the source function toggles between voltage V mV and current uA mA A Explanation The source function S on the display is indicated by the unit of the source value V for voltage and A for current Example When the source function is voltage Imm Olt H 200 OMA L Mo mA ET S 0 0 Or 0 0 1 VY 7 Source value unit When the source function is current Imm Olt H 2 000 V M 2 000 V S 0 0 ot 0 0 0 A Source value unit Note e If you switch the source function the output is turned OFF The source value shows the value that was set previously for the switched source function e Be sure to check that the load is connected correctly before turning the output ON after switching the source function lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SOURce FUNCtion IM 765501 01E 5 1 5 2 Setting the Source Range Setting
34. An error occurs if a file name that does not exist is specified The file name is not case sensitive SYSTem SETup CATalog Function Queries a list of setup data files that are saved Syntax SYSTem SETup CATalog lt String gt lt String gt lt String gt A list of setup files NONE indicates that there are no setup files Example SYST SET CAT Description Setup files are files in the SETUP directory of the GS610ROM disk SYSTem SETup DELete Function Deletes the setup data files that are saved Syntax SYSTem SETup DELete lt String gt lt String gt Name of the file to be deleted Example SYST SET DEL SetupXXX txt Description Select a file in the SETUP directory on the GS610ROM disk An error occurs if a file name that does not exist is specified The file name is not case sensitive 16 34 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands SYSTem SETup PON Function Sets the setup data that is loaded when the power is turned ON or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem SETup PON lt String gt lt String gt File name to be specified SYSTem SETup PON lt String gt Current file name Example SYST SET PON Setupl txt SYST SET PON Description Select a file in the SETUP directory on the GS610ROM disk An error occurs if a file name that does not exist is specified The file name is not case sensitive SYSTem ERRor Function Queries the error code and message inf
35. C Cc O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU sur and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering COMPARE TALE values using the rotary knob numeric DISPLAY rn OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and power Cmc ie swe smr mG right arrow key For details on the no al KENLOCK me operation using the rotary knob numeric C r keys amp D and see sections 3 8 or 3 9 1 Press SHIFT V I Q MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the Average soft key to display the Average menu Measure IntgTime Average AutoZero AutoZerolAuto YI On Off ims off On Off Exec On Off Selecting the Averaging Mode 3 Press the Mode soft key to display the averaging mode menu Mode Count off 2 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired averaging mode If you select Off averaging is disabled If the averaging mode is set to Block or Moving the averaging indicator to the left of the display illuminates od Count Off Block Mowing 2 Setting the Average Count 5 Press the Count soft key Mode Count off 2 6 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the average count 7 Ifyou use the numeric keys press the Enter soft key to confirm the setti
36. CURRent ZERO IMPedance IM 765501 01E 5 15 5 9 Offset Calibration Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE e In the procedural explanation below the store aoe va move UMT phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt z a and gt are used to refer to the operation Uo f selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL h 3 a values using the rotary knob numeric ica OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and PoweR Cmc Lie sweep staat me right arrow key For details on the fe ol alc iene operation using the rotary knob numeric C SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or an _ 3 9 1 Press SHIFT VS IS SOURCE to display the SOURCE menu 2 Press the CalExec soft key to carry out the calibration Pulse Zero Zero Z Cal Base Offset Hiz Loz Exec Explanation Carry out calibration when correcting the offset drift of the source value such as due to temperature changes Note The offset calibration is valid only for the range setting at which the calibration is carried out The calibration setting is initialized when the power is cycled lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt CAL 5 16 IM 765501 01E Chapter6 Sweep 6 1 Setting the Linear or Log Sweep Procedure To exit the menu
37. For details on the operation using the rotary knob numeric keys D and see sections 3 8 or 3 9 1 Press MODE to display the source mode menu Selecting the Pulse Source Mode 2 Press the Pulse soft key Sourcelode De Pulse Setting the Source Value Source Level 3 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the source value Int Pls a ie es H 000 St 0 08000mA L 2 000 Sourcebode De Pulse 4 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Source Level Setting the Pulse Base Value 5 Press SHIFT VS IS SOURCE to display the SOURCE menu 6 Press the Pulse Base soft key Pulse Zero Zero Z Ca Base Offset Hiz Loz Exec 7 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the pulse base value Pulse Base 0 00m V Pulse Zero Zero Z Ca Base Offset Hiz Loz Exec 5 8 IM 765501 01E 5 5 Setting the Pulse Source Mode 8 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Pulse Base 2 mY v Enter Setting the Pulse Width 9 Press TIME to display the TIME menu 10 Press the P Width soft key S Delay M Delay Period P Width lus SOus 50 00ms 25 00ms 11 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the source o voltage
38. However if this value is greater than 65535 it is rounded to 65535 TRACe ACTual Function Syntax Example Queries the actual number of stored points TRACe ACTual lt lnteger gt TRAC ACT TRACe CALCulate MINimum Function Syntax Example Queries the minimum value among the stored measured values TRACe CALCulate MINimum lt Value gt TRAC CALC MIN TRACe CALCulate MAXimum Function Syntax Example Queries the maximum value among the stored measured values TRACe CALCulate MAXimum lt Value gt TRAC CALC MAX TRACe CALCulate AVERage Function Syntax Example Queries the average value among the stored measured values TRACe CALCulate AVERage lt Value gt TRAC CALC AVER IM 765501 01E 16 29 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands TRACe CALCulate SDEViation Function Queries the standard deviation of the stored measured values Syntax TRACe CALCulate SDEViation lt Value gt Example TRAC CALC SDEV TRACe DATA NUMBer Function Sets the store data number or queries the current setting Syntax TRACe DATA NUMBer lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN lt Integer gt Sets the store data number to the specified value MINimum Sets the store data number to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the store data number to the maximum value UP Increments the store da
39. Press the MISC key to enter the LOCAL mode The keys are locked If the KEYLOCK indicator is illuminated the keys are locked Press the SHIFT TIME key to clear the key lock Other causes If a certain key does not work it may be due to a bad connection Perform a key test of the self test If there are keys that do not operate servicing is required 17 3 The USB storage function The GS610ROM disk is corrupt If only the GS610RAM disk appears on the PC 4 3 does not work the GS610ROM disk may be corrupt Format the disk The drive assignment on the PC Use a management tool on the PC and change overlaps with another drive the drive letter so that it does not overlap with other drives The PC does not support the USB The USB storage function is valid on Windows Me mass storage class 2000 and XP The USB storage function cannot be used on PCs running other operating systems The file written from the The file is written only to the PC Carry out Safely remove USB Mass Storage PC cannot be viewed on cache memory Device on the PC to make sure that the cache is the GS610 written to the storage device The source value or Insufficient warm up Warm up the GS610 for 60 minutes after turning measured value is odd ON the power The ambient temperature is Use the GS610 in a stable environment within the fluctuating specification range The signal contains noise Use the GS610 in an enviro
40. S lt expression gt The result of lt expression gt is used as the next source value However this cannot be used simultaneously with a sweep operation Statement for substituting values into internal variables X lt expression gt Y lt expression gt Z lt expression gt The result of lt expression is substituted into internal variable X Y or Z Statement for substituting initial values into internal variables X0 lt expression gt YO lt expression gt Z0 lt expression gt The result of lt expression is substituted as an initial value into internal variable X Y or Z This substitution statement is carried out at the time as specified in File Format IF Statement IF lt expression gt THEN lt statement gt If the result of lt expression gt is not zero lt statement gt is executed IF lt expression gt THEN lt statement1 gt ELSE lt statement2 gt If the result of lt expression gt is not zero lt statement1 gt is executed If the result is zero lt statement2 gt is executed Compound statement lt statement1 gt lt delim gt lt statement2 gt lt delim gt lt delim gt CR LF CR LF Used when executing multiple statements in a IF statement The statements are executed in order Command execution statement lt string gt Executes the string following the character as a communication command However query commands cannot be used Comment statement comment Ch
41. SOUR PULS WIDT MAX IM 765501 01E 16 15 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands SOURce LIST SELect Function Sets the program sweep pattern file or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce LIST SELect lt String gt lt String gt File name to be specified SOURce LIST SELect lt String gt Current file name Example SOUR LIST SEL Test csv SOUR LIST SEL Description Select a file in the PROGRAM directory on the GS610ROM disk An error occurs if a file name that does not exist is specified The file name is not case sensitive SOURce LIST CATalog Function Queries the list of program sweep pattern files Syntax SOURce LIST CATalog lt String gt lt String gt lt String gt A list of pattern files NONE indicates that there are no pattern files Example SOUR LIST CAT Description Pattern files are files in the PROGRAM directory of the GS610ROM disk SOURce LIST DELete Function Deletes the program sweep pattern file Syntax SOURce LIST DELete lt String gt lt String gt Name of the file to be deleted Example SOUR LIST DEL Test csv Description Select a file in the PROGRAM directory on the GS610ROM disk An error occurs if a file name that does not exist is specified The file name is not case sensitive SOURce LIST DEFine Function Creates a program sweep pattern file Syntax SOURce LIST DEFine lt String gt lt String gt lt String g
42. SOURce CURRent PROTection ULIMit SOURce CURRent PROTection LLIMit IM 765501 01E 5 5 5 4 Setting the DC Source Mode Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press O O C O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE e In the procedural explanation below the Dra phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or enterin COMPARE TALE values using the rotary knob numeric DISPLAY inc OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome sweep staat me right arrow key For details on the ho al KEY LOCK MODE operation using the rotary knob numeric C SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or D 3 9 1 Press MODE to display the source mode menu Selecting the DC Source Mode 2 Press the DC soft key SourceMode oc Pulse Setting the Source Value Source Level 3 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the source value M mA H 2 000 5 0 00800mA C 2 000 SourceMode oo Puce a S 4 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Source Level 5 5 6 IM 765501 01E 5 4 Setting the DC Source Mode Explanation DC Source Mode If the sweep mode
43. The intermittent operation of mobile devices can be simulated The maximum number of measured data points that can be stored is 65535 IM 765501 01E App 15 xipueddy Appendix 2 Application Examples e Discharge Test Details of Operation The GS610 sinks the pulse current from the secondary battery and measures the voltage Pulse discharge of a secondary battery Measurement example when generating pulses Repeat period Battery voltage i Measurement l 3 6 V 5 ms Discharge current Source Integration 800 mA delay time th J i 250us 1 1 minimum 1 l i i Measurement idela Time lt _ _ _ _ Pulse width Key Points in the Operation and Setting 1 Pulse source sink operation and high speed measurement See section 5 5 Setting the Pulse Source Mode 2 Saving the measured data using the storage function See section 9 1 Storing the Measured Results Connection Procedure Connect the OUTPUT terminal to each end of the battery with cables To carry out voltage measurements more accurately use the remote sense four terminal connection to connect the SENSE terminal to each end of the battery with cables Connection example for measurements SENSE OUTPUT 110V 1V 110V MAX MAX MAX Lo a App 16 IM 765501 01E Appendix 2 Application Examples Procedure Preparation Set the GS610 as follows Setup Example of the GS6
44. better cable e Avoid connecting the PC directly to the GS610 without going through the hub or router Operations are not guaranteed for communications using direct connection 12 2 IM 765501 01E 12 3 Setting the TCP IP Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the AUTO Vil UMT Vs IS phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering COUPE E values using the rotary knob numeric a OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and power Cus we swe stant mie right arrow key For details on the ne al RET LORE me operation using the rotary knob numeric C keys amp and CB see sections 3 8 or 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the Remote I F soft key to display the Remote I F menu e Setup Error Wire csv I F Log 4W 2w setting System Selecting Ethernet Communications 3 Press the LAN soft key to display the LAN menu GPIB USB 30 RS232 LAN lra Selecting Whether to Use DHCP 4 Press the DHCP soft key to select On or Off DHE TER overview Setting the IP Address Turn OFF DHCP according to the procedure described earlier and then set the IP address 5 Press the IP Address soft key to displa
45. e O Pulse Width 25 00M ms Delay M Delay Period P Width lus SOus 50 00ms 12 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Pulse Width 5 ps mS Enter Explanation Pulse Source Mode In pulse source mode the pulse is specified by two values the pulse base value and the source level The minimum pulse width is 100 us As with the DC source mode the source level changes after a time specified by the source delay elapses from the point in which the trigger is activated Furthermore the measurement starts after a time specified by the measurement delay elapses The source level changes at the same the measure delay is activated and returns to the pulse base value after the pulse width A source measure cycle is finished at the end of the pulse or at the end of the measurement and computation whichever comes later If the measurement function see section 2 4 Measurement is turned OFF measure delay measurement and computation are not carried out The end of the pulse is the end of a source measure cycle When the End of the Measurement and Computation Is after the End of the Pulse Generation Trigger Current source level Source Pulse source end Base pulse value Measurement Computation Base pulse value Measurement Measurement Source delay delay i lt A eee l Source measure cycle
46. lt Voltage gt Sets the stop value to the specified value MINimum Sets the stop value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the stop value to the maximum value SOURce VOLTage SWEep STOP MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value gt lt Voltage gt SOUR VOLT SWE STOP 12 5 SOUR VOLT SWE STOP MAX SOUR VOLT SWE STOP MAX 16 18 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands SOURCe VOLTage SWEep STEP Function Syntax Example Description Sets the step value of the voltage sweep linear sweep or queries the current setting SOURCe VOLTage SWEep STEP lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum lt Voltage gt Sets the step value to the specified value MINimum Sets the step value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the step value to the maximum value SOURCe VOLTage SWEep STEP MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Voltage gt SOUR VOLT SWE STEP 1 25 SOUR VOLT SWE STEP MIN SOUR VOLT SWE STEP SOUR VOLT SWE STEP MIN This setting is used when the sweep mode is set to linear SOURce VOLTage SWEep SPACing LINear SOURCe VOLTage SWEep POINts Function Syntax Example Description Sets the step count of the voltage sweep log sweep or queries the
47. n Time stamp n times in the past The variable n is an integer between 1 and 15 A value cannot be substituted in this variable l Current source value or measured value that is a current A value cannot be substituted in this variable V Current source value or measured value that is a voltage A value cannot be substituted in this variable A B C General purpose parameters that can be edited from the operation menu A value cannot be substituted in this variable X Y Z General purpose variables When a value is substituted it is retained until another value is substituted J A counter that increases for each source measure cycle starting from 0 A value cannot be substituted in this variable The description in the definition file can span multiple lines that are delimited by line feed codes CR LF or CRLF For example M M 2 3 M 4 5 6 7 can be written using general purpose variables X and Y as intermediate variables as X M 2 3 Y M 4 5 M X Y 6 7 In addition initial values can be assigned to general purpose variables X Y and Z For example if you write X0 0 X X 1 the value of general purpose variable X changes each source measure cycle as follows 0 1 2 and so on You can use an If statement to change the operation according to a given condition For example if you write IF V I gt 9 5 THEN OUTP OFF the output can be turned OFF when the product of V and or the power exceeds 9 5
48. rotary knob numeric keys lt oa MENU and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric VALUE NULL AJIO OMPARE scat OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and POWER Cm Sweep omr ma right arrow key For details on the ne al KELIK WE operation using the rotary knob numeric O SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or _ 3 9 Turning Computation ON OFF 1 Press MATH to display the MATH menu Selecting the Computation Definition 2 Use the rotary knob and lt and gt keys to select the computation definition file The selected file is underlined dB txt 20050628 16 31 Percent txt 2005 06 28 16 31 Scaling tect 2005 06 28 16 31 omer 3 2005 06 28 16 31 Hath i Select ono view Fie 3 Press the Select File soft key to confirm the computation definition file An asterisk is placed on the computation definition file that has been confirmed dB txt 2005 06 28 16 31 Percent txt 2005 06 28 16 31 Scaling txt 2005 06 28 16 31 ower tx 2005 06 28 16 31 J Math Param Param View Select On ore A B a File Note __ If the description in the computation definition file is not correct the file cannot be selected In this case if the beep sound see section 11 4 Turning the Beep Sound ON OFF is turned ON a beep sound is generated
49. section 11 1 Save Setup1 Saves the settings to Setup 1 section 11 1 Save z i F Setup2 Saves the settings to Setup 2 section 11 1 Save P F Setups Saves the settings to Setup 3 section 11 1 Save Saves the settings to Setup 4 section 11 1 Setup4 g p4 Load Loads the setup section 11 2 Setup asap Selects the setup used when the GS610 is powered up section 11 3 Error M Log Clear Shows and clears error log section 11 5 1 1 Continues to the next page 1 8 IM 765501 01E 1 4 Key Groups and Menus Continued from the previous page I Wire A ow 4w Selects sensing two wire or four wire section 4 2 CSV DecPoint Setting Selects the decimal point for CSV files section 11 8 j Separat Selects the separator for CSV files section 11 8 L __ External BNC IN BNC IN Selects the BNC input System T T Trig Sweep Ctrl i i VO ar g p trigger sweep start or control section 10 1 ControllType Selects the BNC control input IntLock Output Zero interlock output relay control or zero source section 10 1 pac our te ree re Selects the BNC output trigger sweep start or control aan rig Sweep Ctrl section 10 1 Selects the BNC trigger Tri tT output trigger source C Type __ Origi rigQutType change measure begin kx rigin ScrChg MeasBgn MeasEnd PlsEnd Measure end or falling e
50. 15 FUNCtion Queries the source function voltage or current 16 15 SHAPe DC PULSe Sets the source mode DC or pulse 16 15 SHAPe Queries the source mode DC or pulse 16 15 MODE FIXed SWEep LIST Sets the source pattern fixed level sweep or program sweep 16 15 MODE Queries the source pattern fixed level sweep or program sweep 16 15 DELay lt Time gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the source delay 16 15 DELay MINimum MAXimum Queries the source delay 16 15 PULSe WIDTh lt Time gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the pulse width when generating pulse signals 16 15 WIDTh MINimum MAXimum Queries the pulse width when generating pulse signals 16 15 LIST SELect lt String gt Sets the program sweep pattern file 16 16 SELect Queries the program sweep pattern file 16 16 CATalog Queries the list of program sweep pattern files 16 16 DELete lt String gt Deletes the program sweep pattern file 16 16 DEFine lt String gt lt String gt Creates a program sweep pattern file 16 16 VOLTage RANGe lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN Sets the voltage source range setting 200 mV 2 V 12 V 20 V 30 V 60 V or 110 V 16 16 RANGe MINimum MAXimum Queries the voltage source range setting 200 mV 2 V 12 V 20 V 30 V 60 V or 110 V 16 16 AUTO lt Boolean gt Sets the source auto range ON or OFF 16 16 AUTO Queries the source auto range ON or OFF 16 16 LEVel lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the voltage source l
51. 1mA 10 mA 1 When tracking is OFF Hi or Lo whichever is greater 2 Minimum value when tracking is OFF ILimiter Valuel Range Setting Resolution Minimum Limit Value 1 0 mV to 200 0 mV 200 mV 100 uV 1 mV 0 201 V to 2 000 V 2V 1 mV 10 mV 2 01 V to 20 00 V 20 V 10 mV 100 mV 20 1 V to 110 0 V 110 V 100 mV 1V 3 When tracking is OFF Hi or Lo whichever is greater 4 Minimum value when tracking is OFF IM 765501 01E 18 1 suoleoiioeds 18 1 Source Section Response Time Typical Voltage Source 100 us Time to reach within 0 1 of the setting at 20 V range setting with the source and limiter settings at maximum values and with a pure resistive load with a load factor of 25 1 Measure delay needed for the measured voltage to reach 0 1 in pulse source mode with the pulse base value set to zero 1 Integration time 250 us Current Source 400 us Time to reach within 1 of the setting at 20 A range setting with the source and limiter settings at maximum values and with a pure resistive load 2 Measure delay needed for the measured current to reach 1 in pulse source mode with the pulse base value set to zero 2 Integration time 250 us Output Noise Typical 8 mVp p DC to 20 MHz with 2 V source range setting and at 1 A limiter range 18 2 IM 765501 01E 18 2 Measurement Section Voltage Measurement Integration Time of 16 66 ms 20 ms 100 ms or
52. 2 to 65535 However if the start value and stop value have opposite signs an error occurs and the sweep operation cannot be carried out e When the source mode is DC e When the source mode is pulse Stop value Stop value n i o H Q lt 9 4 a o i a i Step count 2 Step count 6 s Start value Start value 2 Initial a 2 p itia ease waite rigger coun rigger coun value start value Start Program Sweep Sweeps according to the values in a pattern file containing an arbitrary sweep pattern Program Sweep Example e When the source mode is DC e When the source mode is pulse o o e e fa 3 i 3 oO Initial Initial Base value value Trigger count value 4 Trigger count Start Start 2 15 IM 765501 01E suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 6 Sweep Termination Mode There are two termination modes Keep and return Rtn In Keep mode the last source level of the sweep operation is retained In Return Rtn mode the source level after the sweep operation is complete is reset to the level before the sweep operation was started e Sweep operation when the termination mode Last is set to keep Start Sweep Waiting for start Sweeping Waiting for start state kea bis i Baila Trigger ka 4 f Source measure Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas cycle Stop value i i i i i es ee E S Source level i i Start value Source lev
53. 3A 3 20000 A 10 uA 0 03 5 mA 0 003 500 uA Integration time of 4 ms 1 ms or 250 us Range Measurement Resolution Accuracy One Year Temperature Coefficient Setting Range of reading A of reading A C 20 uA 20 500 uA 1nA 0 03 70 nA 80 nA 0 003 7 nA 8 nA 200 uA 205 00 uA 10 nA 0 03 350 nA 400 nA 0 003 35 nA 40 nA 2mA 2 500 mA 100 nA 0 03 3 5 uA 4 uA 0 003 350 nA 400 nA 20mA 20 500 mA 1uA 0 03 35 uA 40 uA 0 003 3 5 uA 4 uA 200 mA 205 00 mA 10 uA 0 03 350 uA 400 uA 0 003 35 uA 40 uA 3A 3 2000 mA 100 uA 0 03 5 5 mA 6 mA 0 003 550 uA 600 uA Accuracy One year accuracy at 23 5 C with auto zero turned ON Temperature coefficient Add the temperature coefficient at 5 to 18 C and 28 to 40 C Values inside the parentheses are those when those when the integration time 1 ms or 250 us IM 765501 01E 18 3 suonesijoads 18 3 Functions Source Measurement Trigger Time Setting Computation Source function Source mode Sweep mode Measurement function Measurement data storage Averaging Trigger mode Pulse width Repeat period Source delay Measurement delay Integration time Computation Using Equations Voltage and current DC or pulse Linear logarithmic or program up to 65535 steps Voltage current and resistance calculated from measured voltage generated current or generated voltage measured current Up to 65535 data points
54. 4 Press the Math soft key to select On compute or Off not compute If On is selected the MATH key illuminates and the soft keys for the parameters that needs to be specified for the selected computation definition file are displayed Hath Param Param A Select oore A B view Fie Note If you select ON without selecting a computation definition file an error occurs 8 4 IM 765501 01E 8 3 Computation Using Equations Explanation Setting the Parameters 5 Press the Param A Param B or Param C soft key Ses 1 On orf A E Note If there is no parameter description in the selected computation definition file the setup parameters Param A to Param C are not displayed 6 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the parameter 7 Ifyou use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Parameter a 2 Leh ob ob p r Confirming the Computation Definition 8 Press the View soft key The contents of the selected computation definition are displayed FILE SCALING txt M M B A C The measured results can be used to perform various computations The computation definition file can be set to any of the built in computation files or a user defined computation file that you create For a description of writing a user defined computation file see section 8 5 User Defined Computation Built in Computati
55. 8 0 4 g 0 45 10 0 5 11 0 55 iz 0 6 13 0 65 14 0 7 i 0 75 16 08 z 0 85 18 0 9 19 095 20 1 21 1 1 22 1 2 23 13 M 4 gt pi Tr_ ee f Sheet2 f Sheet3 lal Ready 215 xX 2 Save the data that you created in step 1 to a file in CSV format 3 Transfer Copy the pattern sweep data file to the internal memory GS610ROM of the second GS610 via the USB 4 Set each GS610 as follows Setup Example of Setup Example of the First GS610 the Second GS610 SOURCE Output function Voltage output Current output Limiter value 150 mA 1V Output mode DC DC Output range AUTO AUTO OUTPUT CONTROL Trigger mode External Internal Sweep mode OFF Program MEASURE Measurement function ON OFF Measurement function Current measurement Integration time 200 ms Measurement range AUTO Store count Source data count TIME Source delay tus tus Measurement delay 1 ms 1 ms Repeat period 500 ms of the internal trigger External I O Trigger input BNC input Trigger output BNC output App 10 IM 765501 01E Appendix 2 Application Examples Source and Measurement 1 Use the first GS610 to apply a constant voltage Vcr across the collector and the emitter of the transistor Use the second GS610 to supply current pattern Ig base current that you created in step 1 of Preparation across the base and the emitter of the transistor The first GS610 measures collector cu
56. 81 61 97 71 113 22 42 2 62 18 102 2 122 18 142 2 162 18 bkd DC2 2 B R b r 12 18 22 34 32 50 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114 23 43 3 63 19 103 3 123 19 143 3 163 19 DC3 3 C S c S 13 19 23 35 33 51 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 24 DCL 44 4 64 20 104 4 124 20 144 4 164 20 14 20 24 36 34 52 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 25 PPU 45 5 65 21 105 5 125 21 145 5 165 21 O NAK 5 E U e u 15 21 25 37 35 53 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 26 46 6 66 22 106 6 126 22 146 6 166 22 SYN amp 6 F V f v 16 22 26 38 36 54 46 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 27 47 7 67 23 107 7 127 23 147 7 167 23 bd ETB 7 G WwW g w 17 23 27 39 37 55 47 71 57 87 67 103 77 119 30 SPE 50 8 70 24 110 8 130 24 150 8 170 24 CAN 8 H X h x 18 24 28 40 38 56 48 72 58 88 68 104 78 120 31 SPD 51 9 71 25 111 9 131 25 151 9 171 25 EM 9 Y i y 19 25 29 41 39 57 49 73 59 89 69 105 79 121 32 52 10 72 26 112 10 132 26 152 10 172 26 1 SUB J Z j Z 1A 26 2A 42 3A 58 4A 745A 90 6A 106 7A 122 33 53 11 73 27 113 11 133 27 153 11 173 27 ESC K k 1B 27 2B 43 3B 59 4B 75 5B 91 6B 107 7B 123 34 54 12 74 28 114 12 134 28 154 12 174 28 FS 5 lt L l l 1C 28 2C 44 3C 60 4C 76 5C 92 6C 108 7C 124 35 55 13 75 29 115 13 135 29 155 13 175 29 GS M m 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 4D 77 5D 93 6D 109 7D 125 36 56 14 76 30 116 14 136 30 156 14 176 30 RS gt N A n 1E 30 2E 46 3E 62 4E 78 5E 94 6E 110 7E 126 3
57. A E EREET 16 1 16 1 1 Symbols Used in the Syntax 00 eee eee eect eee e tere eee tees tae teee tastes eeeeeaeeeeaaas 16 1 161 2 M SSAGES uinean aade ae aa yore eo aaa aa 16 1 16 13 COMMMANGS isseire naaa neede aean Sr E rd e e Teea i ii 16 3 16 14 RESPONSES minoica ea riaa a Ea A a AO AAA EN E ENE a aA 16 5 era Ea BI EE E E EE E T AE T E O E 16 5 16 2 Commands iissa oisean iiai a eana EAE eo aaa Aa p Sa EEEE EaR 16 6 16 2 1 A List of Commands cee eecceteeeeeeceeeeneeeeeeetaeeeeaeeeaeeeeaeeeeeteaeeseeeteaeeteeeeeaeene 16 6 16 2 2 Output Commands OUTPUut Group ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeseeetaeesneeeenees 16 14 16 2 3 Source Commands SOURCE GROUD ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteaeeseeeeeetsees 16 15 16 2 4 Sweep Commands SWEep Group ecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaees 16 23 16 2 5 Measurement Commands SENSe GROUP ecceeeceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 16 24 16 2 6 Trigger Commands TRIGger Group ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeereeeeeeeeenaeenses 16 26 16 2 7 Computation Commands CALCulate Group e ceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 16 27 16 2 8 Store Recall Commands TRACe Group cecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeneeeeaees 16 29 16 2 9 External Input Output Commands ROUTe Group cceeceeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeenees 16 31 16 2 10 System Commands SYSTeM Group ccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeseeeetseeeeeetaees 16 34 16 2 11 Measured Value Read
58. As Integer Dim msg As String 64 msg CommQuery dev STAT SENS COND If msg ERROR Then CommMeasureStatus 1 Else CommMeasureStatus Val msg End If End Function SpueWLUOD uonesiunwwog IM 765501 01E 16 51 16 4 Sample Programs Read the measure event Function CommMeasureEvent dev As Integer As Integer Dim msg As String 64 msg CommQuery dev STAT SENS EVEN If msg ERROR Then CommMeasureEvent 1 Else CommMeasureEvent Val msg End If End Function 16 52 IM 765501 01E 16 4 Sample Programs 16 4 3 Sample 1 Example of Reading the Measured Results during Free Run Using Internal Trigger Attribute VB_Name Samplel Sample 1 Example of Reading the Measured Results during Free Run Using Internal Trigger CALL SampleSequencel r Setup 1 1 lt Source setting gt Source function Current Source range setting 1 A Limiter 250 mV Source level 0 33333 A lt Measurement setting gt Measurement ON Measurement function Voltage Integration time 1PLC Auto zero ON lt Trigger setting gt Trigger source Internal trigger 100 ms period Source delay Minimum 1 us Measurement delay Minimum 1 us Output ON Function Setupl dev As Integer Call CommSend dev RST Reset to factory default settings Call CommSend dev SOUR FUNC CURR
59. BS key and e suet Pe rightarrow key For details on the n KEY LOCK MODE operation using the rotary knob numeric r0 keys amp D and see sections 3 8 or a 3 9 Press MISC to display the MISC menu Pressthe System softkey Error Wire csv Remote I F setup Log 4W 2w setting Svstem Press the Next 1 2 soft key io Beep Display LineFreq Product Mest i o On Off 1 so 60 Info vz Pressthe DiskFormat soft key Time Time Disk Firmware Mext Adjust Zone seFrest p ormat Update arz Press the Exec soft key to execute the disk format Exec Always format the disk from the GS610 menu If you format the disk from a PC default directories such as MATH and default files are not created You can also create subdirectories and write files to the disk but be sure that the disk does not become full Do not change the existing directory names such as MATH If you do you will no longer be able to select files from the GS610 IM 765501 01E uonoun e6e101g gsn pue su s e907 pue asuses Jow y d 1 UOND EUUOD Hum s 4ebbuL gt Chapter5 Source 5 1 Switching the Source Function Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O O ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the store Ca wa Dra Ta ro m phrase
60. Electrical and mechanical specifications Functional specifications Protocol Address Connector type Electrical specifications Connection format Transmission mode Synchronization mode Baud rate Number of ports Connector type Electrical and mechanical specifications Ethernet Interface Option Number of communication ports Connector type Electrical and mechanical specifications Transmission system Data rate BNC connector D Sub 15 pin receptacle TTL Negative logic falling edge 10 us or greater Conforms to IEEE St d 488 1987 SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 and CO Conforms to IEEE St d 488 2 1987 0 to 30 D Sub 9 pin Conforms to EIA RS 232 Point to point Full duplex Start stop synchronization 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps 1 Type B connector receptacle Conforms to USB Rev 2 0 1 RJ 45 connector Conforms to IEEE 802 3 100BASE TX 10BASE T 100 Mbps 10 Mbps IM 765501 01E 18 5 suonesijoads 18 6 General Specifications Safety Standards Complying standard EN61010 1 Measurement category 250Vpeak Pollution degree 2 Emission Complying standard EN61326 1 Class A EN55011 Class A Group 1 EN61000 3 2 Class A EN61000 3 3 C Tick EN55011 Class A Group 1 This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this productmay cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measure
61. Example SYST COMM RS232 BAUD 38400 SYST COMM RS232 BAUD SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 DLENgth Function Sets the RS 232 data length 7 bits or 8 bits or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 DLENgth 7 8 7 Sets the data length to 7 bits 8 Sets the data length to 8 bits SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 DLENgth gt 7 Currently set to 7 bits 8 Currently set to 8 bits Example SYST COMM RS232 DLEN 8 SYST COMM RS232 DLEN SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 PARity Function Sets the RS 232 parity none even or odd or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 PARity NONE EVEN ODD NONE Sets the parity to none EVEN Sets the parity to even ODD Sets the parity to ODD SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 PARity NONE Currently set to none EVEN Currently set to even ODD Currently set to odd Example SYST COMM RS232 PAR NONE SYST COMM RS232 PAR SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 SBITs Function Sets the RS 232 stop bit 1 bit or 2 bits or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 SBITs 1 2 1 Sets the stop bit to 1 bit 2 Sets the stop bit to 2 bits SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 SBITs gt 1 Currently set to 1 bit 2 Currently set to 2 bits Example SYST COMM RS232 SBIT 1 SYST COMM RS232 SBIT SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 PACE Function Sets the RS 232 flow control none XON OFF or CTS RTS or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem C
62. Function Syntax Example Description Sets the sweep mode linear or log or queries the current setting SOURCe VOLTage SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic LiNear Sets the sweep mode to linear LOGarithmic Sets the sweep mode to logarithmic SOURCe VOLTage SWEep SPACing LIN Currently set to linear LOG Currently set to logarithmic SOUR VOLT SWE SPAC LIN SOUR VOLT SWE SPAC This setting is used when the source pattern is set to sweep SOURce MODE SWEep This command and SOURce CURRent SWEep SPACing are equivalent SOURCe VOLTage SWEep STARt Function Syntax Example Sets the start value of the voltage sweep or queries the current setting SOURcCe VOLTage SWEep STARt lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum lt Voltage gt Sets the start value to the specified value MINimum Sets the start value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the start value to the maximum value SOURce VOLTage SWEep STARt MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Voltage gt SOUR VOLT SWE STAR 0 05 SOUR VOLT SWE STAR MIN SOUR VOLT SWE STAR SOUR VOLT SWE STAR MIN SOURCe VOLTage SWEep STOP Function Syntax Example Sets the stop value of the voltage sweep or queries the current setting SOURce VOLTage SWEep STOP lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum
63. Integer dev CommOpen Call Setup3 dev For i 15 To 30 Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT LEV CStr i Sleep 1000 Next Call CommSend dev OUTP STAT OFF Call CommClose dev End Function Open the device Set to Setup 3 Change the level from 15 V to 30 V 1 s wait Turn the output OFF Close the device 16 58 IM 765501 01E 16 4 Sample Programs 16 4 6 Sample 4 Example of Updating the Source Level with the Sweep Function Attribute VB_ Name Sample4 Sample 4 Example of Updating the Source Level with the Sweep Function CALL SampleSequence4 Setup 4 lt Source setting gt Source mode Pulse Sweep ON Source function Voltage Source range setting 12 V Limiter OFF Source level ov lt Pulse settings gt Pulse base 10 V Pulse width 500 us lt Sweep setting gt Type Linear Range 0 vV to 10 y 0 1 V steps Sweep count Level after the sweep operation lt Measurement setting gt Measurement lt Trigger setting gt Trigger source 1 Reset to the initial level OFF Internal trigger 10 ms period Source delay Minimum 1 us Output ON Function Setup4 dev As Integer Call CommSend dev RST Reset to factory default settings Call CommSend dev SOUR SHAP PULS Pulse source mode Call CommSend dev SOUR MODE SWE Sweep mode Call CommSend dev SOUR FUNC VOLT Source function Voltage Call Co
64. Limiter Source level lt Measurement Setup gt Measurement lt Trigger setting gt Trigger source Source delay Output Function Setup3 dev As Call CommSend dev settings Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev Call CommSend dev End Function r 1 1 Sample Sequence 3 Voltage 30 V 0 5 A ov OFF Internal trigger Minimum 1 us ON Integer RST 3 SOUR FUNC VOLT SOUR VOLT RANG 30V SOUR CURR PROT LINK ON SOUR CURR PROT ULIM 0 5A SOUR CURR PROT STAT ON SOUR VOLT LEV 0V SENS STAT OFF TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM 500E 6 SOUR DEL MIN sOUTP STAT ON 500 us period Reset to factory default Source function Voltage Source range setting 30 V Limiter tracking ON O 5A Limiter ON Source level 0 V Limiter Measurement OFF Internal timer 500 us Trigger source Internal timer period Source delay Minimum Output ON Set the GS610 to Setup 3 change the source level from 15 V to 30 V in 1 V steps and turn the output OFF IM 765501 01E 16 57 SpueWLUOD uonesiunwwog 16 4 Sample Programs Function SampleSequence3 Dim dev As
65. Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A A1064WD 1 GB Standard Power Cord Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A Rubber Feet A9088ZM 2 Two rubber feet in one set Measurement lead 758933 1 Alligator clip adapter 758922 1 set Safety terminal to alligator clip adapter Red and black 1 pc each D sub connector for A1519JD 1 set 1 connector cover 1 External I O B8060KA 15 pin connectocer User s Manual IM765501 01E 1 This manual One of these power cords is supplied according to the suffix code UL CSA Standard A1006WD VDE Standard A1009WD BS Standard A1054WD AS Standard A1024WD GB Standard A1064WD Measurement Lead 758933 758922 D sub connector for EXT I O 15 pin male Alligator Clip Adapter Set Rubber Feet A9088ZM Bj GS610 User s Manual IM765501 01E IM 765501 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Sold Separately The optional accessories below are available for purchase separately Name Part Number Minimum Q ty Notes Measurement lead 758917 1 Safety terminal cable Length 0 75 m Measurement lead 758933 1 Safety terminal banana male Length 0 75 m Safety adapter lead 701901 1 BNC to safety terminal cable Length 1 8 m Banana plug set 758919 1 set 4 mm plug p4 mm socket combined adapter Red and black 1 pc each Alligator clip adapter small 758922 1 set Safety terminal to alli
66. OFF ASCII 13H Received buffer length 64 KB Switching between Remote and Local Modes e When Switching from Local to Remote Mode If the GS610 receives a SYSTem REMote command from the PC when it is in the local mode it switches to the remote mode e The REMOTE indicator to the left of the display illuminates e All keys except the LOCAL key are disabled Settings entered in local mode are retained even when the GS610 switches to remote mode e When Switching from Remote to Local Mode Pressing LOCAL in remote mode puts the instrument in local mode The GS610 switches to local mode when it receives a SYSTem LOCal command from the PC The REMOTE indicator to the left of the display turns OFF e Key operations are enabled Settings entered in remote mode are retained even when the GS610 switches to local mode IM 765501 01E 14 1 SUOIJBSJIUNWILWWOD ZEZ SHY 14 2 Serial RS 232 Interface Connection When you connect the GS610 to a PC you must set the GS610 so that the handshaking method baud rate data format and other parameters match those on the PC For details on the settings see the following pages In addition use an interface cable that meets the specifications of the GS610 Connector and Signal Names 5 7 1 2 ees OVNA Jo r i 67 89 RD Received Data Received data from the PC Signal direction Input SD Send Data Transmitted data to
67. SYSTem CLOCk DATE Function Sets the date or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem CLOCk DATE lt String gt SYSTem CLOCk DATE lt String gt String representing the date in YYYY MM DD format Example SYST CLOC DATE 2005 03 31 SYST CLOC DATE SYSTem CLOCk TIME Function Sets the time or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem CLOCk TIME lt String gt SYSTem CLOCk TIME lt String gt String representing the time in HH MM SS format Example SYST CLOC TIME 21 30 00 SYST CLOC TIME SYSTem CLOCk TZONe Function Sets the time zone or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem CLOCk TZONe lt String gt SYSTem CLOCk TZONe lt String gt String representing the time difference in HH MM or HH MM format Example SYST CLOC TZON 09 00 SYST CLOC TZON SYSTem SETup SAVE Function Saves the current setup data to a file Syntax SYSTem SETup SAVE lt String gt lt String gt Name of the file to be saved Example SYSTem SETup SAVE SetupXXX txt Description The file is created in the SETUP directory on the GS610ROM disk If an existing file name is specified the file is overwritten SYSTem SETup LOAD Function Loads the saved setup data Syntax SYSTem SETup LOAD lt String gt lt String gt Name of the file to be loaded Example SYSTem SETup LOAD SetupXXX txt Description Select a file in the SETUP directory on the GS610ROM disk
68. Setup 1 read 10 result values in an array and turn the output OFF Function SampleSequencel Dim dev As Integer Dim result 10 As Double Dim i As Integer dev CommOpen Call Setupl dev For i 0 To 9 result i ReadAsDouble dev Next i Call CommSend dev OUTP STAT OFF Call CommClose dev End Function Open the device Set to Setup 1 Loop 10 times Read the result and substitute into an array Turn the output OFF Close the device 16 54 IM 765501 01E 16 4 Sample Programs 16 4 4 Sample 2 Example of generating a trigger from the PC and reading the measured results Attribute VB_Name Sample2 Sample 2 Example of generating a trigger from the PC and reading the measured results CALL SampleSequence2 r Setup 2 1 lt Source setting gt Source function Voltage Source range setting 20 V Limiter 50 mA Source level 17 5 V lt Measurement Setup gt Measurement ON Measurement function Current Integration time Minimum 250 us Auto zero OFF lt Trigger setting gt Trigger source External trigger Source delay Minimum 1 us Measurement delay 1 ms Output ON Function Setup2 dev As Integer Call CommSend dev RST Reset to factory default settings Call CommSend dev SOUR FUNC VOLT Source function Voltage Call CommSend
69. Storage Function IM 765501 01E 12 11 uondo 2e yu z u1 473 Ss Chapter 13 GP IB Communications 13 1 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard The GP IB interface of the instrument conforms to the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard This standard specifies that the following 23 points be stated in the document This section describes these points 1 Of the IEEE 488 1 interface functions the subsets that are supported See GP IB Interface Specifications on page 13 3 2 The operation of the device when it is assigned an address outside the 0 to 30 range The GS610 does not allow assignment to an address other than 0 to 30 3 Reaction of the device when the user changes the address The address change is detected when the address is set on the GP IB Address menu see section 13 4 The new address is valid until the next time it is changed 4 Device settings at power up The commands that can be used at power up The settings selected in section 11 3 Selecting the Settings Applied at Power ON If you issue the RST common command the GS610 always returns to the factory default settings 5 Message exchange options a Input buffer size 64 KB b Queries that return multiple response messages See the example of the commands given in section 16 2 c Queries that create response data when the command syntax is being analyzed Every query generates a response data when analysis of the syntax is completed
70. Time Adjust soft key Time Time Disk Firmware Next adjust Zone setrtest pormat Update 2 2 5 Press the Edit soft key Time adjust 2004 02 23 14 40 56 S d e ool 6 Use the lt and gt keys to move the cursor to the desired position Use the rotary knob or numeric keys to enter the date and time 8 If you use the numeric keys press the Set soft key to confirm the setting N aust 2004 02 23 14 40 58 PE ae 3 10 IM 765501 01E 3 7 Setting the Date Time and the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time 4 Press the Time Zone soft key Time Time Disk Firmware Next Adjust Zone setrtest pormat Update 2f2 5 Press the Edit soft key Zone GMT 00 00 Pe o 6 Use the lt and gt keys to move the cursor to the desired position 7 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys to enter the time difference 8 If you use the numeric keys press the Set soft key to confirm the setting Time x Zone GMT 00 0 0 LAE t d Explanation Setting the Date and Time Date Year Month Day Set the year month and day Time Hour Minute Second Set the time using a 24 hour clock Note The date and time settings are backed up with the lithium battery when the power is turned OFF Leap year information is retained Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Set the time difference in the range of 12 hour
71. W The character string enclosed in double quotations following the character is parsed as acommand mnemonic and executed For details see appendix 1 MATH Definition Specifications IM 765501 01E uoljeyndwog Chapter9 Storing Measured Results and Recalling Statistical Computation Values 9 1 Storing the Measured Results Procedure To exit the menu during operation press C Cc Cc O C Cc ESC at the upper left of the operation DISPLAY panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the __ i p store e 0 ma r r VS IS phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt ENN MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation Prec IO of selecting or setting items or entering COMPARE TALJE values using the rotary knob numeric idei OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER E sanr ma right arrow key For details on the MODE fo sl Erion operation using the rotary knob numeric O C Cm gt keys and see sections 3 8 or i E 3 9 1 Press SHIFT STORE MENU to display the Store menu Setting the Store Count 2 Press the Count soft key to display the store count setup screen Count Auto MeasOnly On Off On OFF 3 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the store count Store Count 10 Count Auto Meas nly on off On Off 4 Ifyo
72. You can enter arbitrary blank characters spaces or tabs between variables constants literals operators and functions If multiple statements are written the statements are basically executed in ascending order of line numbers Statements for substituting initial values into internal variables are executed only in the following cases First computation after the output is turned ON First computation after the sweep operation is started First computation after the computation is turned ON First computation after the equation definition file is reselected If the total number of variables constants literals operators functions and branches in a statement exceeds 256 or the total number of variables constants literals operators functions and branches in the definition file exceeds 1024 the GS610 generates the following error indicating that the definition is too complex to be handled 101 Too complex expression If a syntax error exists in the definition the GS610 generates the following error and the definition is not selected 100 Expression syntax error IM 765501 01E App 1 a x pu ddy Appendix 1 Computation Definition Specifications Statements The following types of statements are available Statement for computing measured values M lt expression gt The result of lt expression gt is displayed as the measured result Statement for computing the next source value
73. Z a Do not install the recorder in the following places e Indirect sunlight or near heat sources Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gas is present e Near strong magnetic field sources e Near high voltage equipment or power lines Where the level of mechanical vibration is high e Onan unstable surface 3 4 IM 765501 01E 3 2 Installing the GS610 Storage Location Rack Mount When storing the instrument avoid the following places A place with a relative humidity of 80 or more e e e e e e e e In direct sunlight Where the temperature is 60 C or higher Near a high humidity or heat source Where the level of mechanical vibration is high Where corrosive or explosive gas is present Where an excessive amount of soot dust salt and iron are present Where water oil or chemicals may splash It is recommended that the instrument be stored in an environment where the temperature is between 5 and 40 C and the relative humidity is between 20 and 80 RH When rack mounting the GS610 use the rack mount kit that is sold separately For the procedure on attaching the GS610 to a rack see the User s Manual included in the rack mount kit Name Model Notes Rack mount kit 751533 E3 For EIA single mount Rack mount kit 751534 E3 For EIA dual mount Rack mount kit 751533 J3 For JIS single mount Rack mount kit 751534 J3 For JIS dual mount
74. and Local Modes When Switching from Local to Remote Mode Remote mode is activated when the SYSTem REMote command is received from a controller while local mode is active e The REMOTE indicator see section 1 2 is turned ON All keys except the LOCAL key are disabled Settings entered in local mode are retained even when the GS610 switches to remote mode When Switching from Remote to Local Mode Pressing LOCAL in remote mode puts the instrument in local mode The GS610 switches to local mode when it receives a SYSTem LOCal command from the PC e The REMOTE indicator is turned OFF e Key operations are enabled e Settings entered in remote mode are retained even when the GS610 switches to local mode Ethernet Interface Specifications Connector type RJ 45 Number of ports 1 Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE 802 3 Transmission system 100BASE TX 10BASE T Maximum transmission rate 100 Mbps Protocol TCP IP Command control server function A command mnemonic stream parsing server at port 7655 that allows up to five clients to connect The terminator CR LF or CR LF can be specified FTP server function An anonymous FTP server at port 21 that allows up to five clients to connect HTTP server function A function that enables various information to be displayed and performs remote control of the GS610 through port 80 using a Web browser IM 765501 01E 12 1 uodo
75. as a terminator when receiving data Note If you change the network settings the GS610 may have to be power cycled e If the GS610 is turned ON with the DHCP function enabled but without an Ethernet cable connected communication functions may not operate properly In this happens turn DHCP OFF and power cycle the GS610 e Network parameters such as the IP address must be specified also on the PC side For details on the setup check the manual help for your PC or consult your network administrator 12 5 uondo 2e yu z u1 473 12 4 Checking the Ethernet Settings Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store E Mma 7 2 ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation f selecting or setting items or enterin RECALL MATH NULL rt 3 g g g e values using the rotary knob numeric a OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER mE sweer Smr Tac right arrow key For details on the fe al ac ee ie operation using the rotary knob numeric C SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or _ 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the Remote I F soft key to display the Remote I F menu Remote
76. by summing the measured values and dividing the sum value by the average count Therefore the measurement time takes average count times as long Moving average The GS610 measures once in a single source measure cycle The GS610 displays the result obtained by summing the average count of measured values and dividing the sum value by the average count If the number of measurements does not reach the average count the average over the number of measurements is displayed 1 AVerageCount AVerageCount Display value Measured value i i 1 The average count can be set in the range of 2 to 256 When the averaging function is enabled the average indicator on the left side of the GS610 illuminates NULL Computation In NULL computation a difference with respect to a given value can be displayed The NULL value is set to the measured value when the NULL computation is turned ON From that point the GS610 displays the results obtained by subtracting the NULL value from the measured values Displayed value Measured value NULL value When the NULL computation is switched from OFF to ON the measured value at that point is automatically entered as the NULL value However this value can be changed afterwards When the NULL computation is enabled the NULL key illuminates Computation Using Equations Computation can be performed using equations provided in a text file In computation using equations four arithmetic operat
77. by simulation from the GS610 the fluctuation signal of an automotive power supply in this example using an instrument such as YOKOGAWA s Digital ScopeCoder DL750P 3 Save the measured data to the internal memory GS610ROM of the GS610 in CSV format via the USB 4 Generate the output pattern that was saved to the GS610ROM The fastest output is 100 kS s IM 765501 01E App 13 a x pu ddy Appendix 2 Application Examples Charge Discharge Characteristics Measurement of Secondary Batteries Lithium lon or Nickel Hydride The GS610 functions can be used to carry out charge discharge characteristics tests of lithium ion batteries nickel hydride batteries etc In boost charge operation constant current charge using large current of approximately 2C to 5C 2 to 5 times the battery capacity is carried out When the battery voltage reaches a specified level the operation is switched to constant voltage charge In constant voltage charge operation the charge current gradually decreases When it decreases to a specified value the charge operation is stopped The Auto V I function of the GS610 switches from battery voltage measurement to charge current measurement by synchronizing to the switching of the operation mode from constant current charge to constant voltage charge e Charge Test Details of Operation 1 The GS610 generates constant current to the secondary battery and measures the voltage 2 When the voltage of th
78. connecting the devices Make sure the total cable length does not exceed 20 m When communicating have at least two thirds of the devices turned ON When connecting multiple devices connect them in a star or linear configuration see the figure below Loop and parallel configurations are not allowed 13 4 IM 765501 01E 13 4 Setting the GP IB Address Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press Cc C Cc Cc Cc C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store aE ma MODE LMT VS IS phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU E Em MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation i UAH ALL AUTO of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric ah OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and power Csc we swe stant mG right arrow key For details on the foe al een WE operation using the rotary knob numeric keys and see sections 3 8 or p 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the Remote I F soft key to display the communication menu Remote Error Wire csy I F Setup Log 4W 2w Setting System Setting the GP IB Address 3 Press the GPIB soft key GPIB USB 30 RS232 LA
79. dev SOUR VOLT RANG 20V Source range setting 20 V Call CommSend dev SOUR CURR PROT LINK ON Limiter tracking ON Call CommSend dev SOUR CURR PROT ULIM 50mA Limiter 50 mA Call CommSend dev SOUR CURR PROT STAT ON Limiter ON Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT LEV 17 5V Source level 17 5 V Call CommSend dev SENS STAT ON Measurement ON Call CommSend dev SENS FUNC CURR Measurement function Current Call CommSend dev SENS ITIM MIN Integration time Minimum Call CommSend dev SENS AZER STAT OFF Auto zero OFF Call CommSend dev TRIG SOUR EXT Trigger source External trigger Call CommSend dev SOUR DEL MIN Source delay Minimum Call CommSend dev SENS DEL 1ms Measure delay 1 ms Call CommSend dev OUTP STAT ON Output ON End Function SpUueWILUOD uonesiunwwog IM 765501 01E 16 55 16 4 Sample Programs Generate triggers and read the measured results Generate triggers from a PC and read the results Function TrigReadAsString dev As Integer As String String output TrigReadAsString CommQuery dev INIT TRG FETC End Function Function TrigReadAsDouble dev As Integer As Double Real number output TrigReadAsDouble Val TrigReadAsString dev End Function Sample Sequence 2 Set the GS610 to Setup 2 and vary the source level as follows 2 8 V 2 9 V
80. e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE e In the procedural explanation below the sre V VO ro r Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU u MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation RANGE s 2 SECA ua ui AUTO IORN of selecting or setting items or entering cu E marar values using the rotary knob numeric cit OUTPUT CONTROL keys CD and keys BS key and POWER MISC TIME sweer Commr me right arrow key For details on the foe al eee we operation using the rotary knob numeric C SHIFT keys C amp D and CB see sections 3 8 or 3 9 Press AUTO RANGE under MEASURE to select ON or OFF When the auto range function is turned ON the AUTO RANGE key illuminates Explanation Measurement Range Settings and Auto Range The measurement range setting is determined indirectly by the source range setting and limiter setting It is no set directly When auto range is turned ON the GS610 makes a measurement and checks whether a different range setting is available for making the measurement with the best resolution If so the GS610 changes the range setting and makes the measurement again However it may take time for the GS610 to switch the range setting and the source level may become discontinuous yUSWSINSeOS E Note e The measurement auto range does not operate and an error occurs in the foll
81. file from the GS610RAM of the first GS610 to the PC via the USB 5 Display the graph of the measured results using a general purpose spreadsheet application on your PC lolx amp File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help ofl es iy gt arial 10 Bl U 232 _ A Al bd fe Time s I Source v Measure Setup QO 5 00E 02 8 97E 07 0 05 1 00E 01 5 95E 07 0 1 1 50E 01 5 92E 07 0 15 2 00E 01 5 94E 07 0 2 2 50E 01 5 94E 07 0 25 3 00E 01 5 86E 07 0 3 3 50E 01 5 95E 07 0 35 4 00E 01 5 92E 07 0 4 4506 01 5 96E 07 0 45 5 00E 01 5 92E 07 0 5 5 50E 01 5 94E 07 0 55 6 00E 01 5 92E 07 0 6 6 50E 01 6 00E 07 0 65 7 00E 01 5 90E 07 0 7 7 50E 01 6 92E 07 0 75 8 00E 01 5 90E 07 0 8 8 50E 01 5 78E 07 0 85 9 00E 01 5 87E 07 0 9 9 50E 01 5 90E 07 0 95 1 00E 00 5 91E 07 1 1 10E 00 5 72E 07 1 05 1 20E 00 5 77E 07 Sey 1 1 1 30E 00 5 77E 07 a gt ohResut E fof Ready 7 App 8 IM 765501 01E Appendix 2 Application Examples e Ip lc Characteristics Evaluation The Ip lc characteristics of a transistor can be measured by synchronizing two GS610s Details of Operation Measures collector current lc when base current lg is varied with collector emitter voltage Vce fixed using two synchronized GS610s Connection example for measurements Sweep pattern PC file GS610 No 2 ty B
82. gt ESR For details see section 16 3 Sets the standard event enable register or queries the current setting ESE lt Integer gt lt Binary Octal Hexadecimal gt ESE gt lt lnteger gt ESE 255 ESE For details see section 16 3 16 40 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands OPC Function Syntax Example OPC Function Syntax Example WAI Function Syntax Example Description Generates a standard event OPC when the execution of all previous commands is completed OPC OPC Queries the completion of the execution of all previous commands and returns ASCII code 1 if it is OPC gt 1 OPC Waits for the completion of the overlap command WAL WAL The GS610 actually does nothing because the GS610 does not support overlap commands IM 765501 01E 16 41 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD g 16 3 Status Reports 16 3 1 Overview of the Status Report Status Reports The figure below shows the status report that is read by serial polling This status report is an extended version of the status report defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 Service Request
83. happens immediately turn OFF the power switch Provide adequate space around the GS610 or check and remove foreign objects caught in the cooling fan on the rear panel If the same warning appears after waiting a substantial amount of time and you turn ON the power switch the GS610 may have malfunctioned Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Do Not Damage the Power Cord Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull by the cord itself Always hold and pull by the plug If the power cord is damaged check the part number indicated on page iii and purchase a replacement IM 765501 01E 3 1 suoneiodg UOWWOD pue uoneiedaid JUSWUNASU e 3 1 Handling Precautions General Handling Precautions Do Not Place Objects on Top of the Instrument Never place objects containing water on top of the instrument otherwise a breakdown may occur Do Not Apply Shock or Vibration Do not apply shock or vibration Doing so may cause malfunction In addition applying shock to the input output terminal or the connected cable can cause electrical noise to enter or output from the instrument Keep Electrically Charged Objects Away from the Instrument Keep electrically charged objects away from the input connectors They may damage the internal circuitry Turn OFF the Power during Periods of Extended Non Use Turn OFF the power swi
84. if the source and measurement are of the same function or when measuring resistance the power cannot be calculated correctly To measure power set the GS610 to voltage generation and current measurement or current generation and voltage measurement e Sinusoid generation Sinusoid txt s A sin 2 PI B t Generates a sinusoid of amplitude A and frequency B However if the sweep function is enabled the sweep operation takes precedence To generate the sinusoid turn the sweep function OFF When computation using equations is turned ON the MATH key illuminates For details on the syntax and operators of equations in the definition files see appendix 1 Comparison Operation The measured value is compared with the upper and lower limits specified by the user and divided into three groups over the upper limit High within the limits In and under the lower limit Low The result of the grouping is displayed at the upper left corner of the status display area on the display and output to the external input output connector For a description of the external input output see section 10 1 Setting the Input Output Signal on the BNC Input Output Terminal and External Input Output Connector When the comparison operation is turned ON the MATH key illuminates 2 18 IM 765501 01E 2 8 Store and Recall Statistical Computation Value Display Storage Operation Auto Storage Recall This function stores up to 65535 points of t
85. is discarded e Ifthe controller tries to receive a response message when there is none an error occurs If the controller tries to receive a response message before the transmission of the program message is complete an error occurs f a program message containing multiple message units is sent and the message contains incomplete units the instrument attempts to execute the ones that are believed to be complete However these attempts may not always be successful In addition if the message contains queries the responses may not be returned Deadlock The instrument can store in its buffer program and response messages of length 64 KB or more The number of available bytes varies depending on the operating conditions When both the transmit and receive buffers become full at the same time the instrument can no longer continue to operate This state is called a deadlock In this case operation can be resumed by discarding the program message Deadlock will not occur if the program message including the lt PMT gt is kept below 64 KB Furthermore deadlock never occurs if a program message does not contain a query 16 1 3 Commands Commands There are three types of commands program headers that are sent from the controller to the instrument They differ in their program header formats Common Command Header Commands that are defined in the IEEE 488 2 1987 are called common commands The header format of a comm
86. local mode 16 35 KLOCk 1 0 ON OFF Sets the key lock state ON or OFF 16 35 KLOCk Queries the key lock state ON or OFF 16 35 BEEPer STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the beep sound ON or OFF 16 35 STATe Queries the beep sound state ON or OFF 16 35 LFRequency 50 60 Sets the power frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 16 35 LFRequency Queries the power frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 16 35 WAIT lt Time gt Holds the command parsing operation for a specified time 16 35 COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess lt Integer gt Sets the GP IB address 16 35 ADDRess Queries the GP IB address 16 35 RS232 BAUDrate 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 115200 Sets the RS 232 baud rate 9600 bps to 115200 bps 16 36 BAUDrate Queries the RS 232 baud rate 9600 bps to 115200 bps 16 36 DLENgth 7 8 Sets the RS 232 data length 7 bits or 8 bits 16 36 DLENgth Queries the RS 232 data length 7 bits or 8 bits 16 36 PARity NONE EVEN ODD Sets the RS 232 parity none even or odd 16 36 IM 765501 01E 16 11 spuewwos UoHesUNWWOD g 16 2 Commands Command Function Page PARity Queries the RS 232 parity none even or odd 16 36 SBITs 1 2 Sets the RS 232 stop bit 1 bit or 2 bits 16 36 SBITs Queries the RS 232 stop bit 1 bit or 2 bits 16 36 PACE NONE XON HARDware Sets the RS 232 flow control none XON OFF or CTS RTS 16 36 PACE Queries the RS 232 flow control none XON OFF or CTS RTS 16 36 TERMinator CR LF CRLF Sets the RS 23
87. message Program Message Unit Format The program message unit format is shown below lt Program data gt lt Program header gt 2m Space lt Program Header gt The program header indicates the command type For details see page 16 3 lt Program Data gt If certain conditions are required in executing a command program data is added A space ASCII code 20H separates the program data from the header If there are multiple sets of program data they are separated by commas For details see page 16 5 Example SAMPLE GATE MODE TIME lt PMT gt l Header Data Response Messages Data that is sent from the instrument to the controller are called response messages The response message format is shown below alt lt Response message unit gt ides lt RMT gt lt Response Message Unit gt A response message consists of one or more response message units each response message unit corresponds to one response Response message units are separated by a semicolon For details regarding the format of the response message unit see the next section Example SAMPLE INHIBIT STATE 1 POLARITY POSITIVE lt RMT gt Unit Unit lt RMT gt lt RMT gt is a response message terminator It is NL END Response Message Unit Format The response message unit format is shown below Ei lt Response header gt Space lt
88. or queries the current setting Syntax SOURcCe CURRent PROTection STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns the limiter ON 0 or OFF Turns the limiter OFF SOURce CURRent PROTection STATe 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example SOUR CURR PROT STAT OFF SOUR CURR PROT STAT Description This command and SOURce VOLTage PROTection STATe are equivalent SOURce CURRent PROTection LINKage Function Sets the limiter tracking state ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce CURRent PROTection LINKage 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns limiter tracking ON 0 or OFF Turns limiter tracking OFF SOURce CURRent PROTection LINKage 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example SOUR CURR PROT LINK OFF SOUR CURR PROT LINK Description This command and SOURce VOLTage PROTection LINKage are equivalent 16 20 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands SOURce CURRent PROTection ULIMit Function Syntax Example Description Sets the upper current limiter value for generating voltage or queries the current setting SOURce CURRent PROTection ULIMit lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum lt current gt Sets the limiter value to the specified value MINimum Sets the limiter value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the limiter value to the maximum value SOURce CURRent PROTection ULIMit MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Q
89. pattern is set to sweep SOURce MODE SWEep or program sweep SOURce MODE LIST SWEep COUNt Function Sets the sweep repeat count or queries the current setting Syntax SWEEp COUNt lt Integer gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum lt Integer gt Sets the sweep repeat count to the specified value INFinity Sets the sweep repeat count to infinity MINimum Sets the sweep repeat count to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the sweep repeat count to the maximum value SWEEp COUNt MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value gt lt lnteger gt Current count INF Currently set to infinity Example SWE COUN 10 SWE COUN INF SWE COUN MAX SWE COUN SWE COUN MAX Description This setting is used when the sweep pattern is set to sweep SOURce MODE SWEep or program sweep SOURce MODE LIST SWEep LAST Function Sets the sweep termination mode keep level or return to initial level or queries the current setting Syntax SWEEp LAST KEEP RETurn KEEP Retains the last level RETurn Returns to the level before starting SWEep LAST gt KEEP Currently set to keep retains the last level RET Currently set to return reset to the level before starting Example SWE LAST KEEP SWE LAST Description This setting is used when the sweep pattern is set to sweep SOURce MODE SWEep or program sweep SOURce MO
90. received e When the instrument is power cycled The output queue cannot be emptied using the CLS command To see whether the output queue is empty or not check bit 4 MAV of the status byte gt _ gt D2 gt D1 D1 D2 D1 Error Queue The error queue stores the error No and message when an error occurs For example if the controller sends an incorrect program message the error number and message 113 Undefined header are stored in the error queue when the error is displayed The contents of the error queue can be read using the SYSTem ERRor query As with the output queue the messages are read from the oldest ones first When the error queue overflows the last message is replaced by the message 350 Queue overflow The error queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed e When a CLS command is received e When the instrument is power cycled To see whether the error queue is empty or not check bit 2 EAV of the status byte 3999 16 48 IM 765501 01E 16 4 Sample Programs Notes on Using the Sample Programs Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for any problems that may occur as a result of using the sample programs 16 4 1 Before Programming Applicable Model and Language Model Windows PC Language Visual Basic Version 5 0 Professional Edition or later GPIB board AT GPIB T
91. recent result file Result csv The file names are automatically updated When the second storage operation completes Result csv Result 1 csv j The file names are automatically updated When the third storage operation completes Current Result csv Result 1 csv Result 2 csv Result files stored in the GS610RAM Note ___ GS610RANM is a volatile memory When the GS610 is turned OFF the stored files are lost If you want to save the result files copy them to a different directory before you turn the GS610 OFF Stopping the Storage Operation If you press STORE before the storage operation reaches the specified store count the storage operation is forcibly stopped The results until the storage operation is stopped are saved in the result file on the GS610RAM disk lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt TRACe STATe TRACe POINts TRACe AUTO IM 765501 01E 9 3 sonjeA uoneyndwos jesnsneis Huljjesoy pue s jnsey peinseeyy Bunos je 9 2 Procedure Explanation Recalling Statistical Computation Values DISPLAY To exit the menu during operation press O O C Cc O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the stone CE ne Mva ro m Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation f s
92. see section 2 6 Sweep is ON in DC source mode the source level changes after a time specified by the source delay elapses from the point in which the trigger is activated Then measurement starts after a time specified by measurement delay elapses When the measurement and computation are complete one source measure cycle is finished However if you change the source level with a key or a communication command in the middle of a source measure cycle the source level changes immediately without waiting for the source delay or measure delay and the internal trigger phase is reset If the sweep mode is OFF the source level is maintained and the source measure cycle is carried out If the measurement function is turned OFF see section 2 4 Measurement measure delay measurement and computation are not carried out The time when the source level changes is the end of the source measure cycle Trigger Previous source l I Source i i l level Measurement Source delay al J_ m delay i Current source level Measurement Computation Measurement Source measure cycle Selectable Range of Source Values Source Levels See section 5 2 Source Range Settings Note The output capacitance indicated below exists between the Hi OUTPUT and Lo OUTPUT terminals of the GS610 This capacitance produces the following effects e Ifthe load changes dras
93. status output Level Lo ON 8 pin BNC OUT Zero Zero source status output Level Lo ZERO 8 pin BNC OUT Program Programmable output Pulse Level programmable 9 pin BNC OUT Compare HI Comparison result output high Level Lo 10 pin Compare IN Comparison result output IN Level Lo 11 pin Compare LO Comparison result output low Level Lo 12 pin Compare OV Comparison result output Level Lo 13 pin OVERRANGE Compare END Compare end Pulse L 14 pin GND Ground 1 pin 15 pin The input TTL level is a negative pulse of 10 us or greater in width The output TTL level is a negative pulse of 10 us in width Note There are no settings that need to be entered on the GS610 screen for the trigger input TrigIn sweep synchronization input Sweep Start In control input Ctrl In and comparison result output Compare of the external input output connector Make connections according to the pin assignments given above IM 765501 01E 10 3 indjno Nduy jeu13 x3 pue jndyno jndu ONG 10 1 Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and the External Input Output Connector Input Signals Trigger TrigIn A trigger signal input used to start the source measure cycle The falling edge works in the same fashion as the TRIG key Sweep Start SweepStartin A start signal input used to start the sweep operation The falling edge works in the same fashion as the START key Interlock CirlIn Intlock An in
94. the result of subtracting 0 75 from 1 25 times the measured value write the equation as follows M M 1 25 0 75 The available binary operators are listed below Symbol Meaning Addition Subtraction 7 Multiplication Division Modulo the remainder of an integer division operation a Power lt Less than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to Equal to l Not equal to and Logical product or Logical sum xor Exclusive OR The following two unary operators are available Symbol Meaning not Not Negation Equations using functions can also be written For example if you wish to compute the absolute value of the measured value you can use the absolute value function ABS as follows M ABS M The available functions are listed below Function Meaning ABC n Absolute value of n EXP n e to the n power LN n Natural logarithm of n LOG n Common logarithm of n SQRT n Square root of n SIN n Sine of n COS n Cosine of n TAN n Tangent of n ASIN n Arc sine of n ACOS n Arc cosine of n ATAN n Arc tangent of n SINH n Hyperbolic sine of n COSH n Hyperbolic cosine of n TANH n Hyperbolic tangent of n RAND Random number between 0 and 1 RAND n Random number between 0 and 1 using n as a seed TRUNC n Truncate n to an integer toward 0 EDGE n 1 when n changes from zero to a non zero value otherwise 0 MKTIME n Conve
95. the store data number 16 30 NUMBer MINimum MAXimum Queries the store data number 16 30 TIME Queries the time stamp of the stored data 16 30 SOURce Queries the source value of the stored data 16 30 SENSe Queries the measured value of the stored data 16 30 SETup Queries the stored data setup mnemonic 16 30 MONLy 1 0 ON OFF Sets the measurement only state ON or OFF 16 30 MONLy Queries the measurement only state ON or OFF 16 30 External Input Output Commands ROUTe Group ROUTe BNCI SELect TRIGger SWEep CONTrol Selects the BNC input trigger input sweep start input or control input 16 31 SELect Queries the BNC input selection trigger input sweep start input or control input 16 31 CONTrol ILOCk OUTPut ZERO Selects the BNC control input interlock output control or zero control 16 31 CONTrol Queries the BNC control input selection interlock output control or zero control 16 31 BNCO SELect TRIGger SWEep CONTrol Selects the BNC output trigger output sweep synchronization output or control output 16 31 SELect Queries the BNC output selection trigger output sweep synchronization output or control output 16 31 TRIGger ORIGin SCHange MBEGin MEND PEND Sets the BNC trigger output generation timing trigger source change measurement begin measurement end or pulse end 16 31 TRIGger Queries the BNC trigger output generation timing trigger source change measurement be
96. uonoun e6e101g gsn pue su s e907 pue asusas ajoWayY d 1 UON EUUOD Hum s 4866 gt 4 2 Connection Type Remote Sense and Local Sense e Two terminal connection s610 7 3 OUTPUT Hi DUT Vo sense Hi pur Q ee Lo OseNsE Lo An error equal to lo x r1 r2 occurs DUT Device Under Test Voltage sense e Four terminal connection GS610 i DuT vo OUTPUT LO Current sense DUT Device Under Test Voltage sense rer rer An error approximately equal to lo x E r occurs but the effects are small if r1 to r4 are adequately small Note If 4W four terminal connection is used the source voltage between the Hi OUTPUT and Lo OUTPUT terminals is greater than the voltage generated atthe load If the source voltage between the Hi OUTPUT and Lo OUTPUT terminals exceeds the source range the GS610 cannot generate the voltage correctly and abnormal load detection may be activated causing the output to be turned OFF Be sure that the source voltage between the Hi OUTPUT and Lo OUTPUT terminals do not exceed the source range of the range setting lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SENSe RSENse IM 765501 01E 4 3 USB Storage Function Connecting the USB Cable 1 Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB port on the GS610 rear panel NK USB port use
97. value lt Voltage gt SOUR VOLT PBAS 0 5 SOUR VOLT PBAS MAX SOUR VOLT PBAS SOUR VOLT PBAS MAX SOURce VOLTage PROTection STATe Function Syntax Example Description Sets the limiter state ON or OFF or queries the current setting SOURce VOLTage PROTection STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns the limiter ON 0 or OFF Turns the limiter OFF SOURce VOLTage PROTection STATe 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF SOUR VOLT PROT STAT OFF SOUR VOLT PROT STAT This command and SOURce CURRent PROTection STATe are equivalent SOURcCe VOLTage PROTection LINKage Function Syntax Example Description Sets the limiter tracking state ON or OFF or queries the current setting SOURce VOLTage PROTection LINKage 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns limiter tracking ON 0 or OFF Turns limiter tracking OFF SOURce VOLTage PROTection LINKage 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF SOUR VOLT PROT LINK OFF SOUR VOLT PROT LINK This command and SOURce CURRent PROTection LINKage are equivalent SOURcCe VOLTage PROTection ULIMit Function Syntax Example Description Sets the upper voltage limiter value for generating current or queries the current setting SOURce VOLTage PROTection ULIMit lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum lt Voltage gt Sets the limiter value to the specified value MINimum Sets the limiter value to the minimu
98. 0 002 2 mV 500 uV 3 mV 60 V 60 000 V 1 mV 1 A 0 02 20 mV 6 mV 40 mV 0 002 2 mV 600 uV 4 mV 110 V 110 000 V 1 mV 0 5 A 0 02 20 mV 8 mV 70 mV 0 002 2 mV 800 uV 7 mV Accuracy One year accuracy at 23 5 C Temperature coefficient Add the temperature coefficient at 5 to 18 C and 28 to 40 C The values inside the parentheses are those when the limiter range is 3 A DC Current Source Current Limiter Voltage Limiter Range Source Resolution Max Load Accuracy One Year Temperature Setting Range Voltage of setting A Coefficient of setting A C 20uA 20 5000 uA 100pA 110 V 0 03 50 nA 0 003 5 nA 200 uA 205 000uA 1nA 110 V 0 03 300 nA 0 003 30 nA 2mA 2 05000mA 10nA 110 V 0 03 3 uA 0 003 300 nA 20mA 20 5000 mA 100nA 110 V 0 03 30 uA 0 003 3 uA 200 mA 205 000 mA 1uA 110 V 0 03 300 uA 0 003 30 uA 0 5A 0 50000A 10 pA 110 V 0 03 5 mA 0 003 500 uA 1A 1 00000 A 10 pA 60 V 0 03 5 mA 0 003 500 uA 2A 2 00000 A 10 pA 30 V 0 03 5 mA 0 003 500 uA 3A 3 20000 A 10 pA 12 V 0 03 5 mA 0 003 500 uA Accuracy One year accuracy at 23 5 C Temperature coefficient Add the temperature coefficient at 5 to 18 C and 28 to 40 C ILimiter Valuel Range Setting Resolution Minimum Limit Value 0 10 uA to 20 00 uA 20 uA 10 nA 100 nA 20 1 uA to 200 0 uA 200 uA 100 nA 1 WA 0 201 mA to 2 000 mA 2mA 1uA 10 uA 2 01 mA to 20 00 mA 20 mA 10 uA 100 uA 20 1 mA to 200 0 mA 200 mA 100 uA 1mA 0 201 Ato 3 200 A 3A
99. 0ROM of the first GS610 via the USB 4 Set each GS610 as follows Setup Example of the First GS610 Setup Example of the Second GS610 SOURCE Output function Voltage output Current output Limiter value 150 mA 1V Output mode DC DC Output range AUTO AUTO OUTPUT CONTROL Trigger mode Internal Internal Sweep mode Program OFF MEASURE Measurement function ON OFF Measurement function Current measurement Integration time 200 ms Measurement range AUTO Auto store ON Store ON TIME Source delay tus Measurement delay ims Repeat period 500 ms of the internal trigger Repeat period of the internal trigger gt Output delay measure delay integration time a a Time caused by range change calibration and so on IM 765501 01E App 7 a x pu ddy Appendix 2 Application Examples Source and Measurement 1 Use the second GS610 to supply a constant current Ip base current across the base and the emitter of the transistor 2 Use the first GS610 to apply the voltage pattern created in step 1 in Preparation as collector emitter voltage Vcr of the transistor see section 6 2 Setting the Program Sweep and measure collector current Ic 3 A file containing the source voltage pattern and measured results is created in the internal volatile memory GS610RAM of the first GS610 See section 9 1 Storing the Measured Results 4 Transfer Copy the measurement result
100. 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example TRAC STAT ON TRAC STAT Description The storage operation automatically turns OFF after the store count TRACe POINts of basic cycles are completed after the storage operation is turned ON If auto storage is ON TRACe AUTO ON the storage operation automatically turns ON when the sweep operation is started TRACe AUTO Function Sets the auto storage state ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax TRACe AUTO 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns auto storage ON 0 or OFF Turns auto storage OFF TRACe AUTO gt 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example TRAC AUTO ON TRAC AUTO Description If auto storage is ON the storage operation automatically turns ON TRACe STATe ON when the sweep operation is started TRACe POINts Function Syntax Example Description Sets the store count or queries the current setting TRACe POINts lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum lt Integer gt Sets the store count to the specified value MINimum Sets the store count to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the store count to the maximum value TRACe POINts MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt lnteger gt TRAC POIN 256 If auto storage is ON TRACe AUTO ON the store count is automatically set to the sweep count Sweep count x repeat count
101. 1 5 94E 07 2 50E 01 5 94E 07 3 00E 01 5 86E 07 3 50E 01 5 95E 07 4 00E 01 5 92E 07 4 50E 01 5 96E 07 5 00E 01 5 92E 07 50E 01 5 94E 07 6 00E 01 5 92E 07 6 50E 01 6 00E 07 7 00E 01 5 90E 07 7 50E 01 5 92E 07 8 00E 01 5 90E 07 8 50E 01 5 78E 07 9 00E 01 5 87E 07 9 50E 01 6 90E 07 1 00E 00 5 91E 07 1 10E 00 5 72E 07 1 20E 00 5 77E 07 1 30E 00 5 77E 07 TAPE Resut A im wie Ready W IM 765501 01E App 11 a x pu ddy Appendix 2 Application Examples Voltage Fluctuation Simulation of Electronic Devices and Sensors for Vehicles Transient signals can be generated 10 kS s at the fastest using the USB storage function of the GS610 This section explains how to output from the GS610 real waveforms such as the fluctuation signal of an automotive power supply 12 V or 24 V Key Points in the Operation and Setting 1 Using real waveforms See the user s manual that comes with your instrument such as YOKOGAWA s Digital ScopeCoder DL750P 2 Transferring the pattern files using the USB storage function See section 6 6 Program Pattern File and 4 3 USB Storage Function e Example in which the real waveform of supply voltage fluctuation is reproduced via a PC Spike noise Voltage degradation 12 Air conditioner A startup Wiper startup Voltage fluctuation and Time F superimposed noise of a battery Capture the superimposed battery no
102. 1 Other Functions 11 4 Saving the Setup Data sas ceesuczcussssies a ae Eae denotes REEE E aE a ethers 11 1 11 2 Loading the Setup Data yorini e e a 11 3 11 3 Selecting the Settings Applied at Power ON eecccecceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeaeeteeeeeaees 11 4 11 4 Turning the Beep Sound ON OFF ceesceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeesaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesieeeneenaaes 11 5 11 5 Displaying the Error Log cic sich eaves ite de ae ea ede 11 6 11 6 Selecting the Display Brightness and Turning the Display OFF sses 11 7 VEZ Key LOCK ieren tastes le cer fee aara crete betes ar aa eared a EEST a EA EE ele 11 8 11 8 Selecting the Decimal Point and Separator Notations of CSV Files 0 00 eeeeeeeeeees 11 9 Chapter 12 Ethernet Interface Option 12 1 Ethernet Interface Functions and Specifications 00 0 0 cceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaees 12 1 12 2 Connecting to the Network eccececeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteaeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeeeneeseeeeeeeenaes 12 2 12 3 Setting the 1 CRP a a ao E e Ea aae alee det Seine dee lashes 12 3 12 4 Checking the Ethernet Settings eeceeceesceeeneeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeseeeseaeesaeeeaeesaeeeeeeneeenaes 12 6 12 5 Web Server FUNCION zo pcnn acdsee iii eee ad eee ee edie ete ee 12 7 IM 765501 01E Contents Chapter 13 GP IB Communications 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard eccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee
103. 10 SOURCE Output function Current output Limiter value 3V Output mode Pulse Output range AUTO OUTPUT CONTROL Trigger mode Internal MEASURE Measurement function Voltage measurement Integration time 250us Measurement range AUTO AUTO V I ON auto switching of the measurement mode Store count 65535 points TIME Source delay tus Measurement delay tus Repeat period of the internal trigger 40ms Pulse width 5 ms Source and Measurement 1 The GS610 outputs sinks the pulse current to the secondary battery and measures the voltage The source values and measured results are saved to a single file in the internal memory of the GS610 GS610RAM 2 Transfer Copy the measurement result file from the GS610RAM to the PC via the USB IM 765501 01E App 17 a x pu ddy Appendix 3 Contents of the Factory Default Setup File Default txt Item Setting Item Setting Source Mode DC External BNC input terminal setting Trig Function Voltage source input output BNC output terminal setting Trig Auto range OFF Trig setting of the BNC Origin Voltage range setting 2V output terminal Voltage level oV DIO5 input connector Output Voltage pulse base OV setting Current range setting 2mA DIO6 output connector Origin Current level 0 mA setting Current pulse base 0 mA DIO7 output connector Origin Voltage zero offset 0 mV setting Current zero offset 0 uA DIO8 output connector IntLock Voltage ze
104. 2 50 3 75 5 00 The same pattern file can also be written using floating point numbers as follows 0 00E 0 1 25E 0 2 50E 0 3 75E 0 5 00E 0 IM 765501 01E 6 11 6 6 Program Pattern File In a pattern file a command specified by the user can be executed before each source measure cycle For example a pattern file for generating the following pattern in the figure is shown below 4 Source voltage 5V 3 5V f 3V 2V ov j 1s 100ms500ms Time 0 0 TRIG TIM 1 5 0 TRIG TIM 0 1 2 0 3 5 3 0 TRIG TIM 0 5 As shown above if a character string enclosed in double quotations is written after the source value it is executed as a command mnemonic before the source measure cycle Multiple commands can be connected using semicolons in the command mnemonic Note that the source value and the command mnemonic are separated by acomma For a detailed description of the command mnemonic see section 16 2 Commands Note e The maximum number of steps in program pattern is 65535 If a program pattern whose step count exceeds 65535 is swept the first 65535 points are loaded e You can change the decimal point and separator that are used in the program pattern files to the notations that match the Excel program that you use For the procedure see section 11 8 Selecting the Decimal Point and Separator Notations of CSV Files 6 12 IM 765501 01E Chapter 7 Measur
105. 2 terminator CR LF or CR LF 16 36 TERMinator Queries the RS 232 terminator CR LF or CR LF 16 36 sETHer MAC Queries the MAC address of Ethernet communication 16 37 PORT Queries the command socket port number of Ethernet communication 16 37 DHCP 1 0 ON OFF Sets DHCP ON or OFF of Ethernet communication 16 37 DHCP Queries the DHCP state ON or OFF of Ethernet communication 16 37 IP lt String gt Sets the IP address of Ethernet communication 16 37 IP Queries the IP address of Ethernet communication 16 37 MASK lt String gt Sets the net mask of Ethernet communication 16 37 MASK Queries the net mask of Ethernet communication 16 37 GATE lt String gt Sets the default gateway of Ethernet communication 16 37 GATE Queries the default gateway of Ethernet communication 16 37 TERMinator CR LF CRLF Sets the terminator CR LF or CR LF of Ethernet communication 16 37 TERMinator Queries the terminator CR LF or CR LF of Ethernet communication 16 37 Measured Value Read Commands INITiate FETCh and READ Group INITiate Starts a new measurement 16 38 FETCh Queries the measured results 16 38 READ Starts a new measurement and queries the measured results 16 38 Status Commands STATus Group STATus SOURCe CONDition Queries the source event condition register 16 39 EVENt Queries the source event register and clears the register 16 39 ENABle lt Integer gt lt Binary Octal Hexadecimal gt Set
106. 200 ms Range Measurement Resolution Accuracy One Year Temperature Coefficient Setting Range of reading V of reading V C 200 mV 205 000 mV 1uV 0 02 100 uV 0 002 30 uV 2V 2 05000 V 10 uV 0 02 200 uV 0 002 20 uV 20 V 20 5000 V 100 uV 0 02 1 mV 0 002 100 uV 110 V 110 000 V 1 mV 0 02 10 mV 0 002 1 mV Integration time of 4 ms 1 ms or 250 us Range Measurement Resolution Accuracy One Year Temperature Coefficient Setting Range of reading V of reading V C 200 mV 205 00 mV 10 uV 0 02 200 uV 300 uV 0 002 20 uV 30 uV 2V 2 0500 V 100 uV 0 02 300 uV 500 uV 0 002 30 uV 50 uV 20 V 20 500 V 1 mV 0 02 3 mV 5 mV 0 002 300 uV 500 uV 110 V 110 00 V 10 mV 0 02 30 mV 50 mV 0 002 3 mV 5 mV Accuracy One year accuracy at 23 5 C with auto zero turned ON Temperature coefficient Add the temperature coefficient at 5 to 18 C and 28 to 40 C Values inside the parentheses are those when those when the integration time 1 ms or 250 us Current Measurement Integration Time of 16 66 ms 20 ms 100 ms or 200 ms Range Measurement Resolution Accuracy One Year Temperature Coefficient Setting Range of reading A of reading A C 20 uA 20 5000 pA 100 pA 0 03 50 nA 0 003 5 nA 200 uA 205 000 uA 1nA 0 03 300 nA 0 003 30 nA 2mA 2 05000 mA 10 nA 0 03 3 uA 0 003 300 nA 20 mA 20 5000 mA 100 nA 0 03 30 uA 0 003 3 uA 200 mA 205 000 mA 1 uA 0 03 300 uA 0 003 30 uA
107. 2e yu z u1 473 i 12 2 Connecting to the Network Connect a UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable or an STP Shielded Twisted Pair cable that is connected to a hub for example to the 100BASE TX port on the rear panel of the GS610 ETHERNET 100BASE TX port ACT indicator Blinks when packet transmission is in progress ETHERNET 100BASE TX ACT Q LINK indicator LINK llluminates when the link between the port on the GS610 and the connected device is established and communication is mutually possible r RJ 45 modular jack Cable Use either of the following cables to make the connection e UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable category 5 or better STP Shielded Twisted Pair cable category 5 or better When Connecting to a PC on the Network Hub or router that supports 100BASE TX O UTP cable or STP cable Ethernet NIC Straight cable When Making a One to One Connection with the PC Hub or router that supports 100BASE TX PC Gc GS610 oe Oean 5 ael So a UTP cable or STP cable Ethernet NIC Straight cable Note When using a UTP cable or STP cable straight cable be sure to use a category 5 or
108. 3 0 V 3 1 V and 3 2 V the output OFF Then generate a trigger read the results and turn Function SampleSequence2 Dim dev As Integer Dim result 5 As Double dev CommOpen Open the device Call Setup2 dev Set to Setup 2 Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT LEV 2 8 Set the level to 2 8 V result 0 TrigReadAsDouble dev Generate a trigger and read the result Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT LEV 2 9 Set the level to 2 9 V result 1 TrigReadAsDouble dev Generate a trigger and read the result Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT LEV 3 0 Set the level to 3 0 V result 2 TrigReadAsDouble dev Generate a trigger and read the result Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT LEV 3 1 Set the level to 3 1 V result 3 TrigReadAsDouble dev Generate a trigger and read the result Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT LEV 3 2 Set the level to 3 2 V result 4 TrigReadAsDouble dev Generate a trigger and read the result Call CommSend dev OUTP STAT OFF Turn the output OFF Call CommClose dev Close the device End Function 16 56 IM 765501 01E 16 4 Sample Programs 16 4 5 Sample 3 Example of Updating the Source Level from a PC Attribute VB_Name Sample3 Sample 3 Example of Updating the Source Level from a PC CALL SampleSequence3 Setup 3 lt Source setting gt Source function Source range setting
109. 535 Starting the Storage Operation When the storage operation starts the STORE key illuminates and the storage of the results of the source measure cycle starts When the specified store count of source measure cycle results are stored the storage operation automatically stops and the STORE key turns OFF The stored results are stored in the result file Result csv on the GS610 RAM disk Result File The stored results are stored in the result file Result csv on the GS610 RAM disk The result file is a text file in CSV format Note You can change the decimal point and separator that are used in the result files to the notations that match the Excel program that you use For the procedure see section 11 8 Selecting the Decimal Point and Separator Notations of CSV Files Result File Example Time stamps Source values Measured values Command mnemonic specified by a program pattern file Outputs the comparison results when the comparison operation is ON In iolx 4 High ES B Gimli D El F J 1 Low 1 Timets Source V Measure A Setup Comp EN O 000E 00 9 43E 07 TRIG TIM 1 0 3 09974 5 00E 00 3 29E 07 TRIG TIM 0 1 1 4 1 0974 400E 00 1 18E 06 j Mea 1 1974 3 50E 00 1 07E 06 zl Gm 1 2974 3 00E 00 1 06E 06 TRIG TIM 0 5 1 a Sas e jea 10_ abs ed 13 a gt Mih Result Jal sf Up to 33 result files are stored through auto numbering within the capacity 4 MB of th
110. 7 Queries the function sweep start point 1 turn end or all sweep end of pin 7 sweep synchronization output of the external input output connector 16 32 DIO8 ILOCk OUTPut ZERO Sets the function interlock output control or zero control of pin 8 control output of the external input output connector 16 33 DIO8 Queries the function interlock output control or zero control of pin 8 control output of the external input output connector 16 33 System Commands SYSTem Group SYSTem DISPlay STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the display state ON or OFF 16 34 STATe Queries the display state ON or OFF 16 34 BRIGht lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the display brightness 16 34 BRIGht MINimum MAXimum Queries the display brightness 16 34 CLOCk DATE lt String gt Sets the date 16 34 DATE Queries the date 16 34 TIME lt String gt Sets the time 16 34 TIME Queries the time 16 34 TZONe lt String gt Sets the time zone 16 34 TZONe Queries the time zone 16 34 SETup SAVE lt String gt Saves the setup data 16 34 LOAD lt String gt Loads the setup data 16 34 CATalog Queries a list of setup data files 16 34 DELete lt String gt Deletes the setup data file 16 34 PON lt String gt Sets the setup data applied at power on 16 35 PON Queries the setup data applied at power on 16 35 ERRor Queries the error code and message information 16 35 REMote Transits to remote mode 16 35 LOCal Transits to
111. 7 57 15 77 UNL 117 15 137 UNT 157 15 177 9 DEL US a O Oo RUBOUT 1F 31 2F 47 3F 63 4F 79 5F 95 6F 111 7F 127 Universal Listener Talker Secondary Command Address Address Command GP IB code ASCII character code hexadecimal decimal IM 765501 01E 16 63 SpUueWILUOD UOHeoIUNWWOD Chapter 17 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 17 1 Troubleshooting For the appropriate corrective actions when an error code is shown on the display see section 17 2 e If servicing is necessary or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing the corrective actions described below contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action Reference Section The power does not turn ON ratings Using a power supply outside the Use a correct power supply 3 3 The GS610 does not power up correctly The setup file is corrupt If the GS610 still does not power up correctly even after cycling the power turn ON the power while holding down the ESC key and key The GS610 powers up by forcibly formatting the GS610ROM disk If the GS610 still does not power up correctly servicing is required Nothing is displayed The display is turned OFF If the SHIFT key is blinking the display is turned OFF Press any key or turn the rotary knob Keys do not work The GS610 is in remote mode The GS610 is in remote mode when the remote indicator is illuminated
112. 8 None 1 2 None CR LF 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired terminator Terminator CR LF CR LF Carry out the following settings when using a controller to set information that can be specified through key operation on the GS610 or when outputting setting data or output waveform data to the controller Selecting the Baud Rate Select the baud rate from the following 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 Selecting the Data Length Select the data length from below 8 bits or 7 bits Selecting the Parity Select the parity from the following None no parity Even or Odd Selecting the Stop Bit Select the stop bit from the following 1 bit or 2 bits Selecting the Handshaking Method Select the transmit data control and receive data control from the following None XON or CTS RTS Selecting the Terminator On the GS610 menu select the terminator that is used when transmitting data from the GS610 from the following CR LF or CR LF The GS610 handles CR LF and CR LF as a terminator when receiving data IM 765501 01E 14 7 suonedlunwwoJ ZEZ SHY eB Chapter 15 USB Interface 15 1 USB Interface Functions and Specifications USB Interface Functions USB Storage Function The two disks GS610ROM and GS610RAM can be accessed as external removable disks on your PC see section 2 9 USB Storage Function Command Control Function by Way of USB TMC The GS610 can be controlled us
113. 8 or 3 9 COMPARE VALUE 1 Press TIME to display the Time menu 2 Press the M Delay soft key to display the measurement delay setup screen Delay M Delay Period P Width lus SOus 50 00ms 25 00ms 3 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the measurement delay Measure Delay 5 us i td M Delay Period P Width 50 00ms 25 00ms 4 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting M Delay 50 ps mS Enter 7 4 IM 765501 01E 7 4 Setting the Measurement Delay Explanation Measurement Delay You can set the wait time at which the measurement is started after the source level is switched m L aO Int or Ext Source delay ra Source value Source Measurement delay i Measurement time Computation Measurement Source measure cycle Selectable Range 1 uS to 3600 000000 s Note on the load source value and limiter value Adjust the measurement delay by taking these into account as well as the time required for the measurement accuracy test lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SENSe DELay The time needed for the source value to stabilize after the source is applied varies depending IM 765501 01E yu w INSeLe N E 7 5 Setting the Integration Time
114. A A Be sure to turn OFF the GS610 output when connecting the DUT Do not connect a voltage source when generating voltage or a current source when generating current Incorrect connection may damage the GS610 Do not exceed a load that exceeds the maximum output indicated below between the OUTPUT Hi and OUTPUT Lo or SENSE Hi and SENSE Lo terminals Voltage Source Current Source Range Setting Maximum Output Range Setting Maximum Output 200 mV to 12 V range 3 2A 20 uA to 0 5 A range 110 V 20 V and 30 V range 2 A 1 A range 60 V 60 V range 1 A 2 A range 30 V 110 V range 0 5 A 3 A range 12 V The maximum allowable voltage between the case and each terminal is 250 Vpeak Applying a voltage exceeding this value can damage the GS610 Keep the voltage that is generated between OUTPUT Hi and SENSE Hi as well as OUTPUT Lo and SENSE Lo less than or equal to 1 Vpeak When making a four terminal connection be careful that the connection to the SENSE terminal does not get cut If the voltage is not sensed correctly abnormal voltage will appear between OUTPUT Hi and OUTPUT Lo terminals When making a two terminal connection use the OUTPUT terminals If you use the SENSE terminals the current flows through the SENSE line causing damage to the GS610 CAUTION Use conducting wires that have adequate margins of withstand voltage and current capacity with respect to the voltage or current to be used To prevent oscilla
115. Commands INITiate FETCh and READ Group 16 38 16 2 12 Status Commands STATUS Group eeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeneeteaeeeeeetaee 16 39 16 2 13 Common Command Group cecceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeseaeeeneeteeeeeeeeeaes 16 40 16 3 StatUs REPOrts 2 ee eeeeeseeeeneeeneeeeaeeeeeseaeesaeseaeesaeesaeeseaeeeseeseaeesaeeseaeeeieeseaeeeeeeeeaeee 16 42 16 3 1 Overview of the Status Report 000 0 eceeeeceeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeenaaes 16 42 16 32 StAtUs Byle s 5 ssisseszsgsccesectenacstenes a cesazensessaatereete a aE EaI ea r aae E DREES 16 43 16 3 3 Standard Event Register 0 0 0 0 ccesceeeseeseeeeneeeseeteaeeseeeeeaeesaeeeaeesseeeseeeeaeenses 16 44 16 3 4 Source Event Register cccescseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeseeseeeseeeeeaes 16 46 16 3 5 Measure Event Register eeceeeeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeesaneeseneeeeneneeeeea 16 47 16 3 6 Output Queue and Error Queue 2 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeetaeeteaeeeeeseaeeeteeteaes 16 48 16 4 Sample Programs isecen sn sr eneeier ae aar oul aA aE E rea ESA aR 16 49 16 4 1 Before Programming esseesssessrnssrrnsernrerrnssrnnnrrnnntrnnnrrnnsennennantnnntnnnennnnenn 16 49 16 4 2 GP IB Access FUNCTION sseeseeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeetetnetntttnetnntttstnstnnennstntennstnnenne 16 50 16 4 3 Sample 1 Example of Reading the Measured Results during Free Run Using terial TQ GSM nirs aaa 16 53 IM 765501 01E x
116. DE LIST IM 765501 01E 16 23 spuewwos uonesiunwwog g 16 2 Commands 16 2 5 Measurement Commands SENSe GRoup SENSe STATe Function Sets the measurement state ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax SENSe STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns the measurement ON 0 or OFF Turns the measurement OFF SENSe STATe 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example SENS STAT OFF SENS STAT SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage CURRent RESistance Function Sets the measurement function voltage current or resistance or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage CURRent RESistance VOLTage Sets the measurement function to voltage CURRent Sets the measurement function to current RESistance Sets the measurement function to resistance SOURce FUNCtion gt VOLT Currently set to voltage CURR Currently set to current RES Current set to resistance Example SENS FUNC RES SENS FUNC SENSe RANGe AUTO Function Sets the measurement auto range ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax SENSe RANGe AUTO 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns auto range ON 0 or OFF Turns auto range OFF SENSe RANGe AUTO 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example SENS RANG AUTO OFF SENS RANG AUTO SENSe ITIMe Function Sets the integration time or queries the current setting Syntax SENSe ITIMe lt Time gt PLC MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN lt Time gt S
117. Do not use the GS610 for making measurements in Measurement Categories Il Ill and IV 3 Pollution Degree applies to the degree of adhesion of a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates withstand voltage or surface resistivity Pollution Degree 2 applies to normal indoor atmospheres with only non conductive pollution 4 Use acable of length 2 m or less 5 Immunity test requirements for equipment intended for use in industrial locations Display 256 x 64 dots fluorescent tube VFD Internal Memory GS610ROM 4 MB non volatile Used to save setup files and output pattern files GS610RAM 4 MB volatile cleared when the power is turned OFF Used to save the measured results Warm up time Approx 60 minutes Storage Conditions Temperature 15 C to 60 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Altitude 2000 m or less Operating Conditions Temperature 5 C to 40 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Altitude 2000 m or less Rated Supply Voltage 100 to 120 VAC or 220 to 240 VAC automatic switching Permitted Supply Voltage Range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC Rated Supply Voltage Frequency 50 60 Hz IM 765501 01E 18 7 suoleoioeds 18 6 General Specifications Permitted Supply Voltage Frequency Range 48 Hz to 63 Hz Maximum Allowable Input Voltage Between Hi SENSE and Lo SENSE and between Hi OUTPUT and Lo OUTPUT 110 Vpeak Between Hi SENSE and Hi OUTPUT and between Lo SENSE and Lo OUTPUT 1 Vpeak Ma
118. Error Wire esy I F Setup Log au 2W Setting System Selecting Ethernet Communications 3 Press the LAN soft key to display the LAN menu GPIB USB Si RS232 LAN litres Checking the Network Settings 4 Press the OverView soft key The current network settings are displayed If the settings have been changed after the GS610 was turned ON the settings before the change are displayed until the power is cycled DHCP IP SubNet Default Term i On Off Address Mask Gateway CR LF overview Explanation The following network settings can be confirmed e MAC Address A unique 48 bit address assigned to the GS610 IP address see section 12 3 e Subnet mask see section 12 3 Default gateway see section 12 3 MAC address 00 00 68 86 00 0F IP address 10 0 155 60 Subnet mask 255 255 252 0 Default gateway 10 0 156 1 Note When DHCP is enabled 0 0 0 0 is displayed for the IP address subnet mask and default gateway until the addresses are assigned If the display does not change even after 30 seconds elapses after the power is turned ON the DHCP address assignment may have failed If this happens check that the Ethernet cable is connected correctly and that the LINK indicator of the 100BASE TX port on the rear panel is illuminated and power cycle the GS610 12 6 IM 765501 01E 12 5 Web Server Function The Web server function on the GS610 links the Web browser on the PC to the GS610 and
119. Function Sets the measurement event enable register or queries the current setting Syntax STATus SENSe ENABle lt Integer gt lt Binary Octal Hexadecimal gt STATus SENSe ENABle gt lt lnteger gt Example STAT SENS ENAB 255 STAT SENS ENAB Description For details see section 16 3 IM 765501 01E 16 39 spuewwos uonesiunwwog g 16 2 Commands 16 2 13 Common Command Group IDN Function Syntax Example OPT Function Syntax Example TRG Function Syntax Example Description CAL Function Syntax Example TST Function Syntax Example RST Function Syntax Example Description SAV Function Syntax Example Description Queries the instrument model IDN Yokogawa Electric Co 765501 serial number firmware revision IDN Queries the options OPT NONE No options C10 Ethernet option OPT Generates a trigger TRG TRG Carries out the same action as the trigger key on the GP IB panel The GP IB GET Group Execute Trigger is also equivalent Performs calibration and queries the result CAL 0 Calibration successful Value other than 0 Calibration failed CAL Performs a self test and queries the result TST 0 Self test normal Value other than 0 Self test error TST Resets the GS610 to factory default settings RST RST This command is equivalent to setting the file name of the SySTem SETup
120. GMANS 5 cecceisacvsiderencacaceth naase aaae EAAS ENTRER 10 4 SaveRamDisk ceececeesesecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeens 11 1 OUP STATES siisii aae aaa Eaa AREA 2 9 Select File arra ae E ee a E 6 5 8 4 OE VIG E ETATE E 12 6 T E EE TTT AAA AT 17 6 Selftest P PWIdth sc ocsccsacsecerssescszscsaqeaseecenescesdcaatshsceaceasasanesndasstasqamneaeaes Param Ato C PANY arnan a aara eaa SSAA pattern file description EO PREE ET power COMO ticeissciess cenene eaS Erea naana nA Sae AEEA ET AAEREN power frequency n se 3 9 7 6 power switch turning ON OFF Of vcccccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssen 3 7 OU SN AY np ianiai PLOCUCE INFO ceccecceccccccccccccccccccccesecccccccsccccescescsecseeccceceseseeees 17 8 SOUICE EVENT FEGISTEL ec ee eee eeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee PROGRAM ON 2 21 4 6 SOUICO FUNCTION cicciccicssesiccacasccsscccsarzsaseseaeecsessansesabecverees PROQMAIM szideis2snesacccedsits ess sre tancsrsdabsatsasefetsncexstevadsavetatantisseeas 6 5 SOURCE group programi TOMMAL ccsccccicestcersstscatsnctevaccotessducecitateascecsaaatncesets 16 1 SOURCE grOUP sssssseeeeeteetstiiisssssssssssssssssssssssseneeenee PrOgraM SWEEP oisinn 2 14 6 5 SOWPCG VOVO i cesedsscctesuctiscetsszeastecbiscaniss eisseitevssseisianian Pilla AENEASE EEEE EEEE 5 8 source measure cycle ssssssisireisirsisrieinrisrieisrieinrnsrnernrne EAEE e A A 5 8 a N A E pulse base value cscsssessesssesssesssessesssesss
121. GS610 Source Measure Unit USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation IM 765501 01E 2nd Ed i ition Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage http tmi yokogawa com PIM 103 03E Notes Trademarks Revisions 2nd Edition January 2009 YK Thank you for purchasing the GS610 Source Measure Unit This user s manual contains useful information about the instrument s functions and operating procedures and lists the handling precautions of the GS610 To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation After reading the manual keep it in a convenient location for quick reference whenever a question arises during operation Manual Title Manual No Description GS610 Source Measure Unit IM 765501 01E This manual Explains all the functions of User s Manual the GS610 and their operating procedures The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of it
122. H directory on the internal non volatile disk GS610ROM as a definition file and performs computation The five built in computations dB txt Percent txt Scaling txt Power txt and Sinusoid txt that are stored in the MATH directory when the GS610 is shipped from the factory or when the disk is formatted are also a type of user defined computation User defined computation can be performed by creating files in the same format GS610ROM disk MATH directory User defined computation file PC Math_1 txt Transfer using the USB storage function see section 4 3 USB Storage Function or User defined computation file an FTP server see section 12 5 Web Server Function Math_1 txt 2005 06 28 16 31 T 2005 06 28 16 31 2005 06 28 16 31 2005 07 06 14 26 7 Select view File Scaling txt Power txt Sinusoid txt User defined hath txt computation file on ore Paran Farai The transferred user defined computation file can be selected as a computation definition file IM 765501 01E 8 9 uonendwog 8 5 User Defined Computation User Definition Computation Syntax The measured result is entered in variable M The computed result can be substituted into variable M to further carry out computation For example if you wish to display
123. HI LLO CHI CLO Bit7 SMP Sampling Error Set to 1 when a sampling error trigger is applied before the completion of the source measure cycle occurs Bit6 EOM End of Measurement When the measurement is completed the event register bit is set to 1 Bit5 OVR Over Range The bit in the condition register is set to 1 when a measurement overrange occurs and reset to 0 when overrange is corrected The bit in the event register is set to 1 when the condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 Bit 4 Not used always 0 Bit3 LHI High Limiting The bit in the condition register is set to 1 when the high limiter is activated and set to 0 when is deactivated The bit in the event register is set to 1 when the condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 Bit 2 LLO Low Limiting The bit in the condition register is set to 1 when the low limiter is activated and set to 0 when is deactivated The bit in the event register is set to 1 when the condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 Bit 1 CHI Compare High The bit in the condition register is set to 1 when the comparison result is high and set to 0 otherwise The bit in the event register is set to 1 when the condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 Bit 0 CLO Compare Low The bit in the condition register is set to 1 when the comparison result is low and set to 0 otherwise The bit in the event register is set to 1 when the condition register bit
124. IM 765501 01E 10 2 Synchronized Operation Note e The time for the signal to pass from TRIG IN to TRIG OUT ORIGIN is 1 us or less e The error in the time from applying a signal to TRIG IN to starting the source measure cycle is less than or equal to 10 us e Use fixed range for the source range setting ad measurement range setting on all GS610s that are to be synchronized and set various time parameters such as the integration time to the same value e Use the shortest wiring possible to reduce the delay caused by wiring capacitance e Keep the number of slave units less than five Master Up to four units If you are connecting more than 4 units connect them as shown below Be sure to take into account the delay that occurs in each unit Master ESzIEzs ae gassa Se IM 765501 01E 10 9 indjno Nduy jeu13 x3 pue jndynopndu oNG Chapter 11 Other Functions 11 1 Saving the Setup Data Procedure To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation DISPLAY panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the store Ea y vma 70 wove uur Dss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU e a e and gt are used to refer to the operation TO of selecting or setting items or ent
125. INimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value gt lt lnteger gt Example SOUR CURR SWE POIN 100 SOUR CURR SWE POIN MAX SOUR CURR SWE POIN SOUR CURR SWE POIN MAX Description This setting is used when the sweep mode is set to logarithmic SOURce CURRent SWEep SPACing LOGarithmic SOURce CURRent ZERO IMPedance Function Sets the zero source impedance high or low for generating current or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce CURRent ZERO IMPedance HIGH LOW HIGH Sets the impedance to high LOW Sets the impedance to low SOURce CURRent ZERO IMPedance gt HIGH Currently set to high impedance LOW Currently set to low impedance Example SOUR CURR ZERO IMP HIGH SOUR CURR ZERO IMP SOURce CURRent ZERO OFFset Function Sets the zero source offset value for generating current or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce CURRent ZERO OFFSet lt Current gt lt Voltage gt Sets the offset value to the specified current SOURCe CURRent ZERO OFFSet gt lt Current gt Example SOUR CURR ZERO OFFS 0 3 SOUR CURR ZERO OFFS 16 22 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands 16 2 4 Sweep Commands SWEep Group SWEep TRIGger Function Starts the sweep operation Syntax SWEEp TRIGger Example SWE TRIG Description This command is valid when the sweep
126. INimum MAXimum Queries the pulse base value for generating current pulse 16 20 PROTection STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the limiter state ON or OFF 16 20 STATe Queries the limiter state ON or OFF 16 20 LINKage 1 0 ON OFF Sets the limiter tracking state ON or OFF 16 20 LINKage Queries the limiter tracking state ON or OFF 16 20 ULIMit lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the upper current limiter value for generating voltage 16 21 ULIMit MINimum MAXimum Queries the upper current limiter value for generating voltage 16 21 LLIMit lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the lower current limiter value for generating voltage 16 21 LLIMit MINimum MAXimum Queries the lower current limiter value for generating voltage 16 21 SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Sets the sweep mode linear or log 16 21 IM 765501 01E 16 7 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands Command Function Page SPACing Queries the sweep mode linear or log of the current sweep 16 21 STARt lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the start value of the current sweep 16 21 STARt MINimum MAXimum Queries the start value of the current sweep 16 21 STOP lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the stop value of the current sweep 16 22 STOP MINimum MAXimum Queries the stop value of the current sweep 16 22 STEP lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the step value of the current sweep linear sweep 16 22 STEP MINimum MAXi
127. LOAD command to Default txt Saves the settings SAV 1 2 3 4 1 Saves the settings as Setup 1 2 Saves the settings as Setup 2 3 Saves the settings as Setup 3 4 Saves the settings as Setup 4 SAV 3 This command is equivalent to setting the file name of the SySTem SETup SAVE command to Setup1 txt to Setup4 txt RCL Function Syntax Loads the saved settings RCL 1 2 3 4 1 Loads Setup 1 Example Description CLS Function Syntax Example STB Function Syntax Example Description SRE Function Syntax Example Description ESR Function Syntax Example Description ESE Function Syntax Example Description 2 Loads Setup 2 3 Loads Setup 3 4 Loads Setup 4 RCL 3 This command is equivalent to setting the file name of the SYSTem SETup LOAD command to Setup1 txt to Setup4 txt Clears the event register and error queue CLS CLS Queries the status byte and clears the SRQ STB gt lt lnteger gt STB For details see section 16 3 GP IB Serial polling carries out the same action as this command Sets the service request enable register or queries the current setting SRE lt Integer gt lt Binary Octal Hexadecimal gt SRE gt lt Integer gt SRE 255 SRE For details see section 16 3 Queries the standard event register and clears the register ESR gt lt lnteger
128. Measurement Function Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O C Cc O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store EE ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU SURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation f selecting or setting items or enterin RECALL MATH NULL rt 3 g 9 g Le values using the rotary knob numeric inci OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER msc mE SWEEP Tant TRIG_ right arrow key For details on the fe ol KROS woo operation using the rotary knob numeric O SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or 3 9 Press the V I Q key Each time you press the key the measurement function changes as follows V I Q V and so on Explanation The following measurement functions are available V Voltage measurement l Current measurement Q Resistance measurement current measurement when generating voltage voltage measurement when generating current resistance voltage current lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SENSe FUNCtion 7 2 IM 765501 01E 7 3 Turning ON OFF the Auto Range function of the Measurement Range Settings Procedure DISPLAY
129. N SOUR CURR RANG AUTO Description This command and SOURce VOLTage RANGe AUTO are equivalent SOURce CURRent LEVel Function Sets the current source level value or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce CURRent LEVel lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum lt Voltage gt Sets the current level to the specified value MINimum Sets the current level to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the current level to the maximum value SOURce VOLTage LEVel MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value gt lt Current gt Example SOUR CURR LEV 3 5E 6 SOUR CURR LEV MIN SOUR CURR LEV SOUR CURR LEV MIN SOURcCe CURRent PBASe Function Sets the pulse base value for current pulse generation or queries the current setting Syntax SOURcCe CURRent PBASe lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum lt current gt Sets the pulse base value to the specified value MINimum Sets the pulse base value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the pulse base value to the maximum value SOURCe CURRent PBASe MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Current gt Example SOUR CURR PBAS 0 5 SOUR CURR PBAS MIN SOUR CURR PBAS SOUR CURR PBAS MIN SOURce CURRent PROTection STATe Function Sets the limiter state ON or OFF
130. N Aia 4 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the GP IB address GPIB Address 3 0 Pooh 4 of E Berd 5 If you use the numeric keys press the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Explanation GP IB Address Each device that can be connected via GP IB has a unique address within the GP IB system This address is used to distinguish the device from others If you are connecting the GS610 to a controller such as a PC select the GP IB address of the GS610 on the PC side Selectable range 0 to 30 IM 765501 01E 13 5 SUOI BDIUNWIWIOD gGi d5 13 5 Responses to Interface Messages What Is an Interface Message Interface messages are also referred to as interface commands or bus commands They are commands that are issued by the controller They are classified as follows Uni Line Messages A single control line is used to transmit uni line messages The following three types are available IFC Interface Clear REN Remote Enable and IDY Identify Multi Line Messages Eight data lines are used to transmit multi line messages The messages are classified as follows e Address commands These commands are valid when the instrument is designated as a listener or as a talker The following five types are available Commands that are valid on an instrument that is designated as a listener GTL Go To Local SDC Selected Device Clear PPC Parallel Poll Configure and GET Group Execute Tr
131. NT IEEE 488 2 by National Instruments Setting Up Visual Basic Standard modules used Niglobal bas Vbib 32 bas Setting Up the GS610 GP IB The sample programs given in this chapter use a GP IB address of 1 for the GS610 Set the GP IB address to 1 according to the procedures described in section 13 4 Or change the ADDRESS definition in GpibLib bas IM 765501 01E 16 49 SpueWLUOD uonesiunwwog 16 4 Sample Programs 16 4 2 GP IB Access Function Attribute VB_Name GpibLib GPIB Access Function Board AT GPIB TNT IEEE488 2 by National Instruments Used modules Niglobal bas and Vbib 32 bas by National Instruments Constant declaration Change them as necessary Const BOARD_ID 0 GPIB board ID Const ADDRESS 1 GS610 GPIB address Const TIMEOUT Tis Timeout value Access Functions Open function Function CommOpen As Integer Dim dev As Integer dev ildev BOARD_ID ADDRESS 0 TIMEOUT If dev gt 0 Then Call CommClear dev CommOpen dev End Function Close function Sub CommClose dev As Integer Call ilonl dev 0 End Sub Send function 1 XEOS REOS amp HA Function CommSend dev As Integer msg As String As Integer If ilwrt dev msg Chr 10 Len msg 1 And EERR Or TIMO Then CommSend 1 Else CommSend ibcntl End If End Function Receive function Function CommRecv dev As Integer msg As String As Integer Dim ret As I
132. No Error Message Corrective Action Page 101 Invalid_character Check whether invalid characters such as or amp are used in the command header or parameters 102 Syntax_error Check that the syntax is correct 103 Invalid separator Check the use of the separator comma 5 106 Parameter not allowed Check the command and the number of parameters 107 Missing parameter Check the command and the number of parameters 112 Program mnemonic too long Check the command mnemonic 113 Undefined header Check the command mnemonic 121 Invalid character in number Check that the notation of the numeric parameter is correct 16 5 for example binary notation should not contain characters other than 0 and 1 122 Header suffix out of range Check whether the numeric suffix of the command header is correct 123 Exponent too large Check whether the exponent is within the range of 127 to 127 124 Too many digits Check that the number of digits in the value does not exceed 255 128 Numeric data not allowed Check the parameter format 131 Invalid suffix Check the unit that can be used for the parameter 138 Suffix not allowed Check the parameter format 141 Invalid character data Check the character data that can be used for the parameter 148 Character data not allowed Check the command and parameter format 150 String data error Check that the closing quotation mark or for a string is available 151 Inval
133. OCAL on the front panel to prohibit switching to the local mode e DCL Same operation as the SDC message e SPE Sets the talker function on all devices on the bus to serial polling mode The controller polls the devices in order SPD Clears the serial polling mode of the talker function on all devices on the bus e PPU Not supported 13 6 IM 765501 01E Chapter 14 RS 232 Communications 14 1 RS 232 Interface Functions and Specifications Reception Function You can specify the same settings as those specified by front panel key operations Receives output requests for measured and computed data setup data of the panel and error codes Transmission Function Outputs measured and computed data Outputs panel setup data and the status byte Outputs error codes that have occurred RS 232 Interface Specifications Electrical characteristics Conforms to EIA 574 9 pin EIA 232 RS 232 Connection Point to point Transmission mode Full duplex Synchronization Start stop synchronization Baud rate 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 Start bit Fixed to 1 bit Data length 7 or 8 bits Parity Even odd or no parity Stop bit 1 or 2 bits Connector DELC J9PAF 13L6 JAE or equivalent Hardware handshaking CTS and RTS signals can be used to control both transmission and reception Software handshaking X ON and X OFF signals can be used to control both transmission and reception X ON ASCII 11H and X
134. OMMunicate RS232 PACE NONE XON HARDware NONE Sets the flow control to none XON Sets the flow control to XON XOFF HARDware Sets the flow control to CTS RTS SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 SBITs gt NONE Currently set to none XON Currently set to XON XOFF control HARD Currently set to CTS RTS control Example SYST COMM RS232 PACE HARD SYST COMM RS232 PACE SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 TERMinator Function Sets the RS 232 terminator CR LF or CR LF or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 TERMinatorCR LF CRLF CR Sets the terminator to CR ASCII code 0x0D LF Sets the terminator to LF ASCII code 0x0A CRLF Sets the terminator to CR LF SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 TERMinator gt CR Currently set to CR LF Currently set to LF CRLF Currently set to CR LF Example SYST COMM RS232 TERM LF SYST COMM RS232 TERM Description This setting is the terminator for transmission messages When receiving messages CR LF and CR LF are all accepted as terminators 16 36 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer MAC Queries the MAC address of Ethernet communication SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer MAC lt String gt String representing the MAC address in h h h h h h format where h is a hexadecimal number between 00 and FF SYST COMM ETH MAC Function Syntax Example SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer PORT Function Queries th
135. ON Of cececeeccesseeeesseeeeeseeeesseeees 13 4 GP IB interface stss pisn a i OAB e T Ai eee RN hte Greenwich Mean Time GSOTORAM iira ah Se Ae ii GS610ROM cripian a iria H Page INNY ne aA INITiate group ms INPUT SECON inari INDUL SIQNAIS itip ene a i aaner installation location installation position instrument number integration tme sseesesseeisereernsrrerrrrrneerrrenrensreesrnsrese interface messages internal HIGGS isssscececevescsessecessendeccsecceseeeeuzesiceceeccreserenstsies INTO TMG nsanra araar evitin IP Addressa araisa aiaei n oaaae naear aiani IP address innisin L Page LAN astani na a e an 12 3 12 6 LaStei hse wi an en er ee 6 7 LIMITE ceive cede ie ei 5 4 LIMIE KOY oirinn e a aa et E E AANEEN AERE 5 4 IMITE iasannrara ta iedntaiehiintatates 2 5 5 4 limiter FANGS ccccecescseseceseccescecesecesanendeddeccesbereendievsctsdvecrsstrecsess 5 5 limiter turning ON OFF of cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 5 limiter vale 2 Assisi sad d aai aes 5 5 Linear seeseace nae ana nites endian 6 1 linear SWOOP 2 25e siseicteeeeseshee ciasedteetetie neti 2 14 6 1 LINC FROG iaeiae ei 3 9 load Setup data oo eee eee eceee eee eeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeaes 11 3 Load Setup hissarna aniti nits 11 3 loca Sonses a a R e 2 22 4 3 Logse n SH eel a ae 6 1 6 2 KETORA oE T ATA 2 14 LOW inisenisi eaid da ida 2 18 low limiter indicator sesnnsseeesessnnnseeesernnn
136. PROGram command the same signal is output to the BNC output 16 14 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands 16 2 3 Source Commands SOURce GRoup SOURce FUNCtion Function Sets the source function voltage or current or queries the current setting SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage CURRent VOLTage Sets the source function to voltage CURRent Sets the source function to current SOURce FUNCtion gt VOLT Currently set to voltage CURR Currently set to current SOUR FUNC VOLT SOUR FUNC Description When the source function is changed the output OUTPut STATe is automatically Syntax Example turned OFF SOURce SHAPe Function Sets the source mode DC or pulse or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce SHAPe DC PULSe DC Sets the source mode to DC PULSe Sets the source mode to pulse SOURce SHAPe DC Currently set to DC PULS Currently set to pulse Example SOUR SHAP PULS SOUR SHAP Description This function corresponds to MODE on the front panel SOURce MODE Function Sets the source pattern fixed level sweep or program sweep or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce MODE FIXed SWEep LIST FlXed Sets the source pattern to constant level sweep OFF SWEep Sets the source pattern to sweep linear or log sweep LIST Sets the source pattern to program sweep SOURCe MODE gt FIX Currently set to constant level sweep OFF SWE Currently set to swee
137. Point and separator Separate settings are interlocked Changing either setting automatically changes the other The following two combinations are available Combination with the decimal point set to period and the separator set to comma eek iene Period Comma Changes each time you press Combination with the decimal point set to DecPoint or Separate comma and the separator set to semicolon acme eas Comma Semicolon Note e The factory default setting is the combination of period and comma e The selected notation applies only to program pattern files and measurement result files It is not applied to the numeric notation used on the display and communication commands In addition this setting does not change even if you load the setup data see section 11 2 Loading the Setup Data or execute the RST communication command see section 16 2 13 Common Commands IM 765501 01E suolouny 19410 2 Chapter 12 Ethernet Interface Option 12 1 Ethernet Interface Functions and Specifications Ethernet Interface Functions Reception Function e You can specify the same settings as those specified by front panel key operations e Receives output requests for measured and computed data setup data of the panel and error codes Transmission Function e Outputs measured and computed data e Outputs panel setup data and the status byte Outputs error codes that have occurred Switching between Remote
138. Press TIME to display the Time menu 4 Pressthe Period softkey Delay M Delay Period P Width lus SO0us 50 00ms 25 00ms 5 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the repeat period Period Time 0 Delay M Delay Period P Width lus SO0us 50 00ms 25 00ms 6 Ifyou use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Period Time 5 ps ms 8 Enter Manual Trigger A trigger is activated each time you press TRIG IM 765501 01E 4 1 uonoun e6e101g gsn pue su s jeso pue asuses ajoWayY d 1 UON EUUOD Hum s 66L gt 4 1 Setting the Trigger Explanation Trigger Mode There are three trigger modes for starting the source measure cycle Int Internal Periodic internal trigger Ext External Manual trigger by applying an external signal or pressing the TRIG key Imm Immediate Starts the next source measure cycle immediately after the current source measure cycle is complete The selected trigger mode is used to trigger the following operations e Source measure cycle measurement and pulse generation Start the sweep when the sweep function is enabled Repeat Period If the trigger mode is set to Int the repeat period is valid The trigger is activated according to the specified repeat period When a trigger is activated the TRIG key illuminates to notify the trigger generat
139. RS 232 communication menu GPIB USB it rs232 LAN st orage Selecting the Baud Rate 4 Press the BaudRate soft key to display the baud rate menu BaudRate DataBit Parity StopBit Flow Term Penno 78 None 71 72 None None None CR LF 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired baud rate audRat 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 115200 Selecting the Data Length 4 Press the DataBit soft key to select the data length BaudRate DataBit Parity StopBit Flow Term 38400 8 None 1 2 None CR LF Selecting the Parity 4 Press the Parity soft key to display the parity menu BaudRate DataBit Parity StopBit Flow Term 38400 8 None 1 2 None CR LF 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired parity arit None Ewen Odd Selecting the Stop Bit 4 Press the StopBit soft key to select the stop bit BaudRate DataBit Parity StopBit Flow Term 38400 7 8 None 1 2 None CR LF 14 6 IM 765501 01E 14 5 Setting the RS 232 Interface Explanation Selecting the Handshaking Method 4 Press the Flow soft key to display the handshaking method menu BaudRate DataBit Parity StopBit Flow Term 38400 8 None 1 2 None CR LF 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired handshaking method low Contra None XON 6CTS RTS Selecting the Transmission Terminator 4 Press the Term soft key BaudRate DataBit Parity StopBit Flow Term 38400
140. Response Header gt A response header sometimes precedes the response data A space separates the data from the header For details see page 16 5 lt Response data gt lt Response Data gt Response data contains the content of the response If there are multiple sets of response data they are separated by commas Example 500 0E 03 lt RMT gt SAMPLE GATE MODE TIME lt RMT gt l T Data Header Data If there are multiple queries in a program message responses are made in the same order as the queries In most cases a single query returns a single response message unit but there are a few queries that return multiple units The first response message unit always corresponds to the first query but the nt response unit may not necessarily correspond to the nt query Therefore if you want to make sure that every response is retrieved divide the program messages into individual messages 16 2 IM 765501 01E 16 1 Program Format Precautions to Be Taken when Transferring Messages Ifa program message that does not contain a query is sent the next program message can be sent at any time Ifa program message that contains a query is sent a response message must be received before the next program message can be sent If the next program message is sent before the response message is received in its entirety an error occurs The response message that was not received
141. S AVER COUN MAX SENS AVER COUN SENS AVER COUN MAX SENSe ACHange Function Syntax Example Description Sets the auto V I mode ON or OFF or queries the current setting SENSe ACHange 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns auto V I mode ON 0 or OFF Turns auto V I mode OFF SENSe ACHange 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF SENS ACH ON SENS ACH Auto V I mode automatically changes the measurement function when a limiter is activated For details see section 7 7 Turning Auto V I ON OFF SENSe RSENse Function Syntax Example Sets the four wire measurement remote sense ON or OFF or queries the current setting SENSe RSENse 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns the four wire measurement ON 0 or OFF Turns the four wire measurement OFF two wire measurement SENSe RSENSe 1 Currently ON four wire measurement 0 Currently OFF two wire measurement SENS RSEN ON SENS RSEN IM 765501 01E 16 25 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands 16 2 6 Trigger Commands TRIGger Group TRIGger SOURCe Function Sets the trigger source constant period timer external trigger or no trigger wait or queries the current setting Syntax TRIGger SOURce TIMer EXTernal IMMediate TIMer Sets the trigger source to constant period timer EXTernal Sets the trigger source to external trigger IMMediate Sets the trigger source to no wait TRIGger SOURcCe
142. S610ROM disk An error occurs if a file name that does not exist is specified The file name is not case sensitive Syntax Example CALCulate MATH CATalog Function Queries a list of definition files of the computation using equations CALCulate MATH CATalog lt String gt lt String gt lt String gt A list of definition files NONE indicates that there are no definition files Example CALC MATH CAT Description Specify a file in the MATH directory on the GS610 ROM disk for the definition file Syntax CALCulate MATH DELete Function Deletes the definition file of the computation using equations Syntax CALCulate MATH DELete lt String gt lt String gt Name of the file to be deleted Example CALC MATH DEL Scale txt Description Select a file in the MATH directory on the GS610ROM disk An error occurs if a file name that does not exist is specified The file name is not case sensitive CALCulate MATH DEFine Function Creates a definition file of the computation using equations Syntax CALCulate MATH DEFine lt String gt lt String gt lt String gt Name of the file to be created lt String gt Contents to be written to the file CALC MATHT DEF Scale txt M M 2 1 Description The file is created in the MATH directory on the GS610ROM disk If an existing file name is specified the file is overwritten Example IM 765501 01E 16 27 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWI
143. SC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE e In the procedural explanation below the hrase rotary knob numeric keys lt wor GRE Dee we or Doe lt MENU PANGE MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation RANGE x A 7 RECA ian ui o CON O of selecting or setting items or entering pen TALE aa values using the rotary knob numeric OUTPUT CONTROL keys lt and keys BS key and POWER MISC TIME sweer ranr me right arrow key For details on the fo ol ee wE operation using the rotary knob numeric O SHIFT keys and see sections 3 8 or i 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the CSV Setting soft key to display the CSV Setting menu Remote Error Wire csv I F Setup Log 4w 2w Setting Sustem 3 Press the DecPoint or Separate soft key to select the decimal point or separator notation of CSV files The DecPoint and Separate settings are interlocked Changing either setting changes the other setting automatically pears ford Select the decimal point and separator notations used in program pattern files and measurement result files that are in CSV format Note that if you do not select the correct notation for your Excel program the CSV files will not be loaded correctly The decimal point Dec
144. STem LFRequency 50 Currently set to 50 Hz 60 Currently set to 60 Hz SYST LFR 50 SYST LFR Description The power frequency is automatically detected when the power is turned ON Therefore you normally do not need to set the frequency Syntax Example SYSTem WAIT Function Holds the GS610 for the specified wait time Syntax SYSTem WAIT lt Time gt lt Time gt Wait time Example SYST WAIT 0 05 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess Function Sets the GP IB address or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess lt Integer gt SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess lt lnteger gt Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 15 SYST COMM GPIB ADDR IM 765501 01E 16 35 spueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 BAUDrate Function Sets the RS 232 baud rate or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 BAUDrate 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 115200 9600 Sets the baud rate to 9600 bps 14400 Sets the baud rate to 14400 bps 19200 Sets the baud rate to 19200 bps 38400 Sets the baud rate to 38400 bps 57600 Sets the baud rate to 57600 bps 115200 Sets the baud rate to 115200 bps SYSTem COMMunicate RS232 BAUDrate gt 9600 Currently set to 9600 bps 14400 Currently set to 14400 bps 19200 Currently set to 19200 bps 38400 Currently set to 38400 bps 57600 Currently set to 57600 bps 115200 Currently set to 115200 bps
145. Setting the Linear or Log Sweep Explanation Linear Sweep Sweeps using evenly spaced step values that increase linearly from the specified start value to the stop value If the sweep count calculated from the start stop and step values exceeds 65535 points an error occurs and the sweep operation can be carried out only up to 65535 points e When the source mode is DC e When the source mode is pulse 8 Stop value o S i 8 8 Q a lt lt 2 Start value step value RE a Base value Initial 7 Ti i Initial t Tri t rigger coun rigger coun value Sidr gg value start gg Log Sweep Sweeps exponentially from the specified start value to the stop value at the specified step count The step count can be set arbitrary in the range of 2 to 65535 However if the start value and stop value have opposite signs an error occurs and the sweep operation cannot be carried out In addition if the start value or stop value is 0 an error occurs and the sweep operation cannot be carried out e When the source mode is DC e When the source mode is pulse Stop value Stop value n 7 i Q E c x g 9 z Step count 2 Step count 4 Start val Start value e Are vae Initial f 5 Initial f Pase value rigger coun rigger coun value start value Start Note e Use a fixed range so that the range setting does not change during the sweep operation Sweep operation is possible in aut
146. TO Queries the measurement auto range ON or OFF 16 24 ITIMe lt Time gt PLC MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN Sets the integration time 16 24 ITIMe PLC MINimum MAXimum Queries the integration time 16 24 DELay lt Time gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the measurement delay 16 24 DELay MINimum MAXimum Queries the measurement delay 16 24 AZERO STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the auto zero state ON or OFF 16 25 STATe Queries the auto zero state ON or OFF 16 25 EXECute Executes auto zero 16 25 AVERage STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the average state ON or OFF 16 25 STATe Queries the average state ON or OFF 16 25 MODE BLOCk MOVing Sets the average mode block or moving average 16 25 MODE Queries the average mode block or moving average 16 25 COUNt lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the average count 16 25 16 8 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands Command Function Page COUNt MINimum MAXimum Queries the average count 16 25 ACHange 1 0 ON OFF Sets the auto V I mode ON or OFF 16 25 ACHange Queries the auto V I mode ON or OFF 16 25 RSENse 1 0 ON OFF Sets the four wire measurement remote sense ON or OFF 16 25 RSENse Queries the four wire measurement remote sense ON or OFF 16 25 Trigger Commands TRIGger Group TRIGger SOURce TIMer EXTernal IMMediate Sets the trigger source constant period timer external trigger or no trigger wait 16 26 SOURce Queries the trigger source constan
147. WOD g 16 2 Commands CALCulate MATH PARameter A Function Sets equation parameter A or queries the current setting Syntax CALCulate MATH PARameter A lt Value gt lt Value gt Sets equation parameter A to the specified value CALCulate MATH PARameter A lt Value gt Example CALC MATH PAR A 3 141592 CALC MATH PAR A CALCulate MATH PARameter B Function Sets equation parameter B or queries the current setting Syntax CALCulate MATH PARameter B lt Value gt lt Value gt Sets equation parameter B to the specified value CALCulate MATH PARameter B lt Value gt Example CALC MATH PAR B 1 41421356 CALC MATH PAR B CALCulate MATH PARameter C Function Sets equation parameter C or queries the current setting Syntax CALCulate MATH PARameter C lt Value gt lt Value gt Sets equation parameter C to the specified value CALCulate MATH PARameter C lt Value gt Example CALC MATH PAR C 6 626069E 34 CALC MATH PAR C CALCulate LIMit STATe Function Sets the state of the comparison operation ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax CALCulate LIMit STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns comparison operation ON 0 or OFF Turns comparison operation OFF CALCulate LIMit STATe 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON CALC LIM STAT CALCulate LIMit UPPer Function Sets the upper limit of the comparison operatio
148. When Generating Current Same as the current source range However if the current source range is 0 5 A 1 A or 2 A the settings below apply Current Source Range Setting Current Measurement Range Setting 0 5A 3A 1A 3A 2A 3A Auto Range When auto range is turned ON the GS610 makes a measurement and checks whether a different range setting is available for making the measurement with the best resolution If there is the GS610 changes the range setting and makes the measurement again However it may take time for the GS610 to switch the range setting and the source level may become discontinuous Measurement Delay The measurement delay is the wait time at which the measurement is started after the source level is switched Itis used for the item being measured to stabilize The measurement delay can be set in the range of 1 us to 3600 s However setting a long measurement delay results in a long source measure cycle Set the smallest value possible Integration Time The integration time is the time that the integrating A D converter performs integration If you increase the integration time the time needed to make measurements takes longer but the measured values are more stable When the power frequency is 50 Hz 250 us 1 ms 4 ms 20 ms 100 ms or 200 ms When the power frequency is 60 Hz 250 us 1 ms 4 ms 16 6 ms 100 ms or 200 ms If the integration time is set to 200 ms 100 ms 20 ms or 16 6 ms the effects of nois
149. YE Query Error Set to 1 if the output queue is empty or if the data is missing even after a query has been sent Example No response data data is lost due to an overflow in the output queue Bit 1 RQC Request Control Not used always 0 Bit0 OPC Operation Complete Set to 1 when the operation designated by the OPC command see section 16 2 13 has been completed Bit Masking To mask a bit in the standard event register so that it does not cause bit 5 ESB of the status byte to change set the corresponding bit in the standard event enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 QYE so that ESB will not be set to 1 even if a query error occurs set bit 2 of the standard event enable register to 0 This can be done using the ESE command To inquire whether each bit of the standard event enable register is 1 or 0 use the ESE For details on the ESE command see section 16 2 13 16 44 IM 765501 01E 16 3 Status Reports Operation of the Standard Event Register The standard event register is provided for eight different kinds of event which can occur inside the instrument Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 when any of the bits in this register becomes 1 or when the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register becomes 1 Example 1 A query error occurs 2 Bit 2 QYE is set to 1 3 Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 if bit 2 of the standard event enable register is 1
150. an item to view its b objects lo bytes B My Computer MATH A directory for storing the definition files of equations The files in this directory can be selected for the computation using equations By factory default built in computation files are stored in this directory The built in computation files are not erased even if the disk is formatted 2 20 IM 765501 01E 2 9 USB Storage Function PROGRAM A directory for storing the pattern files of program sweeps The files in this directory can be selected for the program sweep function By factory default sample program files are stored in this directory The sample program files are not erased even if the disk is formatted SETUP A directory for storing the GS610 panel settings The files in this directory can be selected as setup files By factory default a default setup file is stored in this directory The default setup file is not erased even if the disk is formatted Volatile Disk GS610RAM GS610RAM is a RAM disk that is automatically formatted when the power is turned ON When the storage operation is carried out the result file Result csv file is created on this disk If the settings are saved to the GS610RAM the current settings are saved to a file named Setup txt This directory is usually used to pass files that the GS610 creates to the PC However this disk is also used to write the system file System bin from a PC when updating the system firmwar
151. ands is completed 16 41 OPC Creates a response after the execution of all previous commands is completed 16 41 WAI Waits the completion of the overlap command 16 41 IM 765501 01E 16 13 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands 16 2 2 Output Commands OUTPut Group OUTPut STATe Function Sets the output state ON OFF or zero or queries the current setting Syntax OUTPut STATe 1 0 ON OFF ZERO 1 or ON Turns the output ON 0 or OFF Turns the output OFF ZERO Turns the output to zero OUTPut STATe gt 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF ZERO Currently zero Example OUTP ON OUTP STAT ZERO OUTP STAT Description ON and OFF indicates ON and OFF of the output relay ZERO indicates the zero state The zero state is defined using the SOURce VOLTage ZERO Or SOURce CURRent ZERO command OUTPut PROGram Function Sets the programmable output state ON or OFF or queries the current setting Or carries out pulse generation Syntax OUTPut PROGram 1 0 ON OFF PULSe 1 or ON Turns the output ON Low 0 or OFF Turns the output OFF High PULSe Generates a 10 us pulse OUTPut PROGram 1 Currently ON Low 0 Currently OFF High Example OUTP PROG 1 OUTP PROG PULS OUTP PROG Description The program output used here indicates pin 9 of the external input output connector If the BNC output is set to programmable output using the ROUTe BOUT SELect CONTrol CONTrol
152. aracters following two consecutive slashes up to the line feed are considered a comment statement and are discarded App 2 IM 765501 01E Appendix 1 Computation Definition Specifications Expression An expression is made up of the combination of variables constants literals and operators functions The order of expressions can be changed by enclosing the expression you wish to prioritize with parentheses The order of precedence the order in which the operators are evaluated in a compound expression is described later Variables M Measured value S Source value T Time stamp equivalent to GMT in 1 us resolution unit is seconds M n The current measured value to the measured value 15 measurements in the past before the computation specified by n in the range of 0 to 15 S n The current source value to the source value 15 source cycles in the past specified by n in the range of 0 to 15 T n The current time stamp to the time stamp 15 cycles in the past specified by n in the range of 0 to 15 Source value or measured value that is a current Source value or measured value that is a voltage Parameter A Parameter B Parameter C Internal variable X Internal variable Y Internal variable Z Counter Cleared to 0 when the statement for substituting initial values into internal variables is executed and incremented for subsequent computations TNT OP Se Constants PI Ratio of the circumference 3 1415926
153. arrow key For details on the fo al aia me operation using the rotary knob numeric C MEA m0 Cmr keys and see sections 3 8 or m _ 3 9 Turning NULL Computation ON OFF 1 Press NULL The NULL key illuminates and the NULL computation is enabled 2 Ifyou press NULL again the NULL computation is disabled and the NULL key turns OFF Setting the NULL Value 1 Press SHIFT NULL The retrieved NULL value is displayed Null Value 0 OOOOOE OM 2 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the NULL value 3 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Null Value 2 Pel of g q Explanation NULL Computation The measured value when NULL computation switches from OFF to ON when you press the NULL key is used as a NULL value While NULL computation is ON the value obtained by subtracting the NULL value from the measured value is displayed NULL Value The retrieved NULL value applies to all measurement range settings lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt CALCulate NULL STATe CALCulate NULL OFFSet IM 765501 01E 8 3 uonendwog 8 3 Computation Using Equations Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the AUTO v i UMT Vs IS phrase
154. aseedeni eee 43 storage Starting Of cciesci lt c202s cesses Been reece 9 2 FEMOVADIE CISKS ccceeseeecsetseseseteesseeetseeeeceeeeseeeeseneeees 2 20 SOF Mee eg ee ae 2 19 9 1 IM 765501 01E Index 3 5 Q D x lt Index Storo COUN aiie iana anhaa dacia iNe kae aena A aaa ES eii 9 2 STORE KOY panone teeny T Aen A R 2 19 9 1 store recall COMMANAS sessseseesierieerrerrerrerrnrrrerrerrnerees 16 29 SubNet Mask 12 3 12 5 12 6 SUFFIX kate hack eats a eo ii SWOOP PEE teaiaden anattatatancnd saceoychsaceesuttec Alea 2 14 SWEEP COMMANAS ceeceseesseeeenceeseeseseeseeesenessaneesetesaes 16 23 SWEEP group see eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeaeeeeeeaeseeeeaeeeeeeateaees 16 23 SWEEP k y witty eae ee 6 1 6 5 6 7 6 9 SWOOP MOG aieiaa iA E AE EAE TAa AERE 2 15 sweep operation starting Of sessesesserreereerrerirerrereren 6 10 SWEEP START IN eee SWEEP SYNC OUT synchronized operation eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeees 10 7 System aaaea 3 9 3 10 4 7 10 1 11 7 17 6 17 8 17 9 SYSTEM COMMANAS eee ee eee eeneceeceeeeeeeseeeteeeteaeeeaes 16 34 system configuration 0 eee ee eee cee tee eeeeeeeeteeeteaeeneeee 2 1 system firmwre Updating Of cece eee eee eeeneeeneeeee 17 9 SY STM r U Drane ae ated eines 16 34 system status Checking Of cece ee eee eeeee tee eeeeeee 17 8 T Page TCP IP Setting Of ceecee 12 3 12 5 TOMI 6 cous t
155. ated the source level is changed to the specified source value e When Output Is OFF The source level is set to zero and the output relay is turned OFF lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt OUTPut STATe IM 765501 01E 5 13 5 8 Zero Generation Procedure To exit the menu during operation press O C O O O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE e Inthe procedural explanation below the MENU phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MEASURE and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering COMPARE TALE values using the rotary knob numeric DISPLAY toca OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome swe starr mie right arrow key For details on the ne al es WE operation using the rotary knob numeric O C s keys and see sections 3 8 or w 3 9 Zero Generation Press ZERO when generating the signal or press the SHIFT ZERO key when the output is OFF to generate a zero level signal Setting the Zero Offset 1 Press SHIFT VS IS SOURCE to display the SOURCE menu 2 Press the Zero Offset soft key Pulse Zero Zero Cal Base Offset Hiz Loz Exec 3 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the zero offset voltage Zero Offset 9E V Pulse Zero Zero Z Cal Base Offset Hig Loz Exec 4 If yo
156. ater than or equal to 1 the end timing of each turn is output as a pulse signal Sweep All End Timing SweepOut AllEnd The sweep end timing is output as a pulse signal Interlock Through CtrlOut Intlock The interlock input is output as is Relay Status CtrlOut Output The actual output status ON OFF state of the OUTPUT key is output as a level signal Zero Source Condition CtriOut Zero The actual zero condition ON OFF state of the ZERO key is output as a level signal Programmable CtrlOut Program Outputs a pulse signal with the oUTPut PROGram PULSe communication command page 16 16 and a level signal with the oUTPut PROGram 1 0 ON OFF command page 16 16 If the communication command is written in the pattern file of the program sweep a pulse signal can be generated at an arbitrary point in the sweep pattern 10 4 IM 765501 01E 10 1 Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and the External Input Output Connector Comparison Result Compare HI Compare In Compare Low The comparison result High In Low of the comparison operation is output as a level signal Comparison Result Output Over Range Compare OV Outputs a level signal when the measured result is over the range Comparison End Compare End Notifies that the comparison result output has been finalized In the strict sense the end timing of the source measure cycle is output as a pulse signal Input S
157. atus report commands Talker Capability Outputs setup data measured data and other information Note Talk only listen only and controller functions are not available on this instrument Switching between Remote and Local Modes When Switching from Local to Remote Mode Receiving a REN Remote Enable message from the controller when the instrument is in the local mode causes the instrument to switch to the remote mode e The REMOTE indicator see section 1 2 is turned ON All keys other than the LOCAL key are locked Settings entered in local mode are retained even when the GS610 switches to remote mode When Switching from Remote to Local Mode Pressing LOCAL in remote mode puts the instrument in local mode e The REMOTE indicator turns OFF e Key operations are enabled e Settings entered in remote mode are retained even when the GS610 switches to local mode GP IB Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE Std 488 1978 Functional specifications See the table below Code used ISO ASCII code Mode Addressable mode Address setting Set the address between 0 and 30 in the GP IB address setting see section 13 4 in the GP IB Address menu Clear remote mode Clear remote mode by pressing LOCAL However key operations are void when Local Lockout is enabled by the controller Function Subset Name Description Source handshaking SH1 Full source ha
158. bit 5 ESB of the status byte to 1 or 0 Sets bit 4 MAV of the status byte to 1 or 0 Sets bit 1 SSB of the status byte to 1 or 0 e Measure event register Sets bit O MSB of the status byte to 1 or 0 Sets bit 2 EAV of the status byte to 1 or 0 Output queue e Source event register e Error queue Enable Registers Registers that are used to mask a bit so that the bit will not affect the status byte even when it is set to 1 are shown below e Status byte Mask the bits using the service request enable register e Standard event register Mask the bits using the standard event enable register Mask the bits using the source event enable register Measure event register Mask the bits using the measure event enable register e Source event register Writing Reading from Registers The ESE command is used to set the bits in the standard event enable register to 1 s or 0 s The ESE command is used to query whether the bits in the standard event enable register are 1 s or O s For details regarding these commands see section 16 2 13 16 3 2 Status Byte Status Byte RQS 7 6 JESBMAV 3 EAVISSBIMSB MSS Bits 3 and 7 Not used always 0 BitO MSB Measure Event Summary Bit Set to 1 when the logical product of each bit of the measure event register and each bit of the corresponding enable register is 1 See the page 16 47 Bit 1 SSB Source Ev
159. c can be omitted Example MEASure can be also written as measureor meas e The question mark at the end of a header indicates that it is a query The question mark cannot be omitted Example The shortest abbreviation for MEASure is MEAS e Ifthe lt x gt value at the end of a mnemonic is omitted it is interpreted as a 1 Example lf FILTer lt x is written as FILT it means FILTer1 e The section enclosed by braces can be omitted Example INPut PLL MODE 1 can be written as INPut PLL 1 However the last section enclosed by braces cannot be omitted in an upper level query 16 4 IM 765501 01E 16 1 Program Format 16 1 4 Responses When the controller sends a message unit that has a question mark 7 in its program header query the instrument returns a response message to the query 16 1 5 Data Data A data section comes after the header A space must be included between the header and the data The data contains conditions and values Data is classified as below Notation Meaning Example lt Integer gt 125 1 lt Fixed point number gt 125 0 90 lt Floating point number gt 125 0E 0 9E 1 lt Numeric value gt lt Integer gt lt Fixed point number gt or lt Floating point number gt lt Voltage gt A lt Numeric value gt to which a voltage unit V can be attached 1 25 mv lt Curre
160. changes from 0 to 1 Bit Masking To mask a bit in the measure event register so that it does not cause bit 1 MSB of the status byte to change set the corresponding bit in the measure event enable register to 0 Use the STATus SENSe ENABle command for this purpose Reading from the Measure Event Register The contents of the measure event register can be read by the STATus SENSe EVENt command After the register is read it is cleared The contents of the measure condition register can be read by the STATus SENSe CONDition command Reading the register does not change the contents of the register Clearing the Measure Event Register The measure event register is cleared in the following three cases When the contents of the source event register is read by the STATus SENSe EVENt command When a CLS command is received When the instrument is power cycled IM 765501 01E 16 47 SpueWWOD uonesiunwwog a 16 3 Status Reports 16 3 6 Output Queue and Error Queue Output Queue The output queue is provided to store response messages to queries The example below shows that data is stored record by record in the output queue and is read out oldest item first The output queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed e When anew message is received from the controller e When a deadlock occurs see page 16 3 e When a device clear command DCL or SDC is
161. current setting SOURCe VOLTage SWEep POINts lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum lt Integer gt Sets the step count to the specified value MINimum Sets the step count to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the step count to the maximum value SOURCe VOLTage SWEep POINts MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value gt lt Integer gt SOUR VOLT SWE POIN 100 SOUR VOLT SWE POIN MAX SOUR VOLT SWE POIN SOUR VOLT SWE POIN MAX This setting is used when the sweep mode is set to logarithmic SOURce VOLTage SWEep SPACing LOGarithmic SOURce VOLTage ZERO IMPedance Function Syntax Example Sets the zero source impedance high or low for generating voltage or queries the current setting SOURcCe VOLTage ZERO IMPedance HIGH LOW HIGH Sets the impedance to high LOW Sets the impedance to low SOURce VOLTage ZERO IMPedance gt HIGH Currently set to high impedance LOW Currently set to low impedance SOUR VOLT ZERO IMP LOW SOUR VOLT ZERO IMP SOURcCe VOLTage ZERO OFFset Function Syntax Example Sets the zero source offset value for generating voltage or queries the current setting SOURce VOLTage ZERO OFFSet lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt Sets the offset value to the specified voltage SOURce VOLTage ZERO OFFSet
162. dge of pulse section 10 1 SweepSyncOutType Selects the BNC sweep synchronization output M Origin TurnEnd AllEnd sweep start 1 turn end or all end section 10 1 ControlOutType Selects the BNC control output IntLock Output Zero Program interlock relay output zero source R or programmable section 10 1 DIOS __ m DIO 5pin Selects the external input output connector pin 5 function tie Output Zero output relay control or zero source control section 10 1 i Selects the external input output DIO6 __ a DIO 6pin TrigOut connector pin 6 function trigger source ae Origin ScrChg MeasBgn MeasEnd PlsEnd change measure begin measure end N or pulse end section 10 1 _ DIO7 __ pee 7pin SweepSyncOut Selects the external input output connector pin 7 function x Origin TurnEnd AllEnd sweep start 1 turn end or all end section 10 1 DIO8 __ p DIO 8pin Controlout Selects the external input output connector pin 8 function wee IntLock Output Zero interlock output or zero section 10 1 Beep r lon Off Turns ON OFF the beep sound section 11 4 Display Bright E pon 1 2 3 4 Selects the display brightness section 11 6 Off z Exec Turns OFF the display section 11 6 po Selects the power frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz section 3 6 po Shows the product information section 17 4 Time 5 r r i Adjust Edit Edits the time section 3 7 Set Sets the time section 3 7 Time Edit Edit
163. during operation press O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation DISPLAY panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the store Ea y vma 70 wove uur Dss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU ee a e and gt are used to refer to the operation ITO of selecting or setting items or entering OPARE TTT values using the rotary knob numeric Local TPUT CONTROL keys D and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome sweep starr mi right arrow key For details on the no al mETLOGE me operation using the rotary knob numeric r0 keys amp D and see sections 3 8 or a 3 9 1 Press SWEEP to display the SWEEP menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the SWEEP mode menu Mode Last Repeat Off Rtn Keep an Setting the Linear Sweep 3 Press the Linear soft key The SWEEP key illuminates If you select Off the key turns OFF SweepMode off Linear Log Program Setting the Start Value 4 Press the Start Value soft key Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Linear Rtn Keep a Value Yalue Value 5 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the start value Value 100 00m V Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Linear Ptn Keep A Yalue Value Value 6 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Sta
164. e For details see section 17 5 Updating the System Firmware Emy computer E Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt Qsearch Gyrolders lt 4 WS GE XK wy Eee Address E My Computer gt Go Links _i lt lt a gt re My Computer Da T Select an item to view its 5 object s E cssioramea Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea lt Back gt Qseach GyFolders 4 G GE XxX A Ea Address c5610RaM E z 60 Links GS610RAM E Select an item to view its b objects 2 96 KB B My Computer You can also create subdirectories and write files to this disk but be sure that the disk does not become full The data on this disk is lost when the power is turned OFF Formatting the Disk You can format the disk when you wish to reset the GS610 to factory default conditions when the non volatile or volatile disk cannot be detected on your PC or if you believe the data on the disk is corrupt IM 765501 01E 2 21 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 10 Other Functions Sensing The GS610 has two types of sensing connections 2W two terminal connection local sense and 4W four terminal connection remote sense You can select the appropriate sensing connection according to the amplitude of the output current Four terminal connection reduces the effects of the voltage drop due to the output curr
165. e GS610RAM The name of the most recent result file is always Result csv When the storage operation is repeated the result file is automatically numbered and the file name is automatically updated If two storage operations are complete the most recent file is Result csv and the previous result file is Result1 csv If the storage operation is repeated further the result file name changes as follows Result csv Result1 csv Result2 csv Result3 csv and so on Up to 32 results files are automatically numbered If the number of result files exceeds 33 the files are deleted in order from the oldest file However if the size of the new result file is large such as when the store count is large multiple result files may be deleted so that the capacity of the GS610RAM is not exceeded when the most recent result file is created 9 2 IM 765501 01E 9 1 Storing the Measured Results ioi xi Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea lt Back gt fy Qsearch C yFolders lt 3 W GE XxX A Ea Address c5610RAM E x eco Links 1KB Microsoft Excel Com 1KB Microsoft Excel Com 1KB Microsoft Excel Com Select an item to view its description Capacity 3 95 MB Di used 3 00 ke C Free 3 95 MB b objects 2 96 KB B My Computer Previous result file Second oldest result file Most recent result file Numbering of the Result Files Past When the first storage operation completes Most
166. e from the power frequency can be eliminated because these settings are integer multiples of the power cycle Auto Zero Function When auto zero is ON the GS610 also measures the internal zero reference for each measurement The measured result is obtained by subtracting this value from the measured value canceling the offset drift of the measurement circuit in the GS610 However the measurement takes approximately twice as long because the GS610 measures twice IM 765501 01E 2 11 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 4 Measurement Auto V I This function enables the measurement function to be switched when a limiter is activated For example when a secondary battery is being charged with constant current the rising battery voltage can be measured When the voltage limiter is activated and the operation switches to constant voltage charge the reduction in the charging current can be measured When Generating Voltage and Measuring Current When the limiter is not activated The GS610 measures current The voltage source When the limiter is activated level is entered for the source value in the result file when the storage operation is carried out Normal operation The GS610 measures voltage The current limiter value is entered for the source value in the result file when the storage operation is carried out When Generating Current and Measuring Voltage When the limiter is not activated The GS610 measures voltage T
167. e 11 2 FOPCAUCOUME scat ccssceccstesacedestsecedisteteiseedessssieseacenciaceoess 2 16 6 9 NULL COMPULAHON eticcctiscivicsacs sccm natant 2 17 8 3 ropoat porod os sscssccescccessceassciatecdssesscttvatsaaciisrsticeemntcaaiedd 4 2 NULL key result file NULL value WOUUEM E PRO WTO S ON OUD sisarien raas en ae AAEE E REAREA 16 31 RS 232 interlace iaaa ASE 14 1 O Page RS 232 interface setting Of ssesssesesseesinerrernerernnrreeee 14 6 offset callbral laniascuadiainamusiansAeainacatnneas 2 9 5 16 ic ee Options esessssssssssssssssssssscsssssssssssssssssssssssstsstititsusttessssesseeeeen i PRUs te cs cece ca sec EE OE TA T 2 16 6 7 OUTPUT CONTROL group ecceeeeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeteeeeeeees 1 7 OUTPUT Key oo eeeeeceeseeseeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesaeeeaesaeeeeeeaeeeeee 5 13 S Page OUtpUP OFF ienaa N R 5 13 UMU Na 2a sees ces acecc ashe cet scennseancsishendets satdescsas stcaseecvteiepmcees 5 13 GIA erae e A E tacvuceucemeens 5 11 QUIDUE QUOUG i isiccscccccnssetcesissccsascacecssacssasscesiscicestasstacvacann 16 48 SAMPIO PlOGAM is ssc ssnstssatsascasstescnsssasestesciesscanseenastasecens 16 49 OUTPUT relay 45 sass cthtndecasscealcesccrushcouscedasheansatdssceusssisatenas 2 9 5 13 SAVE SCLUP data edccacsccaiccscsceastevsssssedcadstssuassasctsebecsctbcsedvee 11 1 Output SOCOM crstiisscevsctissssessdeass Zasdrscheasandscntesacensscecnevatenel 10 5 Save SOLU ess cesececdehe aea abier aao st a rni 11 1 OULPUT SI
168. e 200 ms Measurement range AUTO AUTO V I ON auto switching of the measurement mode Store count Up to 65535 points Computation ON TIME Source delay tus Measurement delay 1 ms Repeat period of the internal trigger 60s Equation Example If I lt 10E 3 then lt Condition statement for when the current value is less than or equal to 10 mA OUTPUT STATS OFF lt furns the output OFF Source and Measurement 1 The GS610 generates constant current to the secondary battery and measures the voltage 2 When the voltage of the secondary battery reaches the charge voltage a limiter is activated and the GS610 switches to current measurement mode 3 Through the computation function the GS610 turns the output OFF when the measured current reaches a given value The source values and measured results are saved to a single file in the internal memory of the GS610 GS610RAM 4 Transfer Copy the measurement result file from the GS610RAM of the GS610 to the PC via the USB 5 Display the graph of the measured results using a general purpose spreadsheet application on your PC Charging of a secondary battery Battery voltage Measure Constant voltage charge Limiter 1C Constant current charge Source Charge current Measurement 1h Time In the discharge simulation the pulse current sink operation of the GS610 can be used to carry out constant current pulse discharge
169. e Auto Range function of the Measurement Range Settings 7 3 7 4 Setting the Measurement Delay c ccecceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeseeseaeeeeeteaeeseeeseaeeseaeeeaeenaas 7 4 7 5 Setting the Integration TimMer a aeaa a a E ao EE a aaae iaaa a aA Eaa 7 6 T6 Auto Zero FUNCION naure n ae eee 7 7 TTo lt Turning Auto VA ON OBES wenden desde o aE nda ln I aeai dea aa aii 7 8 Chapter 8 Computation 8 1 Averaging tiie ae ee i a i 8 1 8 2 NULL Computationss d ca ascii ced aia nile iad Bei ht ded Aalst Aace 8 3 8 3 Computation Using Equations cecceeceeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeseeeeseeseaeesieeseeeseeeeeas 8 4 8 4 Comparison Operation ia s c ssn aieieete ected aaa aa a aaa elise vedas 8 7 8 5 User Defined Computation z s eaea araa raaa e E E aE aE e A Eag 8 9 Chapter 9 Storing Measured Results and Recalling Statistical Computation Values 9 1 Storing the Measured Results cccesceeeceeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeseeeeaeeseaeeeaeeteaeeneeeeaees 9 1 9 2 Recalling Statistical Computation Values eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteaeeteaeeeeetaas 9 4 Chapter 10 BNC Input Output and External Input Output 10 1 Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and the External Input Output Connector ics cd ian air den alee arin eda 10 1 10 2 Synchronized Operation eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeseeeeseaeesieeeneesaes 10 7 Chapter 1
170. e Base pulse value I Measurement Measure __ Compu j Measurement ment tation Source delay delay f i Source measure cycle The source delay specifies the wait time at which the source value is actually changed after the trigger is activated It is typically used as a trigger delay when an external trigger is used The source delay can be set in the range of 1 us to 3600 s However setting a long source delay results in a long source measure cycle Set the smallest value possible 2 8 IM 765501 01E 2 3 Source Turning the Output ON OFF and Generating Zero Output Offset Calibration As shown in the figure below there are three output modes Output ON Output OFF and Zero Generation The mode is switched with the OUTPUT and ZERO keys OUTPUT i illuminates ZERO Gm ZERO f illuminates I I Output OFF The output relay is OFF and voltage or current is not generated The source measure cycle is also stopped Output ON The output relay is ON and voltage or current is generated The source measure cycle is repeated Zero Generation The output relay is ON If generating voltage O V is generated If generating current 0 A is generated Then the source measure cycle is stopped Zero Source Offset An offset can be specified on the zero value when generating zero output Zero Source Impedance Low impedance LOZ is default when generating v
171. e Inthe procedural explanation below the STORE ao VIVO phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MENU MEASURE SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation RANGE RECALL AUTO MATH NULL RANGE of selecting or setting items or entering POWER fo aol O COMPARE VALUE values using the rotary knob numeric OUTPUT CONTROL keys CD and keys BS key and MISC TIME SWEEP l START TRIG right arrow key For details on the MODE RELLOCE operation using the rotary knob numeric keys amp and CB see sections 3 8 or 3 9 EE Press MISC to display the MISC menu Press the System soft key to display the System menu e Setup Error Wire csv I F Log ay 2w Setting System Press the External I O soft key to display the External I O menu External Beep Display LineFreq Product Next 1 0 On Off 4 50 60 Info 1 2 To set the BNC input output terminal proceed to step 4 To set the external input output connector proceed to step 13 Setting the BNC Input Terminal 4 Press the BNC In soft key to display the BNC In menu BNC In BNC Out DIO 5 DIO 6 DIO 7 DIO Ctrl Ctrl Output Origin Origin Intlock Select the signal to be applied to the BNC input terminal from Trig Sweep and Ctrl BNC In Trig Sweep Ctrl If you select Ctrl proceed to ste
172. e command socket port number of Ethernet communication Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer PORT gt 7655 Example SYST COMM ETH PORT Description A port number used for the command socket Port 7655 is used on the GS610 SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer DHCP Function Sets DHCP ON or OFF of Ethernet communication or queries the current setting SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer DHCP 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns DHCP ON 0 or OFF Turns DHCP OFF SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer DHCP gt 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF SYST COMM ETH DHCP ON SYST COMM ETH DHCP Syntax Example SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer IP Function Sets the IP address of Ethernet communication or queries the current setting SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer IP lt String gt SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer IP lt String gt String representing the address in d d d d format where d is a decimal number between 0 and 255 SYST COMM ETH IP 10 0 128 64 SYST COMM ETH IP Description The result varies depending on the DHCP state If DHCP is OFF the specified fixed value is returned If DHCP is ON a dynamic result assigned through DHCP is returned If the dynamic address is being assigned or the address assignment failed 0 0 0 0 is returned Syntax Example SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer MASK Function Sets the net mask of Ethernet communication or queries the current setting SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer MASK lt String gt
173. e errors exist in the error memory the error indicator Err at the upper right of the screen illuminates Turing ON OFF the Beep Sound You can select whether the GS610 generates a beep sound when you operate the GS610 incorrectly when an error occurs during operation or when the computation is turned ON Setting the Display Brightness or Turning OFF the Display You can set the brightness of the display You can turn OFF the display to prolong the service life of the display Key Lock You can lock the panel keys so that the settings are not changed inadvertently Selecting the Decimal Point and Separator Notations of CSV Files You can select the decimal point period or comma and the separator comma or semicolon notations according to the Excel program that you use The selected notation is applied to program pattern files and measurement result files in CSV format Self Test You can test the display and keys Checking the System Status The GS610 displays the product name serial number firmware version options and calibration date Updating the System Firmware The GS610 system can be updated by storing the most recent system file from a PC to the volatile disk GS610RAM IM 765501 01E 2 23 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg Chapter 3 Instrument Preparation and Common Operations 3 1 Handling Precautions Read the Safety Precautions Safety Precautions If you are using this instrument for the first time make sure to t
174. e of these integration times in measurements that handle delicate voltage or current that is easily affected by noise The power frequency setting can be changed even after the GS610 starts up see section 3 6 Setting the Power Frequency lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SENSe ITIMe 7 6 IM 765501 01E 7 6 Auto Zero Function Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O C Cc O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store FE wa phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt xa ee sur and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL values using the rotary knob numeric Loca OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and power Cmc ie sweep omr mie right arrow key For details on the foe al pane ne operation using the rotary knob numeric C r0 keys and see sections 3 8 or ai 3 9 Turning the Auto Zero Function ON OFF 1 Press SHIFT V I Q MEASURE to display the Measure menu 7 2 Press the Auto Zero soft key to select On or Off Measure IntgTime Average AutoZero AutoZerolAuto V I On off ims Off On off Exec tn otf 3 o Executing the Auto Zero Function 3 3 Press the Auto Zero Exec soft key to execute the auto zero function Measure IntgTime Average AutoZero AutoZer
175. e secondary battery reaches the charge voltage the GS610 switches from voltage measurement mode to current measurement mode 3 When the measured current reaches a given value the GS610 stops the output Key Points in the Operation and Setting 1 Switching the measurement function using the Auto V I function See section 7 7 Turning Auto V I ON OFF 2 Stopping the output using the computation function See section 8 5 User Defined Computation 3 Saving the measured data using the storage function See section 9 1 Storing the Measured Results Connection Procedure Connect the OUTPUT terminal to each end of the battery with cables To carry out voltage measurements more accurately use the remote sense four terminal connection to connect the SENSE terminal to each end of the battery with cables Connection example for measurements SENSE OUTPUT 110V 1V 110V MAX MAX MAX Lo a App 14 IM 765501 01E Appendix 2 Application Examples Procedure Preparation Enable the AUTO V I function that automatically switches from voltage measurement mode to current measurement mode when the measured voltage reaches a specified value Set the GS610 as follows Setup Example of the GS610 SOURCE Output function Current output Limiter value 3 6 V Output mode DC Output range AUTO OUTPUT CONTROL Trigger mode Internal MEASURE Measurement function Voltage measurement Integration tim
176. e setting takes time and the source level becomes discontinuous if the range setting switches as a result of changing the source level There are two source modes available DC Source Mode If the sweep mode see section 2 6 Sweep is ON in DC source mode the source level changes after a time specified by the source delay elapses from the point in which the trigger is activated Then measurement starts after a time specified by measurement delay elapses When the measurement and computation are complete one source measure cycle is finished If the sweep mode is OFF the source level is maintained and the source measure cycle is carried out If the measurement function see section 2 4 Measurement is turned OFF measure delay measurement and computation are not carried out The source measure cycle is finished when the source level changes Trigger Current source level Previous source i l I Source f 1 1 level Measurement Computation l Measurement Measurement Source delay delay i EEE SE 1 Source measure cycle IM 765501 01E 2 7 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 3 Source Measurement Source Delay Source Pulse Source Mode Pulse source mode can be used to improve the reproducibility of measurements on DUTs that change in characteristics due to the heat generation that results from applying the source such as a resistor with large temp
177. ear the entered characters one at a time Turn the rotary knob to the right to increase the value Turn the rotary knob to the left to decrease the value Numeric keys Enter the value directly 3 14 IM 765501 01E Chapter4 Trigger Setting Connection Type Remote Sense and Local Sense and USB Storage Function 4 1 Setting the Trigger Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press Cc Cc Cc C Cc Cc ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the so GEJ ma 7 0 mo r srs phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU a MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation o of selecting or setting items or entering COMPARE E values using the rotary knob numeric Local OUTPUT CONTRO keys Q and keys BS key and POWER sweep omr mG rightarrow key For details on the ol DE go ol as operation using the rotary knob numeric O keys K amp D and see sections 3 8 or LSH 3 9 Selecting the Trigger Mode 1 Press SHIFT TRIG MODE to display the TrigMode menu 2 Select the desired trigger mode from Int Ext and Imm If the measurement is OFF Measure OFF see section 7 1 Turning the Measurement ON OFF Imm cannot be selected Trighod Int Ext Imm If the trigger mode is set to Int proceed to step 3 Setting the Repeat Period 3
178. easurement esssesesseeesesesseesseeeseees 2 10 7 3 current measurement range settings cee 2 10 auto range SOUFCE sessssessseesssesssevessessseessseesseessevesseteseeeeee 2 7 current source range Settings eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 7 AUTO RANGE Key svcevevencineciie avian er 5 2 7 3 GULO SIONAQS sev sii acta anirdihie stds Mitinad 2 19 D auto storage turning ON OFF Of eeeeeceeseeeeeereeeeeereenees 9 2 TT ole 74 E E E T 2 12 7 8 data length a AUTO ZETO sa fvccsstnes cescteavhend casdeetiesitcineddidysiiitesleadenn ade 7 7 DAtAB ts eraran air iaa EEEa Auto Zend EXC adrenn E a Ti 7 7 date and time AUTO ZOO FUNCHON secvcicecevecaieiscerscseesctensscsssbecsecvediateee 2 11 7 7 DD Gators cede ctecc ser sees oeree A AVGIAQ Os T DC source mode average count Default Gateway AVELAQING o eeeeeseeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeetteeeeaseteneneeteneey DHCP omenan nonan hehe Maes cee ee eens DIO 5pin DIO 6pin B Page DIO 7pin baCKS PACE Key vrsim reri iiaa E 3 14 DIO 8pin DAU Late a disk formatting Off ices inienn seien 2 21 4 7 Badh alona ama A dated ates DiskFOormat ssssssssisissssstisisssssstssrnssssntnsrnnnnsnnnstnnnnnnntnttnntt 4 7 BOCK isons ia wel sl ine Display seeeeeseeeee ve 11 7 17 6 block average display brightness 00 eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneees 11 7 block diagram display turning OFF sscccecscdestiseitarseceevivs ae issesseeenees 11 7 BNC IN rennen A BNC input output te
179. ection When Using TRIG IN SWEEP START IN and CTRL IN Input level TTL level Minimum pulse width when applying edge input 10 us or greater Input Circuit Diagram 5 V 10 kQ 100 Q Output Section When Using TRIG OUT SWEEP SYNC OUT and CTRL OUT or COMPARE HI COMPARE IN COMPARE LO COMPARE OV and COMPARE END Output level TTL level Pulse width when outputting a pulse signal Approx 10 us e Output Circuit Diagram 5 V 100 Q AN CAUTION e Do not apply a voltage exceeding the TTL level to the input Do not short or apply external voltage to the output lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt ROUTe BNCI SELect ROUTe BNCI CONTrol ROUTe BNCO SELect ROUTe BNCO TRIGger ROUTe BNCO SWEep ROUTe BNCO CONTrol ROUTe DIO5 ROUTe DIO6 ROUTe DIO7 ROUTe DIO8 IM 765501 01E 10 5 indjno ANduy jeu13 x3 pue jndyno jAndu ONG 10 1 Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and the External Input Output Connector Timing Chart e Trigger Trig Trigin _ f h Source delay lt Pulse width o l l l l l l l l Source During pulse mode Measurement I jq Measurement l delay l TrigOut j pmo y Origin l TrigOut l SrcChg LI T TrigOut I I MeasBgn l l t TrigOut i MeasEnd TrigOut PulsEnd Sweep Example when the sweep count is 4 Sweep Lr Start In When the sweep termination mode is Keep
180. ections 3 8 or 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the System soft key Remote Error Wire esy I F Setup Log 4W 2w Setting System 3 Press the Product Info soft key External Beep Display LineFreq Product Next 1 0 On Off A 50 60 Info 1 2 Explanation The following items can be confirmed Instrument GS610 SOURCE MEASURE UNIT J Product name SerialNo 12345673 Serial number Firmware Revision 2005 06 03 10 15 00 Firmware revision Option Ethernet Interface Option Options Calibration Date 2005 02 14 05 46 49 ___ Calibrated date lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt IDN 17 8 IM 765501 01E 17 5 Updating the System Firmware Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the AUTO Vil UMT Vs IS phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering CONPARE TTS values using the rotary knob numeric aa OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and power Cus we sweer starr mG right arrow key For details on the ne al KENO me operation using the rotary knob numeric C keys amp and CB see sections 3 8 or 3 9 Obtaining the Update File 1 Do
181. ective Protective Grounding or Fuse Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective Also make sure to check them before operation Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard e Do Not Remove Covers The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only Opening the cover is dangerous because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages Ground the Instrument before Making External Connections Securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external control unit If you are going to touch the circuit make sure to turn OFF the circuit and check that no voltage is present vi IM 765501 01E waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment A Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC This directive is only valid in the EU This product complies with the WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC marking requirement This marking indicates that you must not discard this electrical electronic product in domestic household waste Product Category With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE directive Annex 1 this product is classified as a Monitoring and Control instrumentation product Do not dispose in domestic household waste When disposing products in the EU
182. eeeaeenaes 3 7 395 Wining PrecattiOniS sissesrresisnsei ins siosaia taiea arrea ae aaea ieas Ea 3 8 3 6 Setting the Power Frequency cceccceeseeeseeteeeeeeeeseaeecaeeeaeeseeeeaeeesaeeeaeeseaeseaeeseaeeeeeteas 3 9 3 7 Setting the Date Time and the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time 3 10 3 8 Basic Operation of Keys and Rotary Knob ceeceeeceeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeseaeeenetens 3 12 3 9 Entenng VAN Srimannaaraayana a iaaa 3 14 Chapter 4 Trigger Setting Connection Type Remote Sense and Local Sense and USB Storage Function 4 1 Setting the TGQ lt 2 chee cdeesaitabsenece cence neues cadinsaceys ai E E aa e AEE Eaa EEA 4 1 4 2 Connection Type Remote Sense and Local Sense ecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteaeeteaeeeaeeneas 4 3 4 3 USB Storage Function cee cececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeseeseaeeeneeseaeeseeeseaeeseaeeeaeesaas 4 5 Chapter 5 Source 5 1 Switching the Source Function ccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeseaeeteaeeseeseaeesieeeeaeeesaeen 5 1 5 2 Setting the Source Range Setting ecceeecceeseeeeceneeseaeeeaeeseaeeeseeseaeeseeseaeesseeseaeesneeeeas 5 2 5 3 Setting the Limiter ssc essccs ssazs Fecsesciedaceyscocacccnscezecteenecvacccunsenagaes sacs saaavaorisanensanselerestacsceesiaaescs 5 4 5 4 Setting the DC Source Mode ecceeceeseeseeeeneeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeessaeeeaeesaeeeseeseaeeeeeseaeeseeeaas 5 6 5 5 Setting the Pulse Source Mode
183. eep i Value Value Count 6 2 IM 765501 01E 6 1 Setting the Linear or Log Sweep 5 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the start value Start Value 100 oom Y Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Log Rtn Keep a Value Value Count 6 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Start Value 1 0 0 mY y Enter Setting the Stop Value 7 Press the Stop Value soft key Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Log Rtn Keep al Value Value Count o 8 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the stop value Stop Value 200 o0oMmV Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Log Rtn Keep a Value Value Count 9 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Stop Value 2 0 0 mY Enter Setting the Step Count 10 Press the Step Count soft key Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Log ntn Keep i Value Value Count 11 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the step count Step Count 1 0 Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Log Rtn Keep an Value Value Count 12 If you use the numeric keys press the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Step Count 8 rot i dy ie IM 765501 01E 6 3 6 1
184. el Sd Source delay before sweep Meas Measurement delay measurement computation e Sweep operation when the termination mode Last is set to return Rtn Start Sweep Waiting for start Sweeping Waiting for start state 1 Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger v v v v ea measure Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Sd Meas Sa Stop value i csostca e EEE ee Source level i i Start value _ Sd Source dela Source level y Meas Measurement delay measurement before sweep computation Repeat Count The selectable range is 1 to 1000 or infinity 0 For example if the repeat count is set to 5 the GS610 repeats the sweep operation five times when it receives a start event Then the GS610 returns to the start wait condition If infinity is selected the GS610 starts the sweep operation when it receives a start event and repeats the operation until the sweep operation or output is turned OFF 2 16 IM 765501 01E 2 7 Computation Averaging When the averaging function is used the specified number average count of measured values are averaged to derive the final displayed value Therefore the measured results are more stable There are two averaging modes block average and moving average Block average The specified average count of measurements is carried out in a single source measure cycle The GS610 displays the result obtained
185. el or a communication command SWEep TRIGger see section 16 2 4 Sweep Commands You can also generate the start event with the falling edge of the signal applied to the BNC input terminal or pin 3 of the external input output connector on the rear panel When the GS610 is in the start wait state the wait indicator WaitStart illuminates When the sweep operation is started the START key blinks and WaitStart turns OFF until the sweep operation is completed If a start event occurs in the middle of a sweep operation the current sweep operation is cancelled and the sweep operation is restarted from the beginning lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SWEep TRIGger 6 10 IM 765501 01E 6 6 Program Pattern File In program sweep a text file created on a PC or a similar device is stored in the PROGRAM directory on the internal non volatile disk GS610ROM The file is selected as a pattern file to carry out the sweep operation Sample csv that is stored in the PROGRAM directory when the GS610 is shipped from the factory or when the disk is formatted is a sample pattern file Pattern File Description A pattern file consists of a list of source values Each value is delimited by a line feed code CR LF CR LF The value format is an integer fixed point number or floating point number without a unit For example a pattern file that changes from 0 to 5 in 1 25 steps is written as follows 0 00 1 25
186. electing or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL nH 2 ca values using the rotary knob numeric oi OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER misc TIME SWEEP l START TRIG right arrow key For details on the Do al KEYLOCK vone operation using the rotary knob numeric keys amp and see sections 3 8 or QO 3 9 Press RECALL to display the statistical computation results of the measured results of the most recent stored result Statistical Computation Parameters The following statistical computation parameters are displayed Total count io Sare count f Maximum 4 98435E 07 aximum value Minimum 7 05163E 09 7 Minimum value Peak Peak 4 91383E 07 Maximum value minimum value Mean 6 01002E 08 _1__ Average Standard deviation 1 54067E 07 Standard deviation lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt TRACe ACTual TRACe CALCulate ACTual TRACe CALCulate MAXimum TRACe CALCulate MINimum TRACe CALCulate AVERage TRACe CALCulate SDEViation 9 4 IM 765501 01E Chapter 10 BNC Input Output and External Input Output 10 1 Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and the External Input Output Connector Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O C Cc O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE
187. ement 7 1 Turning the Measurement ON OFF Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O C Cc O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the ee store Ca CC ma N ro aw J ss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU l TEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL values using the rotary knob numeric ioa OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome sweep omr Tie right arrow key For details on the fo al pour me operation using the rotary knob numeric C r0 keys amp D and see sections 3 8 or i a 3 9 1 Press SHIFT V I Q MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the Measure soft key to select ON measure or OFF not measure Measure IntgTime Average AutoZero AutoZerolAuto YI On Off ims off On off Exec On Off Explanation The default setting is ON measure When turned OFF the procedure related to measurement is not carried out This enables the source measure cycle to be shortened If you need to change the source level at high speeds such as a program sweep at a period time of 100 us turn the measurement OFF lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SENSe STATe IM 765501 01E 7 1 qyUSWdINSeS a 7 2 Selecting the
188. ement Computation I Measurement _ __j_ i Measurement Source delay delay mm 1 Source measure cycle IM 765501 01E 2 3 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 2 Source Measure Cycle Flow Chart of a Source Measure Cycle The time indicated in the chart is a typical time needed for its processing The averaging time varies depending on the average count and the computation time varies depending on the complexity of the equation Source delay S Delay source range is elected Update source level 10 us No Is measurement ON Yes Measurement delay M Delay A D operation IntgTime Change to optimal range 2 ms measurement range is selected No Yes A D operation IntgTime Block average operation No Average count finished Yes Resistance No measurement Calculate resistance 100 us Moving average moving average count x 1 5 us Computation 150 us NULL computation 20 us Comparison 20 us End source measure cycle Integration time 200 us when the integration time is 250 us 1 ms or 4 ms Integration time 520 us when the integration time is 20 ms 100 ms or 200 ms Computation 150 us 2 4 IM 765501 01E 2 3 Source Function Source Range Limiter Source A You can select voltage source VS or current source IS The GS610 generates voltage or cur
189. enables the GS610 to be controlled from the Web browser window The following functions are available e Remote Panel Function Set or operate the GS610 using keys on the remote panel Command Control Function Set or query the GS610 by sending communication commands from the command control screen e Communication environment display Check the communication environment on the status screen e FTP Server Function View the file on the GS610 volatile memory GS610RAM or non volatile memory GS610ROM and transmit or copy files to the PC GS610 Environment Connecting to the Network Connect the GS610 to the network using the Ethernet For the connection procedure see section 12 2 TCP IP Configure the network environment and IP address for communication using the Ethernet interface For the setup procedure see section 12 3 IM 765501 01E 12 7 uondo 2e yu z u1 473 Ss 12 5 Web Server Function Preparations on the PC Power up the PC and log on Logging into the Web Server GS610 1 Start Internet Explorer 2 Enter the IP address of the GS610 for example 10 0 159 30 or the host name of the GS610 for example gs610 1 if a DNS server is available on the network Enter the IP address http 10 0 159 30 Enter the host name http gs610 1 3 Press the ENTER key on the PC keyboard If the login to the GS610 Web server is successful the Web server window appears Web Server Window FTP server function Co
190. ent SWEep SPACing LIN Currently set to linear LOG Currently set to logarithmic SOUR CURR SWE SPAC LIN SOUR CURR SWE SPAC Description This setting is used when the source pattern is set to sweep SOURce MODE SWEep This command and SOURce VOLTage SWEep SPACing are equivalent SOURce CURRent SWEep STARt Function Syntax Example Sets the start value of the current sweep or queries the current setting SOURce CURRent SWEep STARt lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum lt current gt Sets the start value to the specified value MINimum Sets the start value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the start value to the maximum value SOURce CURRent SWEep STARt MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Current gt SOUR CURR SWE STAR 0 05 SOUR CURR SWE STAR MIN SOUR CURR SWE STAR SOUR CURR SWE STAR MIN IM 765501 01E 16 21 spuewwos uoHesUNWWOD g 16 2 Commands SOURce CURRent SWEep STOP Function Sets the stop value of the current sweep or queries the current setting Syntax SOURCe CURRent SWEep STOP lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum lt current gt Sets the stop value to the specified value MINimum Sets the stop value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the stop value to the maximum value SOURCe CURRent SWEep STOP MINimu
191. ent Summary Bit Set to 1 when the logical product of each bit of the source event register and each bit of the corresponding enable register is 1 See the page 16 46 Bit2 EAV Error Available Set to 1 when the error queue is not empty In other words this bit is set to 1 when an error occurs See the page 16 48 Bit 4 MAV Message Available Set to 1 when the output queue is not empty In other words this bit is set to 1 when there is data to be transmitted See the page 16 48 Bit5 ESB Event Summary Bit Set to 1 when the logical product of each bit of the standard event register and each bit of the corresponding enable register is 1 See the page 16 44 Bit6 RQS Request Service MSS Master Status Summary Set to 1 when the logical AND of the status byte excluding bit 6 and the service request enable register is not 0 In other words this bit is set to 1 when the instrument is requesting service from the controller RGS is set to 1 when the MSS bit changes from 0 to 1 and cleared when serial polling is carried out or when the MSS bit changes to 0 Bit Masking To mask a bit in the status byte so that it does not cause an SRQ set the corresponding bit of the service request enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 EAV so that service is not requested when an error occurs set bit 2 of the service request enable register to 0 This can be done using the SRE command To query whether each b
192. ent and lead resistance BNC Input Output and External Input Output The GS610 has a BNC terminal TRIG SWEEP CTRL IN OUT and external input output connector EXT I O that can be used to input or output trigger signals and other signals and output the comparison results GP IB RS 232 Communication The GS610 is equipped with a GP IB interface and RS 232 interface that can be used to control the GS610 using commands On the RS 232 interface various parameters such as baud rate 9600 bps to 115200 bps flow control none XON OFF or CTS RTS and terminator CR LF or CR LF The command control using the GP IB RS 232 and the optional Ethernet interface are mutually independent and can be used simultaneously For example the GS610 can be controlled via the GP IB interface while monitoring the status via the Ethernet interface Ethernet Communications Option A LAN interface with auto switching between 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps In addition to controlling the GS610 using commands up to five FTP clients can be connected through the anonymous FTP server function The non volatile disk GS610ROM and volatile disk GS610RAM are available as subdirectories at the FTP root Files can be transferred freely using the FTP protocol You can set a fixed address for the IP address or obtain the address dynamically from the DHCP server Command control server function A command mnemonic stream parsing server at port 7655 that allows up to five c
193. ent year month and day if yyyy mm dd is omitted Interpreted as 00 is ss is omitted IM 765501 01E Appendix 1 Computation Definition Specifications Order of Precedence Expressions with higher order of precedence larger value are evaluated first Symbol Operator and Function Order of Precedence 12 11 RAND EDGE ABS 10 EXP LN LOG SQRT SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN SINH COSH TANH MKTIME TRUNC NOT 9 A 8 1 7 6 lt lt gt gt 5 l 4 XOR 3 AND 2 OR 1 0 IM 765501 01E App 5 a x pu ddy Appendix 2 Application Examples Evaluation of the Static Characteristics of a Transistor e Vce Ilc Characteristics Evaluation The Vce lc characteristics of a transistor can be measured using the GS610 program sweep mode Details of Operation Measures collector current Ic when collector emitter voltage Vce is varied with base current lg fixed Connection example for measurements c q IB Constant Result file PC I p B GS610 No 2 on poi bo Sweep pattern file E E pp Key Points in the Operation and Setting Transferring the pattern files and measurement result data files
194. eration Wait until bit 0 EOS of the source event is set to 1 Function WaitSweepEnd dev As Integer While CommSourceEvent dev And amp H1 0 Sleep 10 Wend End Function Sample Sequence 4 Set the GS610 to Setup 4 and start the sweep operation when the sweep computation is complete After starting turn the output OFF when the sweep operation is complete Function SampleSequence4 Dim dev As Integer dev CommOpen Open the device Call Setup4 dev Set to Setup 4 Call WaitSweepCalculate dev Wait for the completion of the sweep computation Call CommSend dev CLS Clear all events Call CommSend dev SWE TRIG Start the sweep operation Call WaitSweepEnd dev Wait for the completion of the sweep operation 16 60 IM 765501 01E 16 4 Sample Programs Call CommSend dev OUTP STAT OFF Turn the output OFF Call CommClose dev Close the device End Function SpUueWILUOD uonesiunwwog IM 765501 01E 16 61 16 4 Sample Programs 16 4 7 Sample 5 Example of Carrying Out the Storage Function and Reading the Statistical Values Attribute VB_Name Sample5 Sample 5 Example of Carrying Out the Storage Fun Statistical Values CALL SampleSequence5 ction and Reading the Wait for the storage operation to complete Wait for the result of TRACe STATus to become 0 Function WaitStoreCom
195. erature coefficient It is also effective for evaluation of display devices that use pulse width to control the brightness The pulse is specified by two values the pulse base value and the source level The minimum pulse width is 100 us As with the DC source the source level changes after a time specified by the source delay elapses from the point in which the trigger is activated Furthermore the measurement starts after a time specified by the measurement delay elapses The source level changes at the same the measure delay is activated and returns to the pulse base value after the pulse width A source measure cycle is finished at the end of the pulse or at the end of the measurement and computation whichever comes later If the measurement function see section 2 4 Measurement is turned OFF measure delay measurement and computation are not carried out The end of the pulse is the end of a source measure cycle When the End of the Measurement and Computation Is after the End of the Pulse Generation Trigger Current source level Pulse source end Base pulse value i Measurement Computation Base pulse value Measurement Source delay delay E gt A ir Source measure cycle When the End of the Measurement and Compuiation Is before the End of the Pulse Generation Trigger Current source level 1 Pulse source end Source Pulse width Base pulse valu
196. ering COMPARE TALE values using the rotary knob numeric i OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and power Ce CJ swe smr mG right arrow key For details on the g9 5l ii NODE operation using the rotary knob numeric r0 keys QD and see sections 3 8 or _ 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the Setup soft key The files that are currently saved and the Setup menu is displayed Remote Error Wire csv I F Setup Log aw 2w Setting Susten 3 Press the Save Setup soft key The menu SaveRamDisk for saving to the volatile disk GS610RAM and the menu Save Setup1 to Save Setup4 for saving to the non volatile disk GS610ROM are displayed Default txt 2005 06 28 16 31 pi 2005 07 05 14 15 etupl ts Setupe txt 2005707706 20 33 Save Load Powerdn Setup Setup Setup Saving to the Volatile Disk GS610RAM 4 Press the SaveRamDisk soft key The SaveRamDisk soft key blinks while the save operation is in progress When the save operation completes the menu shown in step 2 appears Default txt 2005 06 14 15 32 2005 06 14 15 33 etupl tx Setup2 txt 2005 06 14 15 33 Save Save Save Save Save RamDisk Setup Setup Setup3 Setup4 Saving to the Non Volatile Disk GS610ROM 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired setup number from Save Setup1 to Save Setup4 The soft key that you pressed blinks while the save operation is in progr
197. errors and messages An error has an associated error number and a message does not A message is displayed in the error log until the problem indicated by the message is solved It is not cleared when the Clear soft key is pressed For the meaning and corrective action of errors see section 17 2 Error Code Description and Corrective Action Note e The error memory is also cleared when the error is read using a communication command SYSTem ERRor or when the GS610 is turned OFF You can also clear the error memory by sending the CLS communication command e When the error memory is full 350 Queue overflow is entered as the last error indicating that any addition errors will be discarded When the error memory is cleared the error indicator turns OFF lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SYSTem ERRor CLS 11 6 IM 765501 01E 11 6 Selecting the Display Brightness and Turning the Display OFF Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press C Cc O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE e In the procedural explanation below the soe V VO LIMIT VS IS phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU an MEASURE and gt are used to refer to the operation RANGE s 2 eal Mal ULL Ato Ss C7 of
198. ess When the save operation completes the menu shown in step 2 appears Default txt 2005 06 14 15 32 2005 06 14 15 33 etupl tx Setup2 txt 2005 06 14 15 33 Save Save Save Save Save RamDisk Setup Setup Setup3 Setup4 IM 765501 01E suolouny 419y10 2 11 1 Saving the Setup Data Explanation Saving to the Volatile Disk GS610RAM The setup file Setup txt is stored to the GS610RAM If a setup file already exists it is overwritten This setup file is used to transfer the file to a PC Saving to the Non Volatile Disk GS610ROM The setup file Setup1 to Setup4 txt are saved to the SETUP folder on the GS610ROM Up to four setup files can be saved If a different file is saved to a number already containing a setup file it is overwritten Note ____ e The setup file is a text file containing a sequence of command mnemonics The contents can be edited on a PC e The file stored in the SETUP directory on the GS610ROM can be renamed on the PC However do not rename the default setup file Default txt lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SYSTem SETup SAVE SAV 11 2 IM 765501 01E 11 2 Loading the Setup Data Procedure To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE DISPLAY SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt
199. essestseessetsseeseesees 5 10 source range setting PUISE SOUFCE MOE seeecssessceseessesstesessteseesetsetesteseesees 2 8 5 8 SOUICE VAIUC ssssseeeeesseeeeeeeessneeteessnnnteetesnnnetteessney p s Wid a keae tear RERA 5 10 Standard event register ssseerssesseeeesseessessen 16 44 APU KEV osie E anaE ARE 6 10 Start Value srian aaas airaa Sai 2 15 6 1 6 2 6 4 R Page statistical computation value display cece 2 19 statistical computation values recalling Of ee 9 4 RANGE si aeatetiastn isin dS ene a status byte onnenn 16 43 READ OrOUD cis2ctsescesacnssastssdsayceucaccsvceassrdcisctecendssedsicenss codes 16 38 Status repOrt oiiire 16 42 Real sitesi malar aa Step COUN o n 2 15 6 3 6 4 recall COMMANAS ccccccceessseeceeseeesseeeeeeeeceseseeeeeeeenees 16 29 Step Value ceeesssocecssseccssesssssseessssseeseesssssseseeeesee 2 15 6 2 6 4 REGAL KOY ssc ec ssscte cases sk acne Ra oneness 9 4 Stop Bit coeccsccccccscsccsscssssssescccsessssesssssensssssesesssssssseseseenses 14 7 recommended replacement parts ceceeeeeeeeeeneeees 17 11 Stop Valea eet ccieeachuteneenue 2 15 6 2 6 3 6 4 reforenGe VAUS icsi isisisi raana Eaei AREE Aie 8 8 StopBit Remote I F sasse 12 3 12 6 13 5 14 6 15 2 Storage FEMOtE PANE FUNCTION ssr ccc estes niaaa aea a 12 9 storage operation stopping Of cccccssssscsssssssseesssssseeeeee 9 3 rE MOTE SENSE a ezceceesesaetnsanenseonecetneasteecrenszatbapsis
200. ets the smallest integration time that includes the specified value PLC Sets the integration time to 1 cycle of the power frequency MINimum Sets the integration time to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the integration time to the maximum value UP Increases the integration time by 1 setting DOWN Decreases the integration time by 1 setting SENSe ITIMe MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Time gt Example SENS ITIM 4E 3 SENS ITIM MIN SENS ITIM SENS ITIM MIN SENSe DELay Function Sets the measurement delay or queries the current setting Syntax SENSe DELay lt Time gt MINimum MAXimum lt Time gt Sets the measurement delay to the specified value MINimum Sets the measurement delay to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the measurement delay to the maximum value SENSe DELay MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Time gt Example SENS DEL 2 5E 3 SENS DEL MIN SENS DEL SENS DEL MAX 16 24 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands SENSe AZERo STATe Function Sets the auto zero state ON or OFF or queries the current setting SENSe AZERo STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns auto zero ON 0 or OFF Turns auto zero OFF SENSe AZERo STATe gt 1 Currently ON 0 C
201. ettings are loaded When shipped from the factory or when the disk is formatted a default setup file is stored in this directory GS610RAM ARAM disk that is automatically formatted when the power is turned ON Itis a volatile disk used to exchange files with the PC The result file Result csv is created in this directory when the storage operation is carried out If the settings are saved to the GS610RAM the current settings are saved to a file named Setup txt When updating the system firmware the system file System bin is written in this directory from aPC For details see section 17 5 Updating the System Firmware 4 6 IM 765501 01E 4 3 USB Storage Function Formatting the Disk If GS610ROM and GS610RAM cannot be detected on the PC if you wish to set the GS610 to factory default conditions or if the disk is corrupt you must format the disk Procedure DISPLAY SS Sa a am To exit the menu during operation press ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the MENU POWER no al O Note f Ge Be MEASURE MENU SOURCE RANGE COMPARE VALUE phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys
202. evel value 16 17 LEVel MINimum MAXimum Queries the voltage source level value 16 17 PBASe lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the pulse base value for voltage pulse generation 16 17 PBASe MINimum MAXimum Queries the pulse base value for voltage pulse generation 16 17 PROTection STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the limiter state ON or OFF 16 17 STATe Queries the limiter state ON or OFF 16 17 LINKage 1 0 ON OFF Sets the limiter tracking state ON or OFF 16 17 LINKage Queries the limiter tracking state ON or OFF 16 17 ULIMit lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the upper voltage limiter value for generating current 16 17 ULIMit MINimum MAXimum Queries the upper voltage limiter value for generating current 16 17 16 6 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands Command Function Page LLIMit lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the lower voltage limiter value for generating current 16 18 LLIMit MINimum MAXimum Queries the lower voltage limiter value for generating current 16 18 SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Sets the sweep mode linear or log 16 18 SPACing Queries the sweep mode linear or log of the voltage sweep 16 18 STARt lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the start value of the voltage sweep 16 18 STARt MINimum MAXimum Queries the start value of the voltage sweep 16 18 STOP lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the stop value of the voltage sweep 16 18 STOP MINimum MAXi
203. exp1 gt to the power of lt exp2 gt 1 if lt exp1 gt is less than lt exp2 gt or 0 otherwise 1 if lt exp1 gt is less than or equal to lt exp2 gt or 0 otherwise 1 if lt exp1 gt is greater than or equal to lt exp2 gt or 0 otherwise 1 if lt exp1 gt is greater than lt exp2 gt or 0 otherwise 1 if lt exp1 gt is equal to lt exp2 gt or 0 otherwise 1 if lt exp1 gt is not equal to lt exp2 gt or 0 otherwise 1 if lt exp1 gt is nonzero and lt exp2 gt is nonzero or 0 otherwise 1 if lt exp1 gt is nonzero or lt exp2 gt is nonzero or 0 otherwise 1 if lt exp1 gt is nonzero and lt exp2 gt is 0 or lt exp1 gt is 0 and lt exp2 gt is nonzero or 0 otherwise 1 if lt exp gt is 0 0 otherwise Negation Random number between 0 and 1 using lt exp gt as a seed Random number between 0 and 1 1 when lt exp gt changes from 0 to nonzero 0 otherwise Absolute value of lt exp gt E to the power of lt exp gt Natural logarithm of lt exp gt Common logarithm of lt exp gt Square root of lt exp gt Sine of lt exp gt Cosine of lt exp gt Tangent of lt exp gt Arc sine of lt exp gt Arc cosine of lt exp gt Arc tangent of lt exp gt Hyperbolic sine of lt exp gt Hyperbolic cosine of lt exp gt Hyperbolic tangent of lt exp gt Truncate lt exp gt Convert the date time expressed by lt string gt to the same format as the time stamp Format yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Interpreted as the curr
204. ey to display the Remote I F menu Remote Error Wire cs I F Setup Log 4w 2w Setting System Selecting the USB Interface Function 3 Press the USB soft key to display the USB menu GPIB USB JP asm tm fede 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired USB interface function USB Mode Storage USB THC Explanation Selecting the USB Interface Function Storage Select this to use the USB storage function see section 2 9 USB Storage Function USB TMC Select this to perform command control from a VISA library VISA resource name VISA resource name contains the character string that is passed to open a device viOpen using a VISA library USB 0xB21 0x1E No Instrument Number C INSTR 1 The No Instrument Number is given on the name plate on the side panel of the instrument see page ii 15 2 IM 765501 01E Chapter 16 Communication Commands 16 1 Program Format 16 1 1 Symbols Used in the Syntax 16 1 2 Messages Symbols which are used in the syntax descriptions in section 16 2 are shown below For details on the data Messages see page 16 5 Messages are used to exchange information between the controller and the instrument Messages that are Symbol Meaning Example sent from the controller to the instrument are called Exclusive OR SOURce FUNCtion program messages and messages that are sent back VOLTage CURRent from the instrument to the controller are called Example o
205. ey to move across the digits Note ____ If the setup menu shows Next 1 2 you can press the Next 1 2 soft key to show the 2 2 menu To show the 1 2 menu again press the Next 2 2 soft key Clearing the Setup Menu Press ESC DISPLAY to switch to the numeric display If the menu that is shown is under multiple menu levels press ESC DISPLAY to move up a level in the menu hierarchy To switch to the numeric display press ESC DISPLAY multiple times Note ____ In the procedural explanations in this manual the procedure to clear the setup menu are not described IM 765501 01E 3 13 suoneiodg UOWWOD pue uoneiedaid JUSUUNASU e 3 9 Entering Values Entering Values Using the Rotary Knob Entering Values Using Numeric Keys Highlighted area Rotary knob YOKOGAWA Sif MEASURE UNIT AVERAGE l O4WRE costan Bas 0 00000mA REMOTE Pulse Zero Zero Z Base Offset HiZ Loz Cal Exec DISPLAY ELSIS el ee om OCI piniajn 7 OA j ICI e Right arrow key BS backspace key Select the setup item with a soft key Then turn the rotary knob to change the value in the numeric entry area highlighted area To move across digits press the BS backspace key or the right arrow key You can enter a value for the item that has a numeric entry area highlighted area shown by pressing the numeric keys Press the BS key to cl
206. f Input SOURce FUNCTION VOLTage response messages 7 Can be omitted oUTPut STATe If a program message contains a message unit that Can be repeated requests a response a query the instrument returns a response message upon receiving the program message A single response message is always returned in response to a single program message Program Messages Data that is sent from the controller to the instrument are called program messages The program message format is shown below lt PMT gt lt Program message unit gt lt Program Message Unit gt A program message consists of one or more program message units each unit corresponds to one command The instrument executes the received commands in order Each program message unit is separated by a semicolon For details regarding the format of the program message unit see the next section Example MEASURE FUNCTION DTOC SPEED 1 0 lt PMT gt a Unit Unit SpUueWILUOD uonesiunwwog IM 765501 01E 16 1 16 1 Program Format lt PMT gt lt PMT gt is a program message terminator The following three types are available e NL New Line Same as LF Line Feed ASCII code OAH e AEND The END message EOI signal as defined in the IEEE488 1 The data byte that is sent with the END message is the last data of the program message e NL END NL with an END message attached NL is not included in the program
207. ffset calibrati tion 5 9 Exec xecutes offset calibration section 5 9 High Sets the upper limiter value section 5 3 Limit L_ row Sets the lower limiter value section 5 3 Limit Limit a5 A On Off Turns ON OFF the limiter section 5 3 __ Tracking Turns ON OFF the limiter tracking section 5 3 On Off m SourceMode Selects the source mode DC or pulse DC Pulse sections 5 4 and 5 5 es the source range section 5 2 Decreases the source range section 5 2 Turns ON OFF the auto source range section 5 2 IM 765501 01E suoloun pue soweNn Hed 1 4 Key Groups and Menus MEASURE Group I V I Q __ SHIFT SHIFT NULL V I Q MEASURE MEASURE AUTO RANGE NULL VALUE VALUE MATH COMPARE SHIFT SHIFT MATH COMPARE STORE MENU MENU RECALL Switches the measurement function voltage V current I or resistance Q section 7 2 Measure On Off IntgTime kkk Average kkk AutoZeroj On Off AutoZeroj Exec Auto V I On Off Turns ON OFF the measurement function section 7 1 IntegrationTime Sets the integration time 250us ims 4ms 100ms 200ms section 7 5 Mode Avera
208. gator clip adapter Red and black 1 pc each Alligator clip adapter large 758929 1 set Safety terminal to alligator clip adapter Red and black 1 pc each Safety terminal adapter 758923 1 set Spring clamp type Red and black 1 pc each Safety terminal adapter 758931 1 set Screw in type Red and black 1 pc each Safety mini clip 701959 1 set Safety terminal to mini clip adapter Red and black 1 pc each Fork terminal adapter 758921 1 set Safety terminal to fork terminal adapter Red and black 1 pc each Conversion adapter 758924 1 BNC to binding post adapter Safety BNC cable 701902 1 BNC BNG length 1 m Safety BNC cable 701903 1 BNC BNG length 2 m D sub connector for A1519JD 1 set 1 connector cover 1 External I O B8060KA 15 pin connectocer iv IM 765501 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class instrument provided with a terminal for protective earth grounding The general safety precautions described herein must be observed during all phases of operation If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument A oF E D Warning handle with care Refer to the user s manual or service manual This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the in
209. ge Limiter Operation Low limiter High limiter a Zp E i Low limiter The high and low limiter values can be set independently If tracking is turned ON an absolute value can be set for the high and low limits and the limiter functions in the positive and negative ranges around zero If the high limiter is active the high limiter indicator H is shown on the display If the low limiter is active the low limiter indicator L is shown on the display 2 6 IM 765501 01E 2 3 Source Source Range Setting and Auto Range Source Mode Source Range Setting The source range settings during voltage generation and current generation are listed below e Voltage Source Range Settings Source Range Setting Source Range Resolution 200 mV 205 000 mV 1 uV 2V 2 05000 V 10 uV 12 V 12 0000 V 100 uV 20 V 20 5000 V 100 uV 30 V 30 000 V 1 mV 60 V 60 000 V 1 mV 110 V 110 000 V 1 mV e Current Source Range Settings Source Range Setting Source Range Resolution 20 uA 20 5000 uA 100 pA 200 uA 205 000 uA 1 nA 2 mA 2 05000 mA 10 nA 20 mA 20 5000 mA 100 nA 200 mA 205 000 mA 1 uA 0 5A 0 50000 A 10 uA 1A 1 00000 A 10 yA 2A 2 00000 A 10 yA 3A 3 20000 A 10 yA Auto Range If auto range is turned ON the range setting with the highest resolution that contains the source level is automatically selected eliminating the need for you to manually select the range setting However switching the rang
210. geMode Switches the average mode ek Jor Block Moving Off Block or Moving section 8 1 L_ Count Sets the average count section 8 1 Turns ON OFF the auto zero function section 7 6 Execute auto zero section 7 6 Turns ON OFF auto V I section 7 7 Turns ON OFF the auto measurement range section 7 3 Turns ON OFF the NULL computation section 8 2 Sets the NULL reference section 8 2 Math On Off Param A B Param c Param View Select File Compare On Off Upper Lower Turns ON OFF computation section 8 3 Sets equation parameter A section 8 3 Sets equation parameter B section 8 3 Sets equation parameter C section 8 3 Displays the equation section 8 3 Selects the equation definition file section 8 3 Turns ON OFF the comparison operation section 8 4 Sets the upper limit of the comparison operation section 8 4 Sets the lower limit of the comparison operation section 8 4 Turns ON OFF the storage function section 9 1 STORE kkk Count On Off Sets the number of points to be stored store count section 9 1 Auto Turns ON OFF the auto storage function section 9 1 Displays the statistical computation result section 9 2 1 6 IM 765501 01E 1 4 Key Groups and Menus OUTPUT CONTROL Group
211. gin measurement end or pulse end 16 31 SWEep ORIGin TURN ALL Sets the BNC sweep synchronization output generation timing sweep start 1 turn end all sweep end 16 31 SWEep Queries the BNC sweep synchronization output generation timing sweep start 1 turn end all sweep end 16 31 CONTrol ILOCk OUTPut ZERO PROGram Selects the control output interlock output control zero control or programmable 16 32 CONTrol Queries the control output selection interlock output control zero control or programmable 16 32 DIO5 OUTPut ZERO Sets the function output control or zero control of pin 5 control input of the external input output connector 16 32 DIO5 Queries the function output control or zero control of pin 5 control input of the external input output connector 16 32 DIO6 ORIGin SCHange MBEGin MEND PEND Sets the function trigger start point source change measurement begin measurement end or pulse end of pin 6 trigger output of the external input output connector 16 32 16 10 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands Command Function Page DI06 Queries the function trigger start point source change measurement begin measurement end or pulse end of pin 6 trigger output of the external input output connector 16 32 DIO7 ORIGin TURN ALL Sets the function sweep start point 1 turn end or all sweep end of pin 7 sweep synchronization output of the external input output connector 16 32 DIO
212. gs are initialized each time the power is turned ON Note The communication command RST initializes settings other than the stored setup data communication parameters and brightness see section 16 2 3 Common Commands lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SYSTem SETup PON 11 4 IM 765501 01E 11 4 Turning the Beep Sound ON OFF To exit the menu during operation press ESC at the upper left of the operation In the procedural explanation below the phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric keys and keys BS key and right arrow key For details on the operation using the rotary knob numeric keys and see sections 3 8 or Procedure DISPLAY panel MEASURE SOURCE J o a MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE COMPARE VALUE oH OUTPUT CONTROL POWER mse SWEEP mant TRIG_ De al KEY LOCK MODE 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the System soft key to display the System menu Remote Error Wire csv I F Setup Log 4w 2w Setting Sustem 3 Press the Beep soft key to select On or Off External Beep Display LineFreq Product Next 1 0 on oe A ENS Info 1 2 Explanation If the beep sound is turned ON a beep sound is generated such as when an error occurs during operation
213. hat is needed so that the range setting does not change Fixed Range The GS610 generates the source signal at the selected range setting The range setting can be changed with the RANGE A and Y keys while the source signal is being generated 5 Voltage Source Range Setting m Source Range Setting Source Range Resolution 2 s 200 mV 205 000 mV 1 uv 8 2V 2 05000 V 10 uV 12V 12 0000 V 100 uV 20 V 20 5000 V 100 uV 30 V 30 000 V 1 mV 60 V 60 000 V 1 mV 110 V 110 000 V 1 mV Current Source Range Setting Source Range Setting Source Range Resolution 20 uA 20 5000 uA 100 pA 200 uA 205 000 uA 1 nA 2 mA 2 05000 mA 10 nA 20 mA 20 5000 mA 100 nA 200 mA 205 000 mA 1 uA 0 5A 0 50000 A 10 yA 1A 1 00000 A 10 yA 2A 2 00000 A 10 yA 3A 3 20000 A 10 uA Note e Changing the range setting normally does not change the specified source value However if the fractional part is rounded in the source range of the new range setting or the source value falls outside the source range the source value is set to zero e If you enter a source value exceeding the specified range setting the maximum value of the source range is displayed and a beep sound see section 11 4 Turning the Beep Sound ON OFF is generated when the beep sound is enabled Auto Range When turned ON the range setting with the highest resolution that includes the source level is automatically selected There is no need to select the range setti
214. he assumption that the next command sent will also belong to the same level Therefore common header sections can be omitted for commands belonging to the same group Example INPUT DATA TRIG MODE MAN LEVEL 1 000V lt PMT gt When Concatenating Commands of Different Groups If the following command does not belong to the same group a colon is placed in front of the header Example MEASURE FUNCTION DTOC DISPLAY SCALE R10 lt PMT gt When Concatenating Simple Headers If a simple header follows another command a colon 3 is placed in front of the simple header Example MEASURE FUNCTION DTOC START lt PMT gt When Concatenating Common Commands Common commands that are defined in the IEEE 488 2 1992 are independent of hierarchy Colons 3 are not needed before a common command Example MEASURE FUNCTION DTOC CLS lt PMT gt When Separating Commands with lt PMT gt If a terminator is used to separate two commands each command is a separate message Therefore the common header must be specified for each command even when commands belonging to the same command group are being concatenated Example MEASURE FUNCTION DTOC lt PMT gt MEASURE SPEED 1 0 lt PMT gt Header Interpretation Rules The instrument interprets the header that is received according to the rules below e Mnemonics are not case sensitive Example MEASure can be also written as measureor Measure e The lower case section of the mnemoni
215. he current source When the limiter is activated level is entered for the source value in the result file when the storage operation is carried out Normal operation The GS610 measures current The voltage limiter value is entered for the source value in the result file when the storage operation is carried out IM 765501 01E 2 5 Triggers The following three triggers are available for starting a source measure cycle Internal trigger Int The internal constant period timer is used as triggers The cycle can be set in the range of 100 us to 3600 s External trigger Ext The rising edge of the voltage signal that is applied to the BNC input output terminal or pin 2 on the external input output connector on the rear panel is used as a trigger Immediate Imm The GS610 does not wait for a trigger When the current source measure cycle is complete the next source measure cycle starts immediately This trigger can be selected only when the measurement function is ON When the GS610 is waiting for a trigger when the source measure cycle is complete the wait indicator on the display shows WaitTrigger If a trigger is activated the TRIG key on the front panel blinks and WaitTrigger of the wait indicator is turned OFF until the source measure cycle is complete When using an external trigger manual trigger using the TRIG key on the front panel and triggers activated with communication commands TRG or Gro
216. he results of the source measure cycle in the store memory The contents of the store memory is output to the internal GS610RAM as a result file Result csv after the storage operation is complete The contents output to the result file are arrays of elapsed times from the store start point source values measured values and setting changes during the sweep operation When you press the STORE key the storage operation starts and the STORE key illuminates Then when the store count of source measure cycles is complete the storage operation automatically ends and the result file Result csv is created If you press the STORE key while the storage operation is in progress the storage operation is stopped and the contents stored up to that point is saved to the result file Result csv The store count can be set in the range of 1 to 65535 The auto storage function automatically starts the storage operation with the start of the sweep operation The store count in this case is automatically set to the sweep repeat count However if the sweep repeat count exceeds 65535 the store count is set to 65535 When you carry out a recall operation the statistical computation results of the measured values in the store memory can be retrieved The statistical computation parameters are the store count minimum value maximum value maximum value minimum value average value and standard deviation IM 765501 01E suoloun jo uoneuejdxy
217. hieve a 5 5 digit resolution The limiter control circuit in the limiter block controls the output across HI and LO so that it is equal to the specified limiter value when the output from the voltage sense amplifier or current sense amplifier exceeds the specified limiter value When generating voltage the output from the current sense amplifier is compared with the limiter value when generating current the output from the voltage sense amplifier is compared with the limiter value The measurement block measures the output from the voltage sense amplifier or current sense amplifier In addition if the auto zero function is enabled the internal zero reference is measured every measurement cycle measurement operation and the offset drift of the measurement pre amplifier and A D converter is cancelled while measurements proceed A feedback pulse width modulation an integration type is employed for the A D converter ADC The analog control section transfers data to the D A converter DAC controls various switches controls the width measurement of the pulse transferred from the A D converter and so on To achieve high speed sweep of 100 us steps a high speed photocoupler is employed for the transferring of data to the source DAC The display employs a 256 x 64 dot VFD to improve the visibility The GS610 comes with GP IB and RS 232 interfaces that provide compatibility with conventional systems as well as a USB port that is convenient fo
218. horoughly read Safety Precautions given on pages v and vi Do Not Remove the Case Do not remove the case from the instrument Some sections inside the instrument have high voltages that are extremely dangerous For internal inspection and adjustment contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Unplug If Abnormal Behavior Occurs If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord If these symptoms occur contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Correct the Problem If Output Is Forcibly Turned OFF If the GS610 detects an internal circuit error due to an excessive external input or oscillation in the GS610 the GS610 forcibly turns OFF the output and displays an error If this happens remove the cause of the problem such as the load connected externally and turn the output ON again If the output still turns OFF after correcting the problem the GS610 may have malfunctioned Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Note that the error display remains until you manually clear it see section 11 5 Error Log Display or read the error information via communications even if the GS610 recovers Turn the Power Switch OFF If Overheat Is Detected If the GS610 detects an overheat condition such as when the inlet or vent holes for the cooling fan are obstructed or the fan is stopped the GS610 forcibly turns the output OFF and displays a Temperature Abnormality warning If this
219. i Contents 16 4 4 Sample 2 Example of generating a trigger from the PC and reading the measured results s ida tiie ee i ae hil eee 16 55 16 4 5 Sample 3 Example of Updating the Source Level from a PC 0 005 16 57 16 4 6 Sample 4 Example of Updating the Source Level with the Sweep Function SEES a ale AD EE AT DELI Se AAA ak Oasis eh oa E 16 59 16 4 7 Sample 5 Example of Carrying Out the Storage Function and Reading the Statistical Vales ineens a e eaer e dite 16 62 16 5 ASCI Character Codes T e eaa aa a a ae sins AE ae E a taenia 16 63 Chapter 17 Troubleshooting and Maintenance T71 Troubleshooting iini senna ha e E ee ne eee 17 1 17 2 Error Code Description and Corrective Action e ceeceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaeeseeenaeetsees 17 3 17 3 Self Testiran enri Senate Ni A ATR ee eee ine eile 17 6 17 4 Checking the System Status c cece eeceeeseecseeeeneeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeesaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeaeessaee 17 8 17 5 Updating the System Firmware c ccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeceaeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeeseeeeeieeeeneenaes 17 9 17 6 Recommended Replacement Parts c eessceeeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeeseneeeeesaeeeeseeeseneeeeneaeeeees 17 11 Chapter 18 Specifications 182 Source Section c 2542 tek eat anette ae a aa aaah eas 18 1 18 2 Measurement Section ipsos aserid ea inean pe E A REN aSa a 18 3 18 3 PUNTOS a E e ra e a a a ating ea a a EEEE AAE 18 4 18 4 External Input Output Sectio
220. id string data Check that the string parameter is in the correct format 158 String data not allowed Check the command and parameter format 161 Invalid block data Check that the block data is in the correct format 168 Block data not allowed Check the command and parameter format 178 Expression data not allowed Check the command and parameter format IM 765501 01E 17 3 al vsueu zuien pue BunooysajqnoiL 17 2 Error Code Description and Corrective Action Errors in Execution 200 to 299 Error No Error Message Corrective Action Page 221 Setting conflict The following four setting conflicts are possible e Pulse source and block average e Pulse source and auto measurement range The source and measurement are set to the same function and using auto measurement range Limiter tracking OFF and auto measurement range Change the settings so that these conflicts do not occur 222 Data out of range Check the selectable range of the parameter If the command can use MINimum and MAXimum as its parameter the range can also be queried 256 Filename not found Check that the file exists 16 16 16 27 You can also use the CATalog command to query the list of 16 34 files 285 Program syntax error Check that the sweep pattern file is in the correct format 6 11 Device Errors 300 to 399 Error No Error Message Corrective Action Page 350 Q
221. idle state dotted line or the start bit of Circuit idle 1 character state the next data Data bit character solid line k 7 or 8 bits opt tt a a Stopt I I I I I I I I Parity bit Start bit Odd even or none 1or2 2 Handling of Break Signals When a break signal is transmitted from a PC the GS610 behaves in the same fashion as when a GP IB device clear is received suonedlunwwoJ ZEZ SHY eB IM 765501 01E 14 5 14 5 Setting the RS 232 Interface Procedure To exit the menu during operation press O C Cc O C ESC at the upper left of the operation DISPLAY panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store E Mma ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric COMPARE VALUE a OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and power Cus Cm Ce emr me rightarrow key For details on the no al KEY LOCK MODE operation using the rotary knob numeric C SHIFT keys amp D and CB see sections 3 8 or _ 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the Remote I F soft key to display the Remote I F menu Remote Error Wire cs I F Setup Log 4w 2W Setting Susten 3 Press the RS232 soft key to display the
222. igger Commands that are valid on an instrument that is designated as a talker TCT Take Control e Universal commands These commands are valid on all instruments regardless of the listener and talker designations The following five types are available LLO Local Lockout DCL Device Clear PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure SPE Serial Poll Enable and SPD Serial Poll Disable Other Interface Messages Listener address talker address and secondary commands are also considered interface messages The Differences between SDC and DCL In multi line messages SDC messages are those that require talker or listener designation and DCL messages are those that do not require the designation Therefore SDC messages are directed at a particular instrument while DCL messages are directed at all instruments on the bus Responses to Interface Messages Responses to a Uni Line Message e IFC Clears the talker and listener functions Stops output if data are being output e REN Switches between the remote and local modes IDY Not supported Responses to a Multi Line Message Address Command e GTL Switches to the local mode e SDC e Clears the program message command being received and the output queue see section 16 3 5 e The COMMunicate WAIT command is immediately terminated e GET Same operation as the TRG command e PPC and TCT Not supported Responses to a Multi Line Message Universal Command e LLO Disables L
223. ing commands from a VISA Virtual Instrument Software Architecture library A VISA library must be installed in your PC in advance to perform command control by way of USB TMC USB Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to USB Rev 2 0 Connector Type B connector receptacle Number of ports 1 Power supply Self powered Connecting to the Network Connection Cable Use a USB cable for the type B connector receptacle For the connection procedure see section 2 9 USB Storage Function IM 765501 01E 15 1 99ej49 U ASN a 15 2 Selecting the USB Interface Function Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store E Mma 7 2 ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation AL M mi ITO of selecting or setting items or entering e values using the rotary knob numeric a OUTPUT CONTROL keys lt and keys BS key and POWER msc mme sweep staat TRIG_ right arrow key For details on the no ol KROS WE operation using the rotary knob numeric O SHIFT o keys and CB see sections 3 8 or 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the Remote I F soft k
224. ion The selectable range is 100 us to 3600 000000 s Repeat period Repeat period Repeat period Period Time Period Time Period Time lt Trigger Int ne S Source measure Loot o T cycle Manual Trigger A trigger is activated when you press the TRIG key regardless of the selected trigger mode lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt TRIGger SOURCe TRIGger TIMer TRG IM 765501 01E 4 2 Connection Type Remote Sense and Local Sense Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O C Cc O ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE e In the procedural explanation below the STORE AUTO via ro C Oss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU a us MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation RANGE s 2 Auto N of selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL E TALE Parat values using the rotary knob numeric OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and POWER msc time sweep staat mie right arrow key For details on the no ol nee KEYLOCK wE operation using the rotary knob numeric O SHIT keys and CS see sections 3 8 or _ 3 9 Selecting the Connection Type Remote Sense or Local Sense 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press
225. ion Minimum Limit Value 0 10 uA to 20 00 uA 20 uA 10 nA 100 nA 20 1 uA to 200 0 uA 200 uA 100 nA 1pA 0 201 mA to 2 000 mA 2mA 1 uA 10 uA 2 01 mA to 20 00 mA 20 mA 10 uA 100 uA 20 1 mA to 200 0 mA 200 mA 100 uA 1mA 0 201 A to 3 200 A 3A 1mA 10 mA 1 When tracking is OFF Hi or Lo whichever is greater 2 Minimum value when tracking is OFF Voltage ILimiter Valuel Range Setting Resolution Minimum Limit Value 1 0 mV to 200 0 mV 200 mV 100 uV 1mvV 0 201 V to 2 000 V 2V 1 mV 10 mV 2 01 V to 20 00 V 20 V 10 mV 100 mV 20 1 V to 110 0 V 110 V 100 mV 1V 3 When tracking is OFF Hi or Lo whichever is greater 4 Minimum value when tracking is OFF Display When the Limiter Is Activated When the high limiter is activated High limiter activation display H When the low limiter is activated Low limiter activation display L Note e If the limit values are set outside the source range of the selected range setting the limiter is activated at the boundary of the source range e If the limiter range is changed the limiter level is transiently reduced to 10 of the range setting and moves sequentially to the adjacent ranges lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SOURce VOLTage PROTection STATe SOURce VOLTage PROTection LINKage SOURce VOLTage PROTection ULIMit SOURce VOLTage PROTection LLIMit SOURce CURRent PROTection STATe SOURce CURRent PROTection LINKage
226. ions trigonometric functions and so forth can be performed on variables such as source values and measured values as well as constants For example if an equation m I V is applied the GS610 calculates and displays the power The equation can be selected from the definition files in the MATH directory on the internal GS610 ROM disk see section 2 9 USB Storage Function For the definitions files you can use built in computation files that are available when the GS610 is shipped from the factory or when the disk is formatted see section 4 3 USB Storage Function and user defined computation files that you create such as on a PC If the definition file contains an equation with variables A B and C the values for A B and C can be entered from the GS610 panel soft keys Computation using equations can be used not only to perform computation using measured values but also to create the next source value from the calculation IM 765501 01E 2 17 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 7 Computation The following five equations are available as built in computation e Decibel dB txt m A log m B Computes the decibel of the measured value with respect to B e Percent Percent txt m m A 100 Computes the percentage of the measured value with respect to A e Scaling Scaling txt m A M B Scales the measured value e Power Power ixt m V l Calculates the power from the source value and measured value However
227. is i v D TRIG Generates a manual trigger section 4 1 MODE S TrigMode 3 SHIFT TRIG Int Ext Imm Selects the trigger mode internal external or immediate section 4 1 p MODE s e Selects the sweep mode 2 Mode SweepMode SWEEP e Off Linear Log Program Off linear log or program a sections 6 1 and 6 2 3 Last 7 Pid g L e Rtn Keep Switches the sweep termination mode return on keep section 6 3 5 Repe at Sets the sweep repeat count section 6 4 Start Sets the sweep start value section 6 1 Value Stop z vValue Sets the sweep stop value section 6 1 a i p Sets the sweep step value displayed only when linear sweep is selected section 6 1 ite Sets the sweep step count displayed only when log sweep is selected section 6 1 L_ st Selects the pattern file displayed only when program sweep is selected section 6 2 START Starts the sweep operation section 6 5 Turns ON OFF the output mode section 5 7 Turns ON OFF the zero state section 5 8 IM 765501 01E 1 4 Key Groups and Menus MISC Group TIME jj Spel aY Sets the source delay section 5 6 KEY LOCK M Delay Sets the measure delay section 7 4 kkk Period Sets the repeat period of the internal trigger section 4 1 L PeVicih Sets the pul
228. ise GS610 PC Sample rate 10 kS s Transfer the CSV file a Olgas Drag amp drop 66666066 omom Sa DUT A Car navigation system Real waveform data in vehicle parts etc CSV file App 12 IM 765501 01E Appendix 2 Application Examples Procedure 1 Measure the signal you wish to generate by simulation from the GS610 the fluctuation signal of an automotive power supply in this example using an instrument such as YOKOGAWA s Digital ScopeCoder DL750P 2 Save the measured data in CSV format to a storage medium floppy disk or memory card 3 Load the file you saved in step 2 to your PC 4 Use a general purpose spreadsheet application to edit the measured data as necessary 5 Copy the measured data that was loaded in your PC to the internal memory of the GS610 GS610ROM via the USB 6 Generate the output pattern that was copied to the GS610ROM from the GS610 The fastest output is 100 kS s e Example in which the real waveform of supply voltage fluctuation is set directly from the ScopeCoder oscilloscope and reproduced Capture the superimposed battery noise Sample rate 10 kS s ScopeCoder 7 Car navigation system in vehicle parts etc 1 Connect the GS610 and the DL750P via the USB 2 Measure the signal you wish to generate
229. it for the temperature inside the case to become normal and turn the output ON 203 Sweep running Stop the sweep operation before changing the settings 300 Hardware input abnormal error Check the input 301 Low battery Request to have the battery replaced because the time stamp 17 11 when creating files will not be correct Messages Messages That Are Not Entered in the Error Queue but Displayed in the Error Log Error Message Corrective Action Page Log sweep zero cross Set the start and stop values with values with the same sign 6 2 Log sweep start level illegal Set the start value to a value other than 0 6 2 Log sweep stop level illegal Set the stop value to a value other than 0 6 2 Outside of number of trigger count Increase the step value so that the number of points is less than 6 3 or equal to 65535 Cannot execute measure auto Correct the setting conflict see 221 Setting conflict ranging Cannot average with block mode Correct the setting conflict see 221 Setting conflict Illegal compare level Set the comparison operation settings so that the upper limit is 8 7 greater than the lower limit Program sweep cannot be Select a sweep pattern file 6 5 executed Calculation cannot be executed Select a MATH definition file 8 4 Illegal CAL data It is possible that the specifications may not be met even when the GS610 is calibrated with the default calibration values Re
230. it of the service request enable register is 1 or 0 use SRE For details on the SRE command see section 16 2 13 IM 765501 01E 16 43 SpueWWOD uonesiunwwog a 16 3 Status Reports Operation of the Status Byte A service request is issued when bit 6 of the status byte becomes 1 Bit 6 is set to 1 when any of the other bits becomes a 1 when the corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1 For example if an event takes place and the logical OR of each bit of the standard event register and the corresponding bit in the enable register is 1 bit 5 ESB will be set to 1 In this case if bit 5 of the service request enable register is 1 bit 6 MSS will be set to 1 thus requesting service from the controller It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred by reading the contents of the status byte Reading from the Status Byte The following two methods are provided for reading the status byte Inquiry Using the STB Query Making an inquiry using the STB query sets bit 6 to MSS This causes the MSS to be read After completion of the read out none of the bits in the status byte will be cleared Serial Polling Execution of a serial polling changes bit 6 to RQS This causes RQS to be read After completion of the read out only RQS is cleared It is not possible to read MSS using serial polling Clearing the Status Byte No method is provided for forcibly clearing all
231. iter Value 4 Press LIMIT to display the limiter value setup screen 5 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the limiter value If tracking is turned ON in step 3 the high and low limiter values can be set simultaneously ee 200 mA If tracking is turned OFF in step 3 the high and low limiter values can be set separately LSR 200 mA Ean 6 If you set the limiter value using the numeric keys press the desired unit or the Enter soft key High Limit 100 pA mA A Enter 5 4 IM 765501 01E 5 3 Setting the Limiter Explanation Turning the Limiter ON OFF ON Apply the limit with the specified limiter values OFF The limiter is activated at the maximum value of the source range see section 2 2 However the limiter value is not displayed Tracking ON _ Set the limiter values with the same absolute value but with opposite signs Example Hi limiter value 1 000 mA Lo limiter value 1 000 mA OFF Set the limiter values to arbitrary values with opposite signs Example Hi limiter value 1 500 mA 5 Lo limiter value 1 000 mA Setting the Limiter Value The current limiter is selected when generating voltage and the voltage limiter is automatically selected when generating current The optimal range for the specified limiter values is automatically selected e Limiter Range no s Current ILimiter Valuel Range Setting Resolut
232. ize the equipment so that data is not transmitted in excess of the receive buffer on the receiving end overrun This procedure is called handshaking The GS610 can use any of the three methods below Match the setting with your PC If the entire command sequence fits in the receive buffer 64 K on the GS610 or when a query command is included in the middle of the command sequence overrun does not occur Select this method when transmitting data in this fashion Hardware Handshaking CTS RTS This handshaking method stops the transmission by setting CTS to false before the receive buffer becomes full and resumes the transmission by setting CTS to true when there is enough free space in the receive buffer Software Handshaking XON XOFF This handshaking method stops the transmission by sending an XOFF code 0X13 before the receive buffer becomes full and resumes transmission by sending an XON code 0X11 when there is enough free space in the receive buffer Handshaking is possible by wiring only the data line but binary data that includes XON 0X11 or XOFF 0X13 cannot be transmitted 14 4 IM 765501 01E 14 4 Combination of Data Formats The RS 232 interface on the GS610 performs communications using start stop synchronization In start stop synchronization characters are transmitted one at a time Each character consists of a start bit data bits a parity bit and a stop bit see the following figure Return to the
233. l to input or output from pins 5 to 8 of the external input output connector BNC In BNC Out DIO 5 DIO 6 DIO 7 DIO Ctrl Ctrl Output Origin Origin Intlock Proceed to one of the steps from 13 to 16 depending on the selected pin number Press the DIO 5pin soft key to set the trigger input signal of the external input output connector to Output or Zero DIO Spin Output Zero Press the DIO 6pin soft key to set the trigger output signal of the external input output connector to Origin SrcChg MeasBgn MeasEnd or PulsEnd DIO 6pin TrigQut gt Origin SrcChg MeasBgn MeasEnd PulsEnd Press the DIO 7pin soft key to set the sweep synchronization output signal of the external input output connector to Origin TurnEnd or AllEnd DIO pin SweepOut gt Origin TurnEnd AllEnd Press the DIO 8pin soft key to set the control output signal of the external input output connector to Intlock Output or Zero DIO Spin Controldut gt Intlock Output Zero 10 2 IM 765501 01E 10 1 Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and the External Input Output Connector Explanation Signal Name The GS610 can input or output various signals through the BNC input output terminal TRIG SWEEP CTRL IN OUT and the external input output connector EXT I O on the rear panel Such signals include trigger input output signals that determine the timing of the source and measurement ON OFF control signals of ou
234. lients to connect The terminator CR LF or CR LF can be specified FTP server function An anonymous FTP server at port 21 that allows up to five clients to connect HTTP server function A function that enables various information to be displayed and performs remote control of the GS610 through port 80 using a Web browser Each server function is independent Therefore for example the GS610 can be controlled using commands while transferring files using FTP Saving Loading Setup Data The current settings can be saved to a setup file Setup1 txt to Setup4 txt on the non volatile disk GS610ROM The saved setup data can be loaded to restore the settings The setup data can also be saved to the volatile disk GS610RAM This feature can be used to pass the setup file Setup txt to a PC The setup file is a text file containing communication commands The file can be edited later on a PC 2 22 IM 765501 01E 2 10 Other Functions Setting at Power ON The GS610 settings at power on can be changed from the default settings to the settings selected by the user If one of the saved setup files is selected as the settings at power on the GS610 starts up using the specified settings from the next time the GS610 is powered ON If the selected file is deleted or renamed the GS610 starts up with default settings Error Log Display The GS610 stores up to 127 runtime errors and command errors in the error memory If one or mor
235. lt Voltage gt SOUR VOLT ZERO OFFS 0 3 SOUR VOLT ZERO OFFS SOURce CURRent RANGe Function Syntax Example Description Sets the current source range setting 20 uA 200 uA 2 mA 20 mA 200 mA 0 5 A 1A 2A or 3 A or queries the current setting SOURce CURRent RANGe lt Current gt UP DOWN lt Current gt Sets the smallest range setting that includes the specified value MINimum Sets the range setting to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the range setting to the maximum value UP Increases the range setting by 1 DOWN Decreases the range setting by 1 SOURce CURRent RANGe MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Current gt SOUR CURR RANG 200E 6 SOUR CURR RANG MAX SOUR CURR RANG SOUR CURR RANG MAX If the range setting is changed when auto range is ON by the SOURce CURRent RANGe AUTO ON command auto range is automatically disabled MAXimum MINimum IM 765501 01E 16 19 SpueWWOD uonesiunwwog g 16 2 Commands SOURce CURRent RANGe AUTO Function Sets the source auto range ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce CURRent RANGe AUTO 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns auto range ON 0 or OFF Turns auto range OFF SOURCe CURRent RANGe AUTO 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example SOUR CURR RANG AUTO O
236. ly the changes to the GS610 panel Click to apply the changes automatically to the GS610 panel Set the update interval The GS610 can be controlled in the same fashion as using the actual keys on the GS610 Point the cursor to the desired key and click The operation on the remote panel is immediately applied to the GS610 To apply the operations on the GS610 to the remote panel click Update Panel in the Web server window Click Start Auto Update to automatically apply the operations on the GS610 to the remote panel at the interval specified in the Interval box IM 765501 01E 12 9 uondo 2e yu z u1 473 Ss 12 5 Web Server Function Command Conirol Function Click the words Command Control in the Web server window to display the command control screen Z GS610 Web Servi crosoft Internet Explorer 5 x File Edit View Favorit Tools Help HBak gt OA A Qsearch Favorites EPmedia G D 4 B H Address http 10 0 158 567 Home Remote Panel Command Control Status FTP GS610 SOURCE MEASURE UNIT l Command Control Request Command Reply Message Read Only Command transmission area Send the command Response display area You can send communication commands from the command control window that is displayed in the remote panel to set or query the GS610 Enter the communication command in the command transmission area and click submit The response to the
237. m MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value gt lt Current gt Example SOUR CURR SWE STOP 1 25 SOUR CURR SWE STOP MAX SOUR CURR SWE STOP SOUR CURR SWE STOP MAX SOURce CURRent SWEep STEP Function Sets the step value of the current sweep linear sweep or queries the current setting Syntax SOURCe CURRent SWEep STEP lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum lt current gt Sets the step value to the specified value MINimum Sets the step value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the step value to the maximum value SOURCe CURRent SWEep STEP MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Current gt Example SOUR CURR SWE STEP 1 25 SOUR CURR SWE STEP MIN SOUR CURR SWE STEP SOUR CURR SWE STEP MIN Description This setting is used when the sweep mode is set to linear SOURce VOLTage SWEep SPACing LINear SOURCe CURRent SWEep POINts Function Sets the step count of the current sweep log sweep or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce CURRent SWEep POINts lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum lt Integer gt Sets the step count to the specified value MINimum Sets the step count to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the step count to the maximum value SOURce CURRent SWEep POINts M
238. m value MAXimum Sets the limiter value to the maximum value SOURce VOLTage PROTection ULIMit MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Voltage gt SOUR VOLT PROT ULIM 75 0 SOUR VOLT PROT ULIM MAX SOUR VOLT PROT ULIM SOUR VOLT PROT ULIM MAX Note that the voltage limiter is activated when the source function is set to current SOURce FUNCtion CURRent IM 765501 01E 16 17 spuewwos UoHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands SOURce VOLTage PROTection LLIMit Function Syntax Example Description Sets the lower voltage limiter value for generating current or queries the current setting SOURCe VOLTage PROTection LLIMit lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum lt Voltage gt Sets the limiter value to the specified value MINimum Sets the limiter value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the limiter value to the maximum value SOURcCe VOLTage PROTection LLIMit MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Voltage gt SOUR VOLT PROT LLIM 25 0 SOUR VOLT PROT LLIM MIN SOUR VOLT PROT LLIM SOUR VOLT PROT LLIM MIN Note that the voltage limiter is activated when the source function is set to current SOURce FUNCtion CURRent SOURce VOLTage SWEep SPACing
239. macro definitions Macro functions are not supported 16 Reply to the IDN query See section 16 2 13 Common Commands 17 Size of storage area for protected user data for PUD and PUD PUD and PUD are not supported IM 765501 01E 13 1 SUOI BDIUNWIWOD Gi d5 13 1 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard 18 The length of the RDT and RDT resource names RDT and RDT are not supported 19 The change in the status due to RST LRN RCL and SAV RST RCL and SAV See section 16 2 13 Common Commands LRN This common command is not supported 20 The extent of the self test using the TST command Nothing is executed and 1 is always returned 21 The structure of the extended return status See section 16 3 22 Whether each command is processed in an overlap fashion or sequentially All commands are sequential commands 23 The description of the execution of each command See the functional and procedural explanations in chapters 1 to 15 and 17 13 2 IM 765501 01E 13 2 GP IB Interface Functions and Specifications GP IB Interface Functions Listener Capability All of the information that you can set with the panel keys can be set through the GP IB interface except for turning ON OFF the power and setting the communication parameters e Receives commands from a controller requesting the output of setup data measured data and other information e Also receives st
240. meters and the limitations on the procedures It may not give a detailed explanation of the function For a detailed explanation of the function see chapter 2 lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt Indicates a communication command that corresponds to the function described on the procedural explanation page Displayed Characters and Terminology Used in the Procedural Explanations Panel Keys and Rotary Knob Bold characters used in the procedural explanations indicate characters that are marked on the panel key or the rotary knob SHIFT Key SHIFT key means you will press the SHIFT key to turn ON the SHIFT key followed by the operation key In this state the items marked in purple characters below the keys are controlled viii IM 765501 01E Contents Checking the Contents of the Package ceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeteseeeeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeaeesaeeeaeessaeeeieeeeeeeeaes ii Safety Precautions ssc ccvcasecectestcselchaved cdedebenushevdibadautscgenecealeatastneauns aa a aa aa aaia Eaa cana ANESSE v Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment cceeesceeeeseeeteneeeeeeneeeeseneeeesaeeeteeeeeeeaeeesseeeeeneeeeee vii Conventions Used in This Manual ccccesceseeeeeneeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeecaeeeaeeseeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees viii Chapter 1 Part Names and Functions Chapter 2 Chapter 3 1 1 Front Panel cisrenan eor n g Ea ora E eesi 1 1 1 2 Rear Panel neninn E EL ne 1 2 1 3 Names and Description of
241. mmSend dev SOUR VOLT RANG 12 Source range setting 12 V Call CommSend dev SOUR CURR PROT STAT OFF Limiter OFF 9 Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT LEV 0V Source level 0 V 3 3 c Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT PBAS 10 0V Pulse base 10 V J Call CommSend dev SOUR PULS WIDT 500us Pulse width 500 us S gt Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT SWE SPAC LIN Linear sweep 5 Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT SWE STAR 0 Start OV 9 Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT SWE STOP 10 Stop 10V 3 Call CommSend dev SOUR VOLT SWE STEP 0 1 Step 0 1 V 3 Call CommSend dev SWE COUN 1 Sweep count 1 a Call CommSend dev SWE LAST RET Level after the sweep operation o Initial level IM 765501 01E 16 59 16 4 Sample Programs Call CommSend dev SENS STAT OFF Measurement OFF Call CommSend dev TRIG SOUR TIM Trigger source Internal timer Call CommSend dev TRIG TIM 10ms Internal timer period 10 ms Call CommSend dev SOUR DEL MIN Source delay Minimum Call CommSend dev OUTP STAT ON Output ON End Function Wait for the completion of the sweep computation Wait until bit 5 RDY of the source status is set to 1 Function WaitSweepCalculate dev As Integer While CommSourceStatus dev And amp H20 0 Sleep 10 Wend End Function Wait for the completion of the sweep op
242. mmunication environment display Command control function Remote panel function File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt O A A Reach Favorites meda 3 D GB S Address http 10 0 158 56 GS610 SOURCE MEASURE UNIT GS610 Web Service Microsoft Internet Explorer z ioj x Welcome to GS610 Web Service 2005 Yokogawa Electric Corporation Link to the top page of the YOKOGAWA website Link to the GS610 page of the YOKOGAWA website 12 8 IM 765501 01E 12 5 Web Server Function Using the Web Server Function Remote Panel Function Click the words Remote Panel in the Web server window to display an image of the GS610 front panel 4M GS610 Web Ser osoft Internet Explorer File Edt Vi Help Heak gt Q A A Asearch GgFavoites media A B 4G A Address http 10 0 158 56 GS610 SOURCE MEASURE UNIT Remote Panel 10m 0067MA wee S 0 00008 V OH eeeeee 00 store Avge vza wove ur vszis MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE RECALL MATH NULL max g COMPARE VALUE eee Local OUTPUT CONTROL power ise TIME sweep staat tars 10 al FEVLOGK HOE SHIFT aero Coureur SENSE OUTPUT ALL TERMINALS 250VMAXTO L Update Panel Interval 1 3600 5 Sysec Start Auto Update Click to app
243. mum Queries the step value of the current sweep linear sweep 16 22 POINts lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the step count of the current sweep log sweep 16 22 POINts MINimum MAXimum Queries the step count of the current sweep log sweep 16 22 ZERO IMPedance HIGH LOW Sets the zero source impedance high or low for generating current 16 22 IMPedance Queries the zero source impedance high or low for generating current 16 22 OFFset lt Current gt Sets the zero source offset value for generating current 16 22 OFFset Queries the zero source offset value for generating current 16 22 Sweep Commands SWEep Group SWEep TRIGger Starts the sweep operation 16 23 COUNt lt Integer gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum Sets the sweep repeat count 16 23 COUNt MINimum MAXimum Queries the sweep repeat count 16 23 LAST KEEP RETurn Sets the sweep termination mode keep level or return to initial level 16 23 LAST Queries the sweep termination mode keep level or return to initial level 16 23 Measurement Commands SENSe Group SENSe STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the measurement state ON or OFF 16 24 STATe Queries the measurement state ON or OFF 16 24 FUNCtion VOLTage CURRent RESistance Sets the measurement function voltage current or resistance 16 24 FUNCtion Queries the measurement function voltage current or resistance 16 24 RANGe AUTO 1 0 ON OFF Sets the measurement auto range ON or OFF 16 24 AU
244. mum Queries the stop value of the voltage sweep 16 18 STEP lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the step value of the voltage sweep linear sweep 16 19 STEP MINimum MAXimum Queries the step value of the voltage sweep linear sweep 16 19 POINts lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the step count of the voltage sweep log sweep 16 19 POINts MINimum MAXimum Queries the step count of the voltage sweep log sweep 16 19 ZERO IMPedance HIGH LOW Sets the zero source impedance high or low for generating voltage 16 19 IMPedance Queries the zero source impedance high or low for generating voltage 16 19 OFFset lt Voltage gt Sets the zero source offset value for generating voltage 16 19 OFFset Queries the zero source offset value for generating voltage CURRent RANGe lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN Sets the current source range setting 2 uA 200 uA 2 mA 20 mA 200 mA 0 5 A 1 A 2 A or 3 A 16 19 RANGe MINimum MAXimum Queries the current source range setting 2 uA 200 uA 2 mA 20 mA 200 mA 0 5 A 1 A 2 A or 3 A 16 19 AUTO 1 0 ON OFF Sets the source auto range ON or OFF 16 19 AUTO Queries the source auto range ON or OFF 16 20 LEVel lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the current source level value 16 20 LEVel MINimum MAXimum Queries the current source level value 16 20 PBASe lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the pulse base value for generating current pulse 16 20 PBASe M
245. n TRIG SWEEP CTRL IN and OUT s 18 5 18 5 Imera ce morrena tae ore eagra ai ae o had aise eet bins eae eee 18 5 18 6 General Specifications sc nisnin rioa i a aa eariad 18 6 18 7 External DimenSions randier n eee a TE A 18 9 Appendix Appendix 1 Computation Definition Specifications 0 ec eeceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeenneteas App 1 Appendix 2 Application Examples cccceesseeeeseeeeeeneeeeenneeeseneeeeeeeeseeneeeseaeeeeesaeesesaeeeneneeees App 6 Appendix 3 Contents of the Factory Default Setup File Default txt eee eeeeeeeeereeeeee App 18 Index xii IM 765501 01E Chapter 1 Part Names and Functions 1 1 Front Panel Remote indicator Illuminates when the GS610 is in remote mode controlled via communications See sections 13 2 and 14 1 KEY LOCK indicator llluminates when key lock is ON See section 11 7 Remote sense indicator llluminates when remote sense four terminal connection See section 4 2 Average indicator Illuminates when averaging is ON See section 8 1 Display See section 1 3 Soft keys Used to select items on the soft key menu that appears when setting up the GS610 See section 3 8 KOGAWA 8818 vessune unr om CII E Rotary knob numeric keys and curs
246. n or queries the current setting Syntax CALCulate LIMit UPPer lt Value gt MINimum MAXimum lt Value gt Sets the upper limit to the specified value MINimum Sets the upper limit to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the upper limit to the maximum value CALCulate LIMit UPPer MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value gt lt Value gt Example CALC LIM UPP 12 5 CALC LIM UPP MAX TRIG LIM UPP TRIG LIM UPP MAX CALCulate LIMit LOWer Function Sets the lower limit of the comparison operation or queries the current setting Syntax CALCulate LIMit LOWer lt Value gt MINimum MAXimum lt Value gt Sets the lower limit to the specified value MINimum Sets the lower limit to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the lower limit to the maximum value CALCulate LIMit LOWer MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Value gt Example CALC LIM LOW 8 5 CALC LIM LOW MIN TRIG LIM LOW TRIG LIM LOW MIN 16 28 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands 16 2 8 Store Recall Commands TRACe Group TRACe STATe Function Sets the storage state ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax TRACe STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns storage state ON 0 or OFF Turns storage state OFF TRACe STATe
247. ndshaking capability Acceptor handshaking AH1 Full acceptor handshaking capability Talker T6 Basic talker capability serial polling untalk on MLA My Listen Address and no talk only capability Listener L4 Basic listener capability unlisten on MTA My Talk Address and no listen only capability Service request SR1 Full service request capability Full remote local capability No parallel polling capability Full device clear capability Full device trigger capability No controller capability Remote local RL1 Parallel polling PPO Device clear DC1 Device trigger DT1 Controller co Electrical characteristics E1 Open collector IM 765501 01E 13 3 SUOI BDIUNWIWOD gGi d5 13 3 Connecting the GP IB Cable GP IB cable The GP IB connector used on this instrument is a 24 pin connector that conforms to the IEEE St d 488 1978 Use a GP IB cable that conforms to this standard Connection Procedure Connect the cable as shown below GP IB cable GP IB connector Precautions to Be Taken When Making Connections Firmly tighten the screws on the GP IB cable connector Multiple devices can be connected to a single GP IB system However no more than 15 devices including the controller can be connected to a single system When connecting multiple devices each device must have its own unique address Use a cable of length 2 m or less for
248. nforms to EIA 574 Comparison result output EIA 574 is an EIA 232 RS 232 standard Comparison end output for the 9 pin interface suoloun jo uoneuejdxy IM 765501 01E 2 1 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Block Diagram CPU VFD gt KEY h EXT I O Analog control RS 232 GP IB gine USB gt f ETHER N option ZO J source vae P AMC pur V aaa Vo yo Limiter DAC Current sense Limiter amplifier lt control circuit 6a Voltage sense amplifier Jez ADC p DUT Device Under Test Voltage Vo that appears across output terminals HI and LO is converted to normalized voltage by a differential amplifier voltage sense amplifier that has different gains for different voltage ranges In addition current lo that flows through output terminals HI and LO is converted to normalized voltage by different shunt resistors and differential amplifiers current sense amplifiers for different current ranges The analog section consists of the source block limiter block and measurement block The source block controls the voltage sense amplifier or the current sense amplifier so that its output is equal to the source DAC output and delivers the specified source value across HI and LO Two D A converters are used in the source DAC to ac
249. ng Count 5 ee a ee ee IM 765501 01E 8 1 uoljeyndwog 8 1 Averaging Explanation Averaging Mode The following averaging modes are available Block Block Average Trigger ko 60 UC t S S S s sS Source Source Source Source measure cycle measure cycle _ measure cycle T measure cycle E nth time Output Moving Moving Average Trigger Int or Ext Source measure Source measure Source measure cycle J cycle cycle i Output Output Output Note The block average only works in DC source mode In pulse source mode an error occurs Setting the Average Count Set the value in the range from 1 to 256 lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SENSe AVERage STATe SENSe AVERage MODE SENSe AVERage COUNt 8 2 IM 765501 01E 8 2 NULL Computation Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the store Ca me Dra 7 2 ro aw J ss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation S of selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL values using the rotary knob numeric iai OUTPUT CONTROL keys amp and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome sweep omr Taic right
250. ng However switching the range setting takes time and the source level may be discontinuous if the range setting switches as a result of changing the source level lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SOURce VOLTage RANGe SOURce VOLTage RANGe AUTO SOURce CURRent RANGe SOURce CURRent RANGe AUTO IM 765501 01E 5 3 5 3 Setting the Limiter Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press O O C Cc Cc C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the Dra LMT phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE and gt are used to refer to the operation pu AUTO of selecting or setting items or entering COMPARE TALE values using the rotary knob numeric DISPLAY ioci OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER msc mE sweep Tant TRIG_ right arrow key For details on the ne al bali MODE operation using the rotary knob numeric O SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or m 3 9 Turning the Limiter ON OFF 1 Press SHIFT LIMIT MENU to display the limiter setup menu 2 Press the Limit soft key to turn the limiter ON or OFF Limit Tracking On Off On Off Turning the Tracking ON OFF 3 Press the Tracking soft key to turn the tracking function ON or OFF Limit Tracking On OFF On OFF Setting the Lim
251. ng the BNC input output terminal or external input output connector For the pin assignments see Signal Name and Function in the previous section Master Slave Sweep Sync Out Okr Origin eld a z tart In pap Soe m om Trig Out ll EF mow i Origin on o s Trig In g UT Trigger setting Int Trigger setting Ext Synchronizing the Output Control e Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and External Input Output Connector Master Set BNC Out to Ctrl and set Type to the appropriate setting for your application IntLock Output or Zero If DIO8 is used set it in a similar fashion Slave Set BNC In to Ctrl and set Type to the appropriate setting for your application IntLock Output or Zero If DIO5 is used set it in a similar fashion For the setup procedure see Setting the BNC Input Terminal Setting the BNC Output Terminal or Setting the External Input Output Connector in the previous section Connecting the Instruments Connect Ctrl Out of the master unit to Ctrl In of the slave unit using the BNC input output terminal or external input output connector For the pin assignments see Signal Name and Function in the previous section Ctrl Out IntLock Output Zero Ctrl In linterlock Output Zero Trigger setting Int Trigger setting Ext 10 8
252. nment free of noise 7 5 Exercise caution especially when handling minute voltage or current The measured value stabilizes when the integration time is increased The GS610 is oscillating Check whether the load is within the allowable 3 5 range Use twisted pair wires for wiring The connection is inappropriate In the case of a four terminal connection check 3 5 that the connection is correct Note that in the case of a two terminal connection the GS610 receives effects from the lead wire resistance or contact resistance when the output current is large IM 765501 01E 17 1 Ey eoueusjUleWy pue BunooysajqnoiL 17 1 Troubleshooting Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action Reference Section Unable to save data to No free space on the disk Delete unneeded files or format the disk 4 3 the disk Unable to set the GS610 Communication settings are not Match the communication settings with the PC Chapters via the communication matched 12to 15 interface 17 2 IM 765501 01E 17 2 Error Code Description and Corrective Action The following two types of messages can appear in the center of the screen Error messages Displayed when an inappropriate operation is carried out Confirmation messages Confirmation messages are not entered in the error queue but displayed in the error log Syntax Errors 100 to 199 Error
253. nneeseernrneeeene 2 5 2 6 LOW ahia diesen Naa a a 8 7 LOZ a a a TET een Tree Cerra 2 9 M M Delay nnna ann nann n N A aas MAC address siden i manual trigger sssessssssssirssesrrrsserrusteetrusteetrurensrunseasrnnrnarrnereae MATH eao ara e Nd Math MATH Koy sic ceecavestcantcvneoncinendctcordendarteiveresbecetendeeesteas Measure a nea EN nahin eis measure EVENT register ce ceesesseceseeeseeeseeseseeneaeeeneees MEASURE QJroul eeeeseeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeneeeeeeees measured results storing of measured value readout 0 0 2 ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees measurement COMMANA 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees measurement delay c eee ceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneee Measurement FUNCTION 0 eee cece eeeeeeeneeteaeeneees Measurement range 00 eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeereeaeeneeeaeeereeateaes measurement turning ON OFF Of c ccesseeeteeeeeeeteeeeees 7 1 MANUS An aeaea aa a aade as eaa ares 1 5 MISC Group iiine iiien 1 8 MISC key 3 9 3 10 4 3 4 7 10 1 11 1 11 3 11 6 11 7 12 3 13 5 14 6 15 2 17 6 17 8 17 9 N Page Network CONNECTION tO cccccccceeesessteeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeesstaees 12 2 NO wich niin ind aici hina iat ii Index 2 IM 765501 01E non Volatile disk riisiin reiini arasin eienen Eae 2 20 Repeat darain ireren t assein iaie E aa indiaan EA AASE 6 9 non volatile disk GS610ROM saving to esees
254. nt gt A lt Numeric value gt to which a current unit V can be attached 75 1E 2A lt Time gt A lt Numeric value gt to which a time unit S can be attached 360S lt Binary Octal Hexadecimal Number gt A binary number following B an octal number following Q or an hexadecimal number following H B1101 0706 H9F3C lt String gt A character string enclosed in double quotations or single quotations Hello lt Multiplier gt The table below lists the lt multipliers gt that can be added after a lt value gt In lt Floating point number gt the sign after E can be omitted Symbol Word Multiplier EX Exa o PE Peta 015 T Tera 01 G Giga 0 MA Mega 0 K Kilo 0 M Milli 0 U Micro 076 N Nano 0 P Pico ot F Femto 107 A Ato ons IM 765501 01E 16 5 spuewwog UOHeoIUNWWOD 16 2 Commands 16 2 1 A List of Commands Command Function Page Output Commands OUTPut Group OUTPut STATe 1 0 ON OFF ZERO Sets the output state ON OFF or ZERO 16 14 STATe Queries the output state ON OFF or ZERO 16 14 PROGram 1 0 ON OFF PULSe Sets the programmable output state ON or OFF and executes pulse generation 16 14 PROGram Queries the programmable output state ON or OFF 16 14 Source Commands SOURce Group SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage CURRent Sets the source function voltage or current 16
255. nteger ret ilrd dev msg Len msg If ret And TIMO Then CommClear dev CommRecv 1 Else If ret And EERR Then CommRecv 1 Else CommRecv ibcntl End If End If End Function 16 50 IM 765501 01E 16 4 Sample Programs Query function Function CommQuery dev As Integer snd_msg As String As String Dim rcv_msg As String 64 Dim ret As Integer ret CommSend dev snd_msg If ret lt 0 Then CommQuery ERROR Else ret CommRecv dev rcv_msg If ret lt 0 Then CommQuery ERROR Else CommQuery Left rcv_msg ret 1 End If End If End Function Device clear Sub CommClear dev As Integer ilclr dev End Sub Serial polling Function CommPoll dev As Integer As Integer Dim ret As Integer If ilrsp dev ret And EERR Then CommPoll 1 Else CommPoll ret End If End Function Read the source status Function CommSourceStatus dev As Integer As Integer Dim msg As String 64 msg CommQuery dev STAT SOUR COND If msg ERROR Then CommSourceStatus 1 Else CommSourceStatus Val msg End If End Function Read the source event Function CommSourceEvent dev As Integer As Integer Dim msg As String 64 msg CommQuery dev STAT SOUR EVEN If msg ERROR Then CommSourceEvent 1 Else CommSourceEvent Val msg End If End Function Read the measure status Function CommMeasureStatus dev As Integer
256. o Auto V T On Off tms Off On Off Exec l on OFF Explanation Auto Zero Function e On Enables the auto zero function The GS610 measures the internal zero point for each measurement The measured result is obtained by subtracting this value from the measured value canceling the offset drift of the measurement circuit in the GS610 However the measurement takes approximately twice as long as when the auto zero function is OFF because the GS610 measures twice e Off Disables the auto zero function The GS610 carries out only the measurement of the DUT The measurement time is approximately half the time as when the auto zero function is turned ON lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SENSe AZERo STATe SENSe AZERo EXECute IM 765501 01E 7 7 7 7 Turning Auto V I ON OFF Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O C O C Cc C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store EE ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation ITO f selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL h 3 a values using the rotary knob numeric inci OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome sweep Tant me right arrow key For details on the fe ol alec iene ope
257. o range but the time of each source measure cycle will be irregular In addition if the range setting changes the source level will be discontinuous e When fixed range is used the sweep operation is carried out in the range setting best suited to the source level with the highest resolution lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SOURce MODE SOURce VOLTage SWEep SPACing SOURce VOLTage SWEep STARt SOURcCe VOLTage SWEep STOP SOURce VOLTage SWEep STEP SOURce VOLTage SWEep POINts SOURce CURRent SWEep SPACing SOURce CURRent SWEep STARt SOURce CURRent SWEep STOP SOURcCe CURRent SWEep STEP SOURce CURRent SWEep POINts IM 765501 01E 6 2 Setting the Program Sweep Procedure To exit the menu during operation press O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation DISPLAY panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the store Ea y vma 70 wove uur Dss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU ee a e and gt are used to refer to the operation ITO of selecting or setting items or entering OPARE TTT values using the rotary knob numeric Local TPUT CONTROL keys D and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome sweep Cstarr mG right arrow key For details on the no al REVLOGE me operation using the rotary knob numeric r0 keys amp D and see sections 3 8 or a 3 9
258. oate de cosets A abhi A EE ERE 12 4 14 7 termination MOE 0 0 eee cece eee eee eens teeeeteeeeeaeeees 2 16 6 7 terminator selection Of 00 0 cececcecceceesssnteeeeeeeesssteeeeeeeeess 14 7 Time Adjust eee eee seceesceessneeseeseseeeeeeeeaeneseesenserseeseaneens 3 10 TIME Keyan aeaaeae aaraa 4 1 5 9 5 11 7 4 TIME ZONO aoaaa uante Ea AAE EER a S aN Taea PA a AA 3 11 TRACE Gr u irapis 16 29 Tracking ccccceeeeeceneeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeeeneeeeeeaee 2 6 5 4 5 5 transmission terminator seseseesiseriesirerrerrerrrerrsrresrrerreers 12 5 TRIG IN eee TRIG key TRIG OUTA ra Aaa e heed a le 10 5 TRIG SWEEP CTRL IN OUT ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeaeees 2 22 TIO Sse nnan GRR tt dinnuseessmeci isk tad ances sure EANA EEREN ee trigger command ii TRIGger group ee eeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeateneesateneeeateaes trigg MOMS iinei iaiaeiaeiaa apies iaiaaeaia ldla le IEEE E A E AT THOMOG E asnasan a aaae SEAE EE troubleshooting essseessessesiserssresrrnsrrerrerinsrrerrnrrnernsrinernsrens two terminal CONNECTION cceccccccceeeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 22 4 3 TVS es case E E suas cesvarent oes cacsets a 10 1 10 2 U Page UU DDO Ties dice cic cias E T A E tons Meas 8 7 USB ninenin p aE EE AEEA 15 2 USB cable connection Of s essnnessnnseninensinesinnnennenrrnnne na 4 5 USB Interface iniiai a a Raveena USB PON costes atenian uak Aaa Eae EREN rA NDEI EEEa AEA USB Storage rsa a i es
259. oltage and high impedance HiZ is default when generating current Only the source value is set to zero If high impedance is set when generating voltage or low impedance is set when generating current the source value is set to zero and the limiter is constrained to the minimum value of the range Offset calibration can be used to correct the drift in the zero point of the source value such as due to temperature change For example the offset calibration is used to correct the offset fluctuation due to the leak current of the internal circuit when using a low current source range in a high temperature environment IM 765501 01E suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 4 Measurement Turning the Measurement Function ON OFF If measurement is not necessary the measurement function can be turned OFF When the measurement function is turned OFF the procedure related to measurement is not carried out This enables the source measure cycle to be shortened Measurement Function You can select voltage measurement V current measurement I or resistance measurement Q In resistance measurement current is measured when voltage is generated and voltage is measured when current is generated Then the resistance is derived by calculating voltage current Measurement Range Setting and Auto Range The measurement range settings during voltage measurement and current measurement are listed below However the measurement range setting is no
260. om 1 to 1000 If 0 is specified infinity is selected After the sweep operation is started the operation repeats until the sweep or output is turned OFF lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SWEep COUNt IM 765501 01E 6 9 6 5 Starting the Sweep Operation Procedure Explanation DISPLAY C1 Go MEASURE SOURCE e MENU COMPARE LOCAL POWER LLusc_ no al O va MEASURE NULL VALUE TIME KEY LOCK SHIFT MENU SOURCE Starting the Sweep Operation Press START to set the sweep operation to trigger wait condition Starting the Sweep Operation Set the sweep operation to trigger wait condition When a trigger is activated the sweep operation starts When the sweep operation is started one step of the source measure cycle is executed OUTP TROL SWEEP START TRIG MODE To exit the menu during operation press ESC at the upper left of the operation panel In the procedural explanation below the phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric keys D and keys BS key and right arrow key For details on the operation using the rotary knob numeric keys and see sections 3 8 or 3 9 You can generate the start event using the START key on the front pan
261. ommands 16 2 9 External Input Output Commands ROUTe Group ROUTe BNCI SELect Function Selects the BNC input trigger input sweep start input or control input or queries the current setting ROUTe BNCI SELect TRIGger SWEep CONTrol TRIGger Sets the BNC input to trigger input SWEep Sets the BNC input to sweep start input CONTrol Sets the BNC input to control input ROUTe BNCI SELect gt TRIG Currently set to trigger input SWE Currently set to sweep start CONT Currently set to control input ROUT BNCI SEL TRIG ROUT BNCI SEL Syntax Example ROUTe BNCI CONTrol Function Selects the BNC control input interlock output control or zero control or queries the current setting ROUTe BNCI CONTrol ILOCk OUTPut ZERO ILOCk Sets the input to interlock OUTPut Sets the input to output control ZERO Sets the input to zero control ROUTe BNCI CONTrol gt LOC Currently set to interlock input OUTP Currently set to output control input ZERO Currently set to zero control input ROUT BNCI CONT OUTP ROUT BNCI CONT Syntax Example ROUTe BNCO SELect Function Selects the BNC output trigger output sweep synchronization output or control output or queries the current setting ROUTe BNCO SELect TRIGger SWEep CONTrol TRIGger Sets the BNC output to trigger output SWEep Sets the BNC output to sweep synchronization output CONTrol Set
262. on Files The following five equations are built in e Decibel dB txt m A log m B Computes the decibel of the measured value with respect to B e Percent Percent txt m m A 100 Computes the percentage of the measured value with respect to A e Scaling Scaling txt m A M B Scales the measured value e Power Power txt m V l Calculates the power from the source value and measured value However if the source and measurement are of the same function or when measuring resistance the power cannot be calculated correctly To measure power set the GS610 to voltage generation and current measurement or current generation and voltage measurement e Sinusoid generation Sinusoid txt s A sin 2 PI B t Generates a sinusoid of amplitude A and frequency B However if the sweep function is enabled the sweep operation takes precedence To generate the sinusoid turn the sweep function OFF IM 765501 01E 8 5 uoljeyndwog 8 3 Computation Using Equations Selectable Range of the Parameters 9 99999E 24 to 9 99999E 24 Confirming the Computation Definition The contents of the computation definition files stored in the MATH directory of GS610ROM can be displayed lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt CALCulate MATH STATe CALCulate MATH SELect CALCulate MATH CATalog CALCulate MATH DELete CALCulate MATH DEFine CALCulate MATH PARameter AorBorc 8 6 IM 765501 01E 8 4 Comparison Operation
263. on command is shown below An asterisk is always placed in the beginning of a command lt Mnemonic gt ee An example of a common command CLS Compound Header Dedicated commands used by the instrument are classified and arranged in a hierarchy according to their functions The format of a compound header is shown below A colon must be used to specify a lower hierarchy lt Mnemonic gt An example of a compound header MEASURE FUNCTION Simple Header These commands are functionally independent and do not have a hierarchy The format of a simple header is shown below lt Mnemonic gt aie al An example of a simple header START Note A lt mnemonic gt is a character string made up of alphanumeric characters IM 765501 01E 16 3 SpueWLUOD uonesiunwwog 16 1 Program Format When Concatenating Commands Command Group A command group is a group of commands that have common compound headers arranged in a hierarchy A command group may contain sub groups Example Group of commands related to sampling SAMPLE SAMPLE ARMING SAMPLE ARMING DELAY TIME SAMPLE ARMING SLOPE SAMPLE ARMING SOURCE SAMPLE GATE SAMPLE GATE TIME SAMPLE INHIBIT SAMPLE INHIBIT POLARITY SAMPLE INHIBIT STATE When Concatenating Commands of the Same Group The instrument stores the hierarchical level of the command that is currently being executed and performs analysis on t
264. on the GS610RAM in advance You can download the system file from YOKOGAWA website Check the site at the following URL hitp Awww yokogawa com tm GS610 17 10 IM 765501 01E 17 6 Recommended Replacement Parts The one year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument starting from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items nor expendable items items which wear out The replacement period for expendable items varies depending on the conditions of use Refer to the table below as a general guideline Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have parts replaced Parts Name Recommended Replacement Period Cooling fan 3 years Backup battery lithium battery 5 years VFD 3 years IM 765501 01E 17 11 Ey vsueu zuien pue BunooysajqnoiL Chapter 18 Specifications 18 1 Source Section DC Voltage Source Range Setting Source Range Resolution Max Load Accuracy One Year Temperature Coefficient Current of setting V Vxlo of setting V Vxlo f s of the limiter range f s of the limiter range C 200 mV 205 000 mV 1uV 3 2 A 0 02 200 uV 80 uV 400 uV 0 002 20 uV 8 uV 40 uV 2V 2 05000 V 10 uV 3 2 A 0 02 300 uV 100 uV 500 uV 0 002 30 uV 10 uV 50 uV 12V 12 0000 V 100 uV 3 2 A 0 02 2 mV 800 uV 3 mV 0 002 200 uV 80 uV 300 uV 20 V 20 5000 V 100 uV 2 A 0 02 2 mV 800 uV 5 mV 0 002 200 uV 80 uV 500 uV 30 V 30 000 V 1 mV 2 A 0 02 20 mV 5 mV 30 mV
265. on the match those on your order MODEL and SUFFIX Codes name plate on the side panel MODEL SUFFIX YOKOGAWA Made in Japan Model Suffix Code Description 765501 100 240 VAC Power cord D UL CSA Standard Power Cord Part No A1006WD Maximum rated voltage 125 V Maximum rated current 7A F VDE Standard Power Cord Part No A1009WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A Q BS Standard Power Cord Part No A1054WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A R AS Standard Power Cord Part No A1024WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A H GB Standard Power Cord Part No A1064WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A Options C10 Ethernet interface NO Instrument Number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please give them the instrument number IM 765501 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The standard accessories below are supplied with the instrument Name Model Qty Notes Part No Power cord A1006WD 1 UL CSA Standard Power Cord Maximum rated voltage 125 V Maximum rated current 7A A1009WD 1 VDE Standard Power Cord Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A A1054WD 1 BS Standard Power Cord Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A A1024WD 1 AS Standard Power Cord
266. or ai MG keys date Used to set values and select setup data mor or items SSS SE Fa See sections 3 8 and 3 9 MEASURE SOURCE stone C38 ma woe um o E we LOL NIA 7 Output terminal cone Cae Do N A l o Connect the measurement lead that POWER gt pe Cwe swe start comes with the package poe Biki See sections 3 5 and 4 2 mete Power switch Setup and execution keys See section 3 4 Keys used to change the settings or carry out an operation Handle Press a setup key to show the respective setup item Used when carrying the GS610 See sections 1 4 and 3 9 See section 3 1 SHIFT key ESC DISPLAY key The keys enter the shifted state when you press the SHIFT key and Used to clear the soft key menu the SHIFT key illuminates In this state the items marked in purple See section 3 8 characters below the keys are controlled IM 765501 01E 1 1 suolouny pue sowen Med 1 2 Rear Panel Cooling fan See section 3 2 BNC input output terminal Used to input output signals such as trigger sweep and control signals and deliver the output signal of the comparison result See chapter 10 GP IB connector Used to perform communications via the GP IB interface See section 13 3 A WARNING amp amp Do not operate without reading the safety prifpautions in the user s manual RECMAL TUE iI RARE AROLREREDT ETUC SL xe SS
267. ormation Syntax SYSTem ERRor lt Integer gt lt String gt gt lt lnteger gt Error code lt String gt Error message Example SYST ERR SYSTem REMote Function Transits to remote mode Syntax SYSTem REMote Example SYST REM Description This command is used to set the GS610 to remote mode on communication interfaces other than GP IB To release remote mode send the SYSTem LOCal command SYSTem LOCal Function Transits to local mode Syntax SYSTem LOCal Example SYST LOC Description This command is used to release the GS610 from remote mode change to local mode on communication interfaces other than GP IB SYSTem KLOCk Function Sets the key lock state ON or OFF or queries the current setting SYSTem KLOCk 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns key lock ON 0 or OFF Turns key lock OFF SYSTem KLOCk 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF SYST KLOC ON SYST KLOC Syntax Example SYSTem BEEPer STATe Function Sets the beep sound ON or OFF or queries the current setting SYSTem BEEP 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns the beep sound ON 0 or OFF Turns the beep sound OFF SYSTem BEEP gt 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF SYST BEEP ON SYST BEEP Syntax Example SYSTem LFRequency Function Sets the power frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz or queries the current setting SYSTem LFRequency 50 60 50 Sets the power frequency to 50 Hz 60 Sets the power frequency to 60 Hz SY
268. owing cases e f the source mode is set to pulse source e If the source and measurement are set to the same function voltage source and voltage measurement or current source and current measurement e Ifthe limiter tracking is turned OFF e Ifthe source and measurement are set to the same function voltage source and voltage measurement or current source and current measurement the limiter range is set equal to the measurement range setting Therefore the limiter range is changed along with the measurement auto range operation When the limiter range is changed the limiter level is transiently set to 10 of the range setting lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SENSe RANGe AUTO IM 765501 01E 7 3 7 4 Setting the Measurement Delay Procedure To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation DISPLAY panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the sro E Mm ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric nck OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER msc TME SWEEP Tant me right arrow key For details on the EY LOCK MODE no al operation using the rotary knob numeric SHIFT o C keys and CB see sections 3
269. p linear or log sweep LIST Currently set to program sweep Example SOUR MODE LIST SOUR MODE Description This function corresponds to SWEEP on the front panel Specify the linear or log setting of the sweep mode using the SOURce VOLTage SWEep SPACing or SOURce CURRent SWEep SPACing command SOURCe DELay Function Sets the source delay or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce DELay lt Time gt MINimum MAXimum lt Time gt Sets the source delay to the specified value MINimum Sets the source delay to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the source delay to the maximum value SOURce DELay MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Time gt Example SOUR DEL 2 5E 3 SOUR DEL MIN SOUR DEL SOUR DEL MAX SOURce PULSe WIDTh Function Syntax Example Sets the pulse width for pulse generation or queries the current setting SOURce PULSe WIDTh lt Time gt MINimum MAXimum lt Time gt Sets the source delay to the specified value MINimum Sets the source delay to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the source delay to the maximum value SOURce PULSe WIDTh MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Time gt SOUR PULS WIDT 0 75 SOUR PULS WIDT MIN SOUR PULS WIDT
270. p 6 If you select Trig or Sweep proceed to step 8 If you select Ctrl in step 5 a Type menu appears for you to select the input control signal Press the Type soft key BNC In Type Trig Sweep Ctrl Intlock Press the Intlock Output or Zero soft key to select the signal ControlInType Intlock Output Zero Press ESC to return to the External I O menu IM 765501 01E 10 1 indjno Nduy jeu13 x3 pue jndyno Andu ONG 10 1 Setting the Input Output Signals of the BNC Input Output Terminal and the External Input Output Connector Setting the BNC Output Terminal 9 10 11 Press the BNC Out soft key to select the signal to output from the BNC output terminal from Trig Sweep and Ctrl BNC Out Type Trig Sweep Ctrl Origin Press the Type soft key to select the appropriate signal for your application e If Trig is selected in the BNC Out menu Select Origin SrcChg MeasBgn MeasEnd or PulsEnd TrigQut Type Origin SrcChg MeasBgn MeasEnd PulsEnd e If Sweep is selected in the BNC Out menu Select Origin TurnEnd or Allend SweepOut Type Origin TurnEnd AllEnd e If Ctrl is selected in the BNC Out menu Select Intlock Output Zero or Program Control0ut Type Intlock Output Zero Program Press ESC to return to the External I O menu Setting the External Input Output Connector 12 13 14 15 16 Press any of the keys from DIO 5 DIO 6 DIO 7 and DIO 8 to select the signa
271. p d EN a vac 200VA MAX 50 60Hz o SERIAL R5232 A 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the PC 3 After connecting the USB cable correctly turn ON the power switch of the GS610 Two removable disks named GS610ROM and GS610RAM appear within My Computer on the PC my Computer El ol x Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help f Back gt Qsearch GyFolders WG E X A FE Address Address i My Computer Go Links gt gt TE i Te My Computer Select an item to view its 5 objects uonoun e6e101g gsn pue asuas e907 pue su s Jow y d 1 uoys uuos Hum s 166m1 IM 765501 01E 4 5 4 3 USB Storage Function USB Storage Function GS610ROM Anon volatile disk with preset directories for different purposes Various files are stored inthe appropriate directories e MATH Stores definition files of equations that you select when carrying out computation using equations When shipped from the factory and when the disk is formatted built in computation files are stored in this directory e PROGRAM Stores program sweep pattern files that you select when carrying out program sweep When shipped from the factory or when the disk is formatted sample pattern files are stored in this directory e SETUP Stores the GS610 panel setup data that you select when s
272. plete dev As Integer While Val CommQuery dev TRAC STAT Sleep 10 Wend End Function Sample Sequence 5 Store 100 points and read the statistical result This sample does not set the source and measurement Set them appropriately in advance Function SampleSequence5 Dim dev As Integer Dim r_min As Double Dim r_max As Double Dim r_ave As Double Dim r_sdv As Double dev CommOpen Call CommSend dev TRAC POIN 100 d Call CommSend dev TRAC STAT ON 4 Call WaitStoreComplete dev d r_min r_max r_ave r_sdv val CommQuery dev TRAC CALC MIN val CommQuery dev TRAC CALC MAX Val CommQuery dev TRAC CALC AVER Val CommQuery dev TRAC CALC SDEV Call CommClose dev f End Function Open the device Store count 100 Start the storage operation Wait for the storage operation to complete Read the minimum value Read the maximum value Read the average value Read the standard deviation Close the device 16 62 IM 765501 01E 16 5 ASCII Character Codes The following table shows the ASCII character codes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 40 0 60 16 100 0 120 16 140 0 160 16 DEL SP 0 P p 10 16 20 32 30 48 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 21 LLO 41 1 61 17 101 1 121 17 141 1 161 17 DCi 1 A Q a q 11 17 21 33 31 49 41 65 51
273. position while pressing the leg section of the stand inward IM 765501 01E suoneiodg UOWWOD pue uoneiedaid JUSUUNASU e 3 2 Installing the GS610 Installation Location Install the instrument in a place that meets the following conditions Ambient Temperature and Humidity Use the instrument in the following environment e Ambient temperature 5 to 40 C However in order to obtain highly accurate measurements operate the instrument in the 23 5 C temperature range e Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH No condensation should be present However in order to obtain highly accurate measurements operate the instrument in the 50 10 RH range Note ___ Condensation may occur if the recorder is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly If this happens let the recorder adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using it Well Ventilated Location Inlet holes are located on the top and sides of the instrument In addition there are vent holes for the cooling fan on the rear panel To prevent internal overheating allow for enough space around the instrument see the figure below and do not block the inlet and vent holes MMM H EMM Ml Y 7 10 cm or more Z 5 cm or more 5 cm or more Y Ves Secure adequate space around the GS610 so that the operation of the power switch is not obstructed
274. quest to have the GS610 recalibrated IM 765501 01E 17 5 Ey vsueu zuien pue Bunooyseaqnol 17 3 Self Test Procedure To exit the menu during operation press O C O O C C ESC at the upper left of the operation DISPLAY panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the store E Mma ro UMT Css phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric COMPARE VALUE ti OUTPUT CONTROL keys Q and keys BS key and POWER msc mE sweep staat TRIG_ right arrow key For details on the ne al aes NODE operation using the rotary knob numeric O SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or m 3 9 Displaying the Self Test Menu 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the System soft key Remote Error Wire csv I F Setup Log 4w 2w Setting Susten 3 Press the Next 1 2 soft key External Beep Display LineFreq Product Next 1 0 On Off 4 50 60 Info 172 4 Press the Selftest soft key Time Time Disk Firmware Next adjust Zone setrtest pormat Update 2 2 Executing the Display Test 5 Press the Display soft key The entire display illuminates ee eee a e 6 To end the test press ESC Executing the Key Test 5 Press the Key soft key
275. r to CR ASCII code Ox0D LF Sets the terminator to LF ASCII code Ox0A CRLF Sets the terminator to CR LF SYSTem COMMunicate ETHer Syntax TERMinator CR Currently set to CR LF Currently set to LF CRLF Currently set to CR LF SYST COMM ETH TERM LF SYST COMM ETH TERM Description This setting is the terminator for transmission messages When receiving messages CR LF and CR LF are all accepted as terminators Example IM 765501 01E 16 37 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD 16 2 Commands 16 2 11 Measured Value Read Commands INITiate FETCh and READ Group INITiate Function Starts a new measurement Syntax INITiate Example INIT FETCh Function Queries the measured results Syntax FETCh lt Value gt Example FETC READ Function Starts a new measurement and queries the measured results Syntax READ Example READ Description This command is equivalent to Note The FETCh command after sending the INITiate command INITiate FETCh applies a new trigger When the measurement is complete the result is returned If the FETCh command is send without sending the INITiate command the last measured result is immediately returned Use the READ command to read the measured result when using an internal trigger or external trigger To generate triggers from a PC set the trigger source to external TRIGger SOURce EXTernal and use the following
276. r writing to or reading data from a PC An Ethernet port is also provided as an option if you wish to use the existing network for data communication Vacuum Fluorescent Display IM 765501 01E 2 2 Source Measure Cycle Source measure cycle on the GS610 refers to the basic operation that starts with a trigger See section 2 5 Triggers When the GS610 output is ON the source measure cycle is constantly repeated In a source measure cycle the source level changes after a time specified by the source delay elapses from the point in which the trigger is activated Furthermore the measurement starts after a time specified by the measurement delay elapses When the measurement and computation are complete one source measure cycle is finished However if you change the source level with a key or a communication command in the middle of a source measure cycle the source level changes immediately without waiting for the source delay or measure delay and the internal trigger phase is reset If the measurement function is turned OFF measure delay measurement and computation are not carried out The way in which a source measure cycle ends varies depending on the source mode see sections 5 4 DC Source Mode and 5 5 Pulse Source Mode Source Measure Cycle Example When the Source Mode Is DC and Sweep Mode Is Linear Trigger Current source level Previous source if I f Source 1 i 1 level Measur
277. ration using the rotary knob numeric C SHIFT r0 keys and CB see sections 3 8 or ar n 3 9 1 Press SHIFT V I Q MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the Auto V I soft key to select On or Off Measure IntgTime Average AutoZero AutoZerolAuto V I On off ims Off On off Exec On off Explanation When Auto V I is turned ON the measurement function switches when a limiter is activated e When Generating Voltage and Measuring Current When the limiter is not activated The GS610 measures current The voltage source level is entered for the source value in the result file when the storage operation is carried out Normal operation When the limiter is activated The GS610 measures voltage The current limiter value is entered for the source value in the result file when the storage operation is carried out e When Generating Current and Measuring Voltage When the limiter is not activated The GS610 measures voltage The current source level is entered for the source value in the result file when the storage operation is carried out Normal operation When the limiter is activated The GS610 measures current The voltage limiter value is entered for the source value in the result file when the storage operation is carried out lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SENSe ACHange 7 8 IM 765501 01E Chapter8 Computation 8 1 Averaging Procedure To exit the menu during operation press O
278. rator e This parameter is automatically configured in environments using DHCP Subnet Mask You can set the mask value used when determining the subnet network address from the IP address You can set the subnet mask only when DHCP is turned OFF Huge TCP IP networks such as the Internet are often divided up into smaller networks called sub networks The subnet mask is a 32 bit value that specifies the number of bits of the IP address used to identify the network address The portion other than the network address is the host address that identifies individual computers on the network Consult your network administrator for the subnet mask value You may not need to set the value This parameter is automatically configured in environments using DHCP Default Gateway You can set the IP address of the gateway default gateway used to communicate with other networks You can set the default gateway only when DHCP is turned OFF The default gateway has control functions that handle protocol exchanges when communicating with multiple networks so that data transmission is carried out smoothly Consult your network administrator for the default gateway value You may not need to set the value e This parameter is automatically configured in environments using DHCP Transmission Terminator You can set the terminator that is used when sending data from the GS610 e Select CR LF or CR LF The GS610 handles CR LF and CR LF
279. re Display Ext DC H 2 000mA L 2 000mA M 0 A 0 0 0 0 0 m F S E Measured value S 2 00008 zy Source value Four Value Source Measure and Limit Values Hi and Lo Display Measured value Ext DC M 0 oo000mA H 2 000m High limiter value S 2 0000 V ts ER D00mA aoe ae 2 Source value 3 12 IM 765501 01E 3 8 Basic Operation of Keys and Rotary Knob Displaying the Setup Menu of Panel Keys 1 Press a key to display a corresponding setup menu 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired setup menu item Ext DC Ext DC 0 00000mMA H 2 ooomA M 0 00000mMA H 2 oooma 0000m V L 2 000mA S 2 0000 V L 2 000mA Pulse Zero Zero Z N Cal External Beep Display jlLineFreq Product Next Base oFtcee iz oz Exec 1 0 on ore 4 p5 60 Info 172 aa oa 10 00000mA Pulse 0 m H 2 000mA Base 0 00000 V S 2 0000 V L 2 000mA wee l el o ee A Press the corresponding soft key to switch the setting The underlined item is selected B Press the corresponding soft key to display the selection menu Press the soft key corresponding to a selection to make the selection C Press the corresponding soft key to select the item to be changed with the numeric keys or rotary knob Enter the value directly by pressing the numeric keys or set the value by turning the rotary knob Press the BS backspace key and right arrow k
280. rent in the range specified by the hatched lines in the figure below The performance limitations of the GS610 place constraints on the current and voltage when generating voltage and current respectively For example the voltage is limited to 30 V or less when 1 5 A is specified when generating current If the voltage or current source level is at the boundary of the source range and is limited a high limiter indicator H illuminates if the level is positive and a low limiter indicator L illuminates if the level is negative CAUTION If a load exceeding the source range above is connected such as a current source exceeding the current limiter setting when generating voltage or a voltage source exceeding the voltage limiter setting when generating current abnormal load is detected and the output is turned OFF Do not connect a load exceeding the range above to the GS610 Doing so may cause malfunction If a limiter is set an additional limit can be placed within the source range This limit can prevent damage to the connected device due to overcurrent or overvoltage The current limiter is automatically selected when generating voltage and the voltage limiter is automatically selected when generating current If the limiter is turned OFF the voltage or current can be generated up to the maximum value of the source range regardless of the limiter setting IM 765501 01E 2 5 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 3 Source Volta
281. rminal seeeeeneee 10 1 10 3 E BNG OUben sinuca aa A aG 10 2 BS Key siariad iinei eed 3 14 elidel o olo AE EAA awe built in COMPUtAtiON 2 see eeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeee tees te teteeeenens 2 18 Error lig iienaa an aanne sanded built in Computation files eee cece eects eeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 5 GITOMOG ISA icrai ETOF QUEUE eee c ESC DISPLAY KEY rustningar eneen Ethernet intetaces 2 si0scesteseecciiesisieicnsedebesosiiednncred CALCulate group cccssessssseecsseessssseecsevsesseesssseeeeseessseeees Ethernet SCtUNOS enicsccecieecasewecsniscccsessesansnsscasdesecacrestecenevseeee CalEX G 2 fin he Nei ated iia Bice EX eecseeeseeeeeneecesneeseneeessneeesnseeeenteeenneeeenseeenneeenseeennas GOAN crisare nee aca EXT VO weseecsssssscesssseesssseeeesnsseessnseeessnseessnsseeesnnsseesensseeentaas COMMaNA Control FUNCTION ceccccccccccecccececececeececececececececeeseee External O senerare aeae EEEE EESE EEES COMMANA NiSt siirinsesi external input output COMMANAS s eee COMMON COMMAMAS cscsssceceseeescsceesescseseesetetecseseseees external input output connector communication environment displaying of extemal QE iisipan p eeii COMpare iin a R R ENONSA COMPARE END aicinu COMPARE Hi res anaana aN IM 765501 01E Index 1 Index F Page G Page GMT AS tcies etctons tential Rina Ai ae aie 3 10 GP IB address setting Of cccecceceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetees 13 5 GP IB cable CONNECTI
282. ro impedance Loz setting Current zero impedance Hiz Others Connection type OW Limiter ON Beep sound ON Tracking ON Display brightness 4 Current high limit 2mA Current low limit 2mA Voltage high limit 2V Voltage low limit 2 V Sweep Mode OFF Voltage start value 100 mV Voltage step value 10 mV Voltage stop value 200 mV Voltage log sweep step 10 count Current start value 1uA Current step value 0 1HA Current stop value 2uA Current log sweep step 10 count Repeat count 1 Termination mode Keep Trigger Trigger mode Int internal trigger Measurement ON Function Current Auto range OFF Integration time 16 6 20 ms Auto zero ON Store OFF Auto store OFF Store count 10 Auto V I OFF Averaging mode OFF Average count 2 NULL OFF NULL value 0 Time Source delay tus Measurement Delay 50us Pulse width 25 ms Repeat period of the 50 ms internal trigger Computation using equations OFF Param A 0 Param B 0 Param C 0 Comparison operation OFF Upper 0 Lower 0 App 18 IM 765501 01E Index Symbols Page COMPARE IN aeeren ne ene oer Verne ree 10 5 ae gt COMPARE LO ssassn 10 5 NY GWT a 32 COMPARE I aerate tetera 10 5 accessories optional accessories Standard 0 0 0 eee ceceeseesteeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeesseees iii CTRL OUT oo sssceeseesseesstecsneeesneesseeesiensneesneeesneeenensnensneensaes 10 5 ENORET CE current l IM OT cis ceeiecesassccesccssscesecessaseseecestenestsreeevostersseyoseeesees 2 5 auto range M
283. rrent lc by synchronizing to the current pattern using the external trigger signal The measurement result data is created in the internal memory GS610RAM of the first GS610 15 x File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help f X H Arial 10 BZ U ZI A D 5 00E 02 8 97E 07 0 05 1 00E 01 5 95E 07 0 1 1 50E 01 5 92E 07 0 16 2 00E 01 5 94E 07 0 2 2 50E 01 5 94E 07 0 25 3 00E 01 5 86E 07 0 3 3 50E 01 6 95E 07 0 35 4 00E 01 5 92E 07 0 4 4506 01 5 96E 07 0 45 5 00E 01 5 92E 07 0 5 5 50E 01 5 94E 07 0 55 6 00E 01 5 92E 07 0 6 6 50E 01 6 00E 07 0 65 7 00E 01 5 90E 07 0 7 7 50E 01 5 92E 07 0 75 8 00E 01 5 90E 07 0 8 8 50E 01 5 78E 07 0 85 9 00E 01 5 87E 07 0 9 9 50E 01 5 90E 07 0 95 1 00E 00 5 91E 07 1 1 10E 00 5 72E 07 1 05 1 20E 00 5 77E 07 Es 1 1 1 30E 00 5 77E 07 i 4 Pi Resu im ie Ready 7 Transfer Copy the measurement result file in the internal memory GS610RAM of the first GS610 and the pattern file saved in the internal memory GS610ROM of the second GS610 to your PC via the USB Using a general purpose spreadsheet application on your PC save the sweep pattern and the measured results to a single file EQ Microsoft Excel Result csy F oj xj File Edt view Insert Format Tools Data Window Hep amp X il Arial 10 BZU bd fe Time s Cis SEs SESS Source v Measure y Setup 5 00E 02 8 97 E 07 1 00E 01 5 95E 07 1 50E 01 5 92E 07 2 00E 0
284. rt Value 1 0 0 mY y Enter IM 765501 01E 6 1 6 1 Setting the Linear or Log Sweep Setting the Stop Value 7 Press the Stop Value soft key Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Linear Rtn Keep i Value Value Value 8 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the stop value Stop Value 200 00m Y Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Linear Rtn Keep i Value Value Value 9 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Stop Value 2 mY v Enter Setting the Step Value 10 Press the Step Value soft key Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Linear Rtn Keep i Value Value Value 11 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the step value Step Value 10 00m Y Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Linear Ptn Keep a Value Value Value 12 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Step Value 1 mY y Enter Setting the Log Sweep 3 Press the Log soft key The SWEEP key illuminates If you set the Sweep mode to Off the key turns OFF SweepMode off Linear Log Program Setting the Start Value 4 Press the Start Value soft key StartYalue 100 000mu StepCount 10 StopValue 200 000mu Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Log Rtn K
285. rt string n to the same format as the time stamp 8 10 IM 765501 01E 8 5 User Defined Computation The GS610 retains the past 15 measured values before the computation in addition to the current measured value These measured values can be used in the computation M 1 represents the previous measured value and M 15 represents the measured value 15 measurements in the past For example to perform moving average over five measurements write the equation as follows M M M 1 M 2 M 3 4 M 4 5 If the past measured value is not retrieved the computed result is over range In the above example the display is O L until five source measure cycles are completed The available variables are listed below Variable Meaning M Current measured value If a value is substituted in this variable the result becomes the measured result after the computation S Current source value If a value is substituted in this variable the result is used as the next source value T Current time stamp Indicates the elapsed seconds from the first source measure cycle The resolution is 1 us A value cannot be substituted in this variable M n Measured value n times in the past before computation The variable n is an integer between 1 and 15 A value cannot be substituted in this variable S n Source value n times in the past The variable n is an integer between 1 and 15 A value cannot be substituted in this variable T
286. s Cable condition Output terminal Use a measurement lead 758933 red and black 1pc length 1 m of the standard accessories for connection Connection of sense terminal at the time of 4 terminal connection also recommends use of this cable Use a cable of length 1 m or less e BNC IN OUT terminal For connection use a BNC cable that is better than or equivalent to the 1 5D QEW BNC cable e ETHERNRT port Use a five or more category LAN cable for connection e USB port Use a cable corresponding to USB 2 0 Hi speed USB for connection 4 e GP IB connector Use a GP IB IEEE488 cable for connection e EXT I O connector Use a shielded cable for connection 4 e SERIAL RS 232 connector Use a RS 232 shielded cable for connection 18 6 IM 765501 01E 18 6 General Specifications Immunity Complying standard EN61326 1 Table2 e Immunity influence Within the measured value 20 of range e Test condition 100 V range DC sourse mode limit 0 5 A resistance under measurement 220 Q local sense 2W However a cable is connected also to sense terminal and others are set up at the factory default setup Cable conditions examined on the same conditions as emission 1 Applies to products that have CE Mark on the back panel For all other products contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer listed on the back cover of the manual 2 The transient overvoltage of the measurement terminal section on the GS610 is 1500 V
287. s 00 minutes to 13 hours 00 minutes For example Japan standard time is ahead of GMT by 9 hours In this case set Hour to 9 and Minute to 00 Checking the Standard Time Check the standard time for the region where the GS610 is to be used using one of the following methods e Check the date and time setting on your PC Check the site at the following URL http Awww worldtimeserver com Note The GS610 does not support daylight savings time To set the daylight savings time adjust the time difference from GMT lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SYSTem CLOCk DATE SYSTem CLOCk TIME SYSTem CLOCk TZONe IM 765501 01E 3 11 suoneiodg UOWWOD pue uoneiedaid JUSWINASU e 3 8 Basic Operation of Keys and Rotary Knob This section describes the basic operations of the keys and rotary knob on the GS610 Basic Key Operations Switching the Display 1 Press ESC DISPLAY The displays are displayed cyclically in the following order each time you press the ESC DISPLAY key one value source display one value measure display two value Source and measure display four value source measure and limiter values Hi and Lo display One Value Source Display Ext DC H 2 000mA L 2 000mA M 0 00000mA S 2 00008 Ag gg Source value One Value Measure Display Ext DC H 2 000mA L 2 000mA M 0 K 0 0 0 0 0 m S Measured value 5 2 00000 V 2 Two Value Source and Measu
288. s contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the University of California Microsoft Internet Explorer MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders e 1stedition August 2005 2nd edition January 2009 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2005 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 765501 01E Checking the Contents of the Package GS610 Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them Check that the model name and suffix code given
289. s the BNC output to control output ROUTe BNCO SELect TRIG Currently set to trigger output SWE Currently set to sweep synchronization output CONT Currently set to control output ROUT BNCO SEL SWE ROUT BNCO SEL Syntax Example ROUTe BNCO TRIGger Function Syntax Example Sets the BNC trigger output generation timing trigger source change measurement begin measurement end or pulse end or queries the current setting ROUTe BNCO TRIGger ORIGin SCHange MBEGin MEND PEND ORIGin Sets the timing to the trigger point SCHange Sets the timing to the source change point MBEGin Sets the timing to measurement start point MEND Sets the timing to measurement end point PEND Sets the timing to pulse end point ROUTe BNCO TRIGger ORIG Currently set to trigger point SCH Currently set to source change point MBEG Currently set to measurement start point MEND Currently set to measurement end point PEND Currently set to pulse end point ROUT BNCO TRIG ORIG ROUT BNCO TRIG ROUTe BNCO SWEep Function Syntax Example Sets the BNC sweep synchronization output generation timing sweep start 1 turn end all sweep end or queries the current setting ROUTe BNCO SWEep ORIGin TURN ALL ORIGin Sets the timing to the sweep start point TURN Sets the timing to the end of a turn ALL Sets the timing to the end of all sweeps ROUTe BNCO SWEep
290. s the GMT offset section 3 7 Zone L Set Sets the GMT offset section 3 7 Selffest Display Executes the display test section 17 3 L Key Executes the key test section 17 3 Disk F Exec Executes the GS610ROM disk format section 4 3 Format Firmwar i 3 Update Updates the system firmware section 17 5 IM 765501 01E 1 9 suolouny pue soweNn Hed Chapter 2 Explanation of Functions 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram System Configuration PC e USB storage store setup parameters recall statistical computation values and save load equations programs and panel settings e Remote control Trigger input Sweep start input Interlock input Output ON OFF relay control input Zero source control input USB USB storage Communication Ethernet GP IB and RS 232 lt _ GS610 YOKOGAWA Silllaearer gt TILL L I oOo O00000 00 cc EEE ame a j w oooOloegsd QO oe Osa lt 6 sl ool gt Trigger output Source change timing output Measure start timing output Source Measured value Measure end timing output Voltage or current Pulse end timing output Sweep synchronization output Sweep 1 turn end timing output Sweep all end timing output Interlock through output Output ON OFF relay status output Zero source status output Programmable output Co
291. s the source event enable register 16 39 ENABle Queries the source event enable register 16 39 SENSe CONDition Queries the measurement event condition register 16 39 EVENt Queries the measurement event register and clears the register 16 39 ENABle lt Integer gt lt Binary Octal Hexadecimal gt Sets the measurement event enable register 16 39 ENABle Queries the measurement event enable register 16 39 Common Commands IDN Queries the instrument model 16 40 OPT Queries the options 16 40 TRG Generates a trigger 16 40 CAL Performs calibration and queries the result 16 40 TST Performs a self test and queries the result 16 40 RST Initializes settings resets to factory default settings 16 40 SAV 1 2 3 4 Saves the settings 16 40 RCL 1 2 3 4 Loads the saved settings 16 40 CLS Clears the event register and error queue 16 40 STB Queries the status byte and clears the SRQ 16 40 SRE lt Integer gt lt Binary Octal Hexadecimal gt Sets the service request enable register 16 40 SRE Queries the service request enable register 16 40 ESR Queries the standard event register and clears the register 16 40 16 12 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands Command Function Page ESE lt Integer gt lt Binary Octal Hexadecimal gt Sets the standard event enable register 16 40 ESE Queries the standard event enable register 16 40 OPC Generates a standard event OPC when the execution of all previous comm
292. se end of pin 6 trigger output of the external input output connector or queries the current setting Syntax ROUTe DIO6 ORIGin SCHange MBEGin MEND PEND ORIGin Sets the function to the trigger point SCHange Sets the function to the source change point MBEGin Sets the function to measurement start point MEND Sets the function to measurement end point PEND Sets the function to pulse end point ROUTe D1IO6 gt ORIG Currently set to trigger point SCH Currently set to source change point MBEG Currently set to measurement start point MEND Currently set to measurement end point PEND Currently set to pulse end point Example ROUT DIO6 MBEG ROUT D106 ROUTe DIO7 Function Sets the function sweep start point 1 turn end or all sweep end of pin 7 sweep synchronization output of the external input output connector or queries the current setting Syntax ROUTe DIO7 ORIGin TURN ALL ORI Gin Sets the function to the sweep start point TURN Sets the function to the end of 1 turn ALL Sets the function to the end of all sweeps ROUTe DIO7 gt ORIG Currently set to sweep start TURN Currently set to the end of a turn ALL Currently set to the end of all sweeps Example ROUT DIO7 END ROUT DIO7 16 32 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands ROUTe DIO8 Function Sets the function interlock output control or zero control of pin 8 control output of the external input outp
293. se width section 5 5 SHIFT TIME Turns ON OFF key lock section 11 6 KEY LOCK MISC eas 7 GPIB Sets the GP IB address section 13 4 Selects the BaudRat BaudRate RS 232 m RS232 T wee i 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 115200 baud rate section 14 5 Be Switches the RS 232 data length 7 or 8 section 14 5 Parity ___ Parity Selects the RS 232 parity g axx None Even Odd none odd or even section 14 5 L aay Switches the RS 232 stop bit 1 or 2 section 14 6 Flow FlowControl Selects the RS 232 flow control ae None XON CTS RTS none XON OFF CTS RTS section 14 5 _ Term Terminator Selects the RS 232 transmission CR LF CR LF delimiter CR LF or CR LF section 14 5 LAN a ee ok Turns ON OFF the Ethernet DHCP function section 12 3 la IP Enter Sets the fixed Ethernet IP address Address section 12 3 Subnet _ Sets the fixed Ethernet subnet mask C Mask Enter section 12 3 Default Sets the fixed Ethernet default gateway l Gateway Enter section 12 3 Term __ Terminator Sets the Ethernet transmission ae CR LF CR LF delimiter CR LF or CR LF section 12 3 Overview Shows a list of Ethernet settings section 12 4 USB USB Mode Selects the USB function storage function g tee Storage USB TMC or USB communication function section 15 2 __ Save Save Saves the settings to the RAM disk GS610RAM Setup Setup RamDisk
294. seaeeeeeeseaeesieeeeeeee 13 1 GP IB Interface Functions and Specifications eceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeenees 13 3 Connecting the GP IB Cable eececeescesseeeeneeeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeetaeessaeeseeessaeensaee 13 4 Setting the GP IB Address eeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeseneeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeeseaeeeaeessaeesieeseaeeeaaes 13 5 Responses to Interface Messages e cece eee eee tere eeeee tee eseee tenes see seaeesaeseaeeeateae 13 6 Chapter 14 RS 232 Communications 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 RS 232 Interface Functions and Specifications cceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeaten 14 1 Serial RS 232 Interface Connection cceeeeeeceeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeteaeeteneeeaee 14 2 Handshaking Method 00 ec esceeeeneeeseneeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeenaeeeeeeeeseneeseneneeeeea 14 4 Combination of Data Format cecccesceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeeseeseeeeseeseaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaes 14 5 Setting the RS 232 Interface eeeecccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeaeesaeeeeeseaeeseaeeeieeseaeeeeeetaes 14 6 Chapter 15 USB Interface 15 1 15 2 USB Interface Functions and Specifications cecceeeceeeeeeeteeeeneeeeeeseaeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeetens 15 1 Selecting the USB Interface FUNCTION eceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeteeeseeeteaeeeaeetaaee 15 2 Chapter 16 Communication Commands 16 1 Program FORM ALS teisson eran o pA E Ea aA
295. selecting or setting items or entering oat TALE marar values using the rotary knob numeric OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and POWER MISC TIME sweer Commr me right arrow key For details on the fe ol KEV COEK wE operation using the rotary knob numeric O snr keys and see sections 3 8 or T 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the System soft key to display the System menu Remote Error Wire esy I F Setup Log aw 2w Setting System 3 Press the Display soft key External Beep Display LineFreq Product Next 1 0 on ore ae EHS Info 1 2 Selecting the Display Brightness 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired brightness Brightness off A 2 i 3 4 Exec Turning the Display OFF 4 Press the Off Exec soft key The display is turned OFF and the SHIFT key blinks until the display is turned ON again Press any key or turn the rotary knob to turn the display back ON Brightness off i 2 3 4 Exec Explanation Selecting the Display Brightness You can select the display brightness in the range of 1 to 4 The darkest setting is 1 and the brightest setting is 4 Turning the Display OFF You can turn OFF the display to prolong the service life of the display lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SYSTem DISPlay STATe SYSTem DISPlay BRIGht IM 765501 01E 11 7 suoloun 419y10 2 11 7 Key Lock
296. sk Gateway CR LF overview 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired terminator Terminator CR LF CR LF Explanation To use the network function of the GS610 the TCP IP parameters must be configured Ethernet Communications The GS610 can be controlled using communication commands from a PC via the Ethernet interface DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a protocol that allocates setup information that is needed temporarily to PCs connecting to the network When DHCP is turned ON the following settings are automatically assigned IP address Subnet mask Default gateway e To use DHCP the network must have a DHCP server Consult your network administrator to see if DHCP can be used e When DHCP is turned ON different settings may be assigned each time the power is turned ON When accessing the GS610 from a PC you must check the GS610 TCP IP settings such as the IP address each time the power is turned ON 12 4 IM 765501 01E 12 3 Setting the CP IP IP Address Internet Protocol Address You can set the IP address assigned to the GS610 You can set the IP address only when DHCP is turned OFF The IP address is an ID that is assigned to each device on an IP network such as the internet or an intranet The address is a 32 bit value expressed using four octets each 0 to 255 each separated by a period as in 192 168 111 24 Obtain an IP address from your network administ
297. sponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SWEep LAST 6 8 IM 765501 01E 6 4 Setting the Repeat Count Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the store Ca wa Dra 7 2 ro aw J ss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation i f selecting or setting items or enterin RECALL MATH NULL nH 3 9 g g values using the rotary knob numeric iai TPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and power Cmc ie sweep orant Tic right arrow key For details on the fo al KEES me operation using the rotary knob numeric r0 keys amp D and see sections 3 8 or 3 9 1 Press SWEEP to display the SWEEP menu 2 Press the Repeat soft key Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Log Ren Keep i Value Value Count 3 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the repeat count Press the Infinity soft key to select infinity 0 When the value is entered directly with the numeric keys Repeat Count 2 E a a od ee When the value is set with the rotary knob Repeat Count Infinity oo 4 Enter 0 with the numeric key and press the Enter soft key to select infinity Explanation Sweep Repeat Count Set the value in the range fr
298. st be of a three prong type with a protective earth ground terminal Item Specifications Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption Approx 200 VA The instrument can use a 100 V or a 200 V system for the power supply Check that the voltage supplied to the instrument is less than or equal to the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord see page iii before using it 3 prong outlet Power cord standard accessory IM 765501 01E 3 4 Turning the Power Switch ON OFF Items to Be Checked before Turning ON the Power e Check that the instrument is installed properly see section 3 2 Installation e Check that the power cord is connected properly see section 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply Location of the Power Switch and ON OFF Operation The power switch is located in the lower left corner of the front panel The power switch is a push button Press the button once to turn it ON and press it again to turn it OFF S 8 G A r Gh Z amp O ki O45 ae OFF gan a i L Power ON Operation When the power switch is turned ON the self test starts automatically When the self test completes successfully the GS610 is set to the factory default set
299. stored data Syntax TRACe DATA SENSe lt Value gt Example TRAC DATA SENS Description Queries the measured value of the position specified by TRACe DATA NUMBer in the storage memory The measured value is voltage if measuring voltage SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage current if measuring current SENSe FUNCtion CURRent and resistance if measuring resistance SENSe FUNCtion RESistance TRACe DATA SETup Function Queries the setup mnemonic of the stored data Syntax TRACe DATA SETup lt String gt Example TRAC DATA SET Description Queries the setup mnemonic of the position specified by TRACe DATA NUMBer in the storage memory The setup mnemonic written in the program sweep pattern file is returned However if the source mode is fixed level SOURce MODE FIXed or linear log SOURce MODE SWEep an empty string is returned TRACe MONLy Function Sets the measurement only state ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax TRACe MONLy 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns measurement only ON 0 or OFF Turns measurement only OFF TRACe MONLy gt 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example TRAC MONL ON TRAC MONL Description When measurement only is turned ON only the data when the measurement is ON is stored Turn measurement only ON when you want to output only the lines that contain measured data in the result file 16 30 IM 765501 01E 16 2 C
300. strument which require special instructions for proper handling or use The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions Alternating current ON power OFF power ON power state OFF power IM 765501 01E Safety Precautions Be sure to observe with the precautions below Not complying might result in injury or death e Use the Correct Power Supply Before connecting the power cord ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord e Use the Correct Power Cord and Plug To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not disable this protection by using an extension cord without protective earth grounding e Connect the Protective Grounding Terminal Make sure to connect the protective earth to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three prong type power cord Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three prong outlet Do Not Impair the Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Do Not Operate with Def
301. t Name of the file to be created lt String gt Contents to be written to the file Example SOUR LIST DEF Sample csv 1 08F 2 08 Description The file is created in the PROGRAM directory on the GS610ROM disk If an existing file name is specified the file is overwritten SOURCe VOLTage RANGe Function Sets the voltage source range setting 200 mV 2 V 12 V 20 V 30 V 60 V or 110 V or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce VOLTage RANGe lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN lt Voltage gt Sets the smallest range setting that includes the specified value MINimum Sets the range setting to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the range setting to the maximum value UP Increases the range setting by 1 DOWN Decreases the range setting by 1 SOURce VOLTage RANGe MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value gt lt Voltage gt SOUR VOLT RANG 20 SOUR VOLT RANG DOWN SOUR VOLT RANG SOUR VOLT RANG MIN Description If the range setting is changed when auto range is ON by the SOURce VOLTage RANGe AUTO ON command auto range is automatically disabled Example SOURCe VOLTage RANGe AUTO Function Sets the source auto range ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax SOURce VOLTage RANGe AUTO 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns auto range ON 0 or OFF Turns a
302. t directly specified but determined indirectly by the source range setting and limiter setting e Voltage Measurement Range Settings Integration Time of 16 66 ms 20 ms 100 ms Integration time of 4 ms 1 ms or 250 ms or 200 ms Range Measurement Resolution Range Measurement Resolution Setting Range Setting Range 200 mV 205 000 mV 1 uV 200 mV 205 00 mV 10 uV 2V 2 05000 V 10 uV 2V 2 0500 V 100 uV 20 V 20 5000 V 100 uV 20 V 20 500 V 1 mV 110 V 110 000 V 1 mV 110 V 110 00 V 10 mV When Generating Current Same as the voltage limiter range When Generating Voltage Same as the voltage source range However if the voltage source range is 12 V 30 V or 60 V the settings below apply Voltage Source Range Setting Voltage Measurement Range Setting 12V 30 V 60 V 20 V 110 V 110 V e Current Measurement Range Settings Integration Time of 16 66 ms 20 ms 100 ms Integration time of 4 ms 1 ms or 250 ms or 200 ms Range Measurement Resolution Range Measurement Resolution Setting Range Setting Range 20 uA 20 5000 uA 100 pA 20 uA 20 500 uA 1nA 200 uA 205 000 uA 1nA 200 uA 205 00 uA 10 nA 2mA 2 05000 mA 10 nA 2mA 2 0500 mA 100 nA 20 mA 20 5000 mA 100 nA 20 mA 20 500 mA 100 nA 200 mA 205 000 mA 1 uA 200 mA 205 00 mA 10 uA 3A 3 20000 A 10 uA 3A 3 2000 mA 100 uA 2 10 IM 765501 01E 2 4 Measurement When Generating Voltage Same as the current limiter range
303. t period timer external trigger or no trigger wait 16 26 TIMer lt Time gt MINimum MAXimum Sets the period of the constant period timer 16 26 TIMer MINimum MAXimum Queries the period of the constant period timer 16 26 Computation Commands CALCulate Group CALCulate NULL STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the NULL computation state ON or OFF 16 27 STATe Queries the NULL computation state ON or OFF 16 27 OFFSet lt Value gt Sets the offset value of NULL computation 16 27 OF FSet Queries the offset value of NULL computation 16 27 MATH STATe 1 0 ON OFF Sets the state of the computation using equations ON or OFF 16 27 STATe Queries the state of the computation using equations ON or OFF 16 27 SELect lt String gt Sets the definition file of the computation using equations 16 27 SELect Queries the definition file of the computation using equations 16 27 CATalog Queries a list of definition files of the computation using equations 16 27 DELete lt String gt Deletes the definition file of the computation using equations 16 27 DEFine lt String gt lt String gt Creates a definition file of the computation using equations 16 27 PARameter A lt Value gt Sets equation parameter A 16 28 2A Queries equation parameter A 16 28 B lt Value gt Sets equation parameter B 16 28 2B Queries equation parameter B 16 28 C lt Value gt Sets equation parameter C 16 28 C Queries equation parameter C 16 28 LIMit
304. ta number DOWN Decrements the store data number TRACe DATA NUMBer MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt lnteger gt Example TRAC DATA NUMB 1 TRAC DATA NUMB MAX TRAC DATA NUMB UP TRAC DATA NUMB TRAC DATA NUMB MAX Description This data number indicates the read position in the storage memory It is used by the TRACe DATA TIME TRACe DATA SOURCe TRACe DATA SENSe and TRACe DATA SETup commands Set the number in the range of 1 start to the return value of TRACe ACTual last TRACe DATA TIME Function Queries the time stamp of the stored data Syntax TRACe DATA TIME lt Time gt Example TRAC DATA TIME Description Queries the time stamp of the position specified by TRACe DATA NUMBer in the storage memory The time stamp is a relative value from the start of the stored data TRACe DATA SOURCe Function Queries the source value of the stored data Syntax TRACe DATA SOURCe lt Value gt Example TRAC DATA SOURCe Description Queries the source value of the position specified by TRACe DATA NUMBer in the storage memory The source value is voltage if generating voltage SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage and current if generating current SOURce FUNCtion CURRent TRACe DATA SENSe Function Queries the measured value of the
305. tch and remove the power cord from the outlet Carry the Instrument Properly Remove the power cord and connecting cables The instrument weighs approximately 7 kg To carry the instrument use the handle as shown in the figure below and move it carefully 2Fan Sa 2 ELIIT E ET Cleaning When wiping off dirt from the case or operation panel turn OFF the power switch and remove the power cord from the outlet Then gently wipe with a soft dry clean cloth Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation IM 765501 01E 3 2 Installing the GS610 Installation Position AN To prevent fire never use the instrument with the rear side facing down There are inlet holes for the cooling fan on the rear panel Placing the instrument with the rear side down can cause a fire when the instrument malfunctions If you must use the instrument with the rear panel down place a metal plate or a flame resistive barrier grade UL94V 1 or higher beneath the instrument Place the instrument in a horizontal position or inclined position using the stand as shown in the center of the figure below When using the stand pull it forward until it locks perpendicular to the bottom surface of the instrument If you are installing the instrument on a slippery surface attach the rubber feet two pieces included in the package to the feet If you are not using the stand return it to the original
306. terlock signal input for safe operation The output is forcibly turned OFF at low level and the output cannot be turned ON while the signal is at low level Relay Control Ciriln Output An output control signal input Output is turned ON at the rising edge and turned OFF at the falling edge This signal works in the same fashion as the OUTPUT key Zero Generation Control Cirlln Zero A control signal input for zero output When the output is ON a falling edge sets the GS610 to zero output state and a rising edge set the GS610 to output ON state This signal works in the same fashion as the ZERO key Output Signals Trigger TrigOut Origin The actual trigger signal start timing of the source measure cycle is output as a pulse signal Source Change Timing TrigOut SrcChg The source level change timing after the source delay is output as a pulse signal Measurement Start Timing TrigOut MeasBgn The measurement start timing after the measure delay is output as a pulse signal Measurement End Timing TrigOut MeasEnd The end timing of the measurement and computation is output as a pulse signal Pulse Falling Edge Timing TrigOut PulsEnd The timing of the pulse falling edge when generating pulse signals is output as a pulse signal Sweep Synchronization SweepOut Origin The actual start signal start timing of the sweep operation is output as a pulse signal Sweep 1 Turn End Timing SweepOut TurnEnd When the repeat count is gre
307. that the current display value shows 0 Syntax Example CALCulate NULL OFFSet Function Sets the offset value of the NULL computation or queries the current setting CALCulate NULL OFFSet lt Value gt lt Value gt Sets the offset value to the specified value CALCulate NULL OFFSet lt Value gt CALC NULL OFFS 0 123 CALC NULL Description The NULL offset value is updated when the NULL computation state changes from OFF to ON so that the current displayed value shows 0 The NULL computation is carried out after other computations AVERage MATH etc have been performed Therefore it is a parameter with no unit Syntax Example CALCulate MATH STATe Function Sets the state of the computation using equations ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax CALCulate MATH STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns computation using equations ON 0 or OFF Turns computation using equations OFF CALCulate MATH STATe gt 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example CALC MATH STAT ON CALC MATH STAT CALCulate MATH SELect Function Sets the definition file of the computation using equations or queries the current setting CALCulate MATH SELect lt String gt lt String gt File name to be specified CALCulate MATH SELect gt lt String gt Current file name CALC MATH SEL Scale txt CALC MATH SEL Description Select a file in the MATH directory on the G
308. the Displayed Contents ecccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeneeee 1 3 1 4 Key Groups and MenUS isis san neice tit ain ei ade eh Re eens 1 5 Explanation of Functions 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram cceeceeseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeeeeed 2 1 2 2 Source Measure Cycle eeecceececseeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeeseeessaeeeeesaas 2 3 e OUNCE ei aies shes ieee cadel vcikiigich cd acs dad uence E E EE 2 5 24 Meas rem nt oes ic ctsachs ccSsccevssatapsscenehvaced eater ca sa ecadanesacaseceducsecectuatceasebeptouaneaduandestusaavbeetes 2 10 25 TWIQQONS e aaa a a a Ea AEA A a E E E aa 2 13 PL ETE E E A TT 2 14 27 lt COMPULALON ieissar ae aeia a e o aia ai aea era iaai 2 17 2 8 Store and Recall Statistical Computation Value Display ccceceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeneees 2 19 2 9 USB Stofage Function yscidi nahin ee a nana ee 2 20 2 10 Other FUMCHONS sessin innne e aenn EEE R apa Ee a AUR E Ga EEEE 2 22 Instrument Preparation and Common Operations 3 1 Handling Precautions assinei eieaa Ea eaa E Eaa daaa ao raadde 3 1 3 2 Installing the GS610 sessccninreeirereereiessrerescsenrarsrsinnosnenisnoridrenosneeersunrnnneensnetadi sane 3 3 3 3 Connecting to the Power Supply eccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeceeeseaeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeeeeaeeeeeteas 3 6 3 4 Turning the Power Switch ON OFF eccceeeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeesie
309. the LIN LOG sweep parameter is changed or while the program pattern file is being loaded It is set to 1 when the GS610 is ready to receive sweep start The bit in the event register is set to 1 when the condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 Bit 4 Not used always 0 Bit 3 Not used always 0 Bit 2 STO Store Complete Set to 1 when the storage operation completes Bit1 TOS Turn of Sweep Set to 1 each time a turn of the sweep operation completes Bit0 EOS End of Sweep Set to 1 when the entire sweep operation completes Bit Masking To mask a bit in the source event register so that it does not cause bit 1 SSB of the status byte to change set the corresponding bit in the source event enable register to 0 Use the STATus SOURce ENABle command for this purpose Reading from the Source Event Register The contents of the source event register can be read by the STATus SOURce EVENt command After the register is read it is cleared The contents of the source condition register can be read by the STATus SOURce CONDition command Reading the register does not change the contents of the register 16 46 IM 765501 01E 16 3 Status Reports 16 3 5 Measure Event Register Measure Event Register Status Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 0 STATus SENSe CONDition OVR LHI LLO CHI CLO ee ee ee ee ee ee y Event Register 71 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STATUS SENSe EVENt SMPEOMOVR L
310. the Lower setup screen C E ee tome ff 7 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the lower value bower 0 OOOOOE 0f On oft Upper Lower IM 765501 01E 8 7 uoljeyndwog 8 4 Comparison Operation Explanation 8 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Lower 2 ee Oe ee ee ee Comparison Operation Determines the magnitude relation between the displayed value and the reference values upper and lower and displays the result You can combine the two reference values to determine the upper gt displayed value gt lower relationship The results of the comparison are displayed as follows Displayed Value Display of the Comparison Determination of the Result in the Status External Input Output Display Area Section oL High HI Displayed value gt Upper High HI Upper Displayed value Lower In IN Lower gt Displayed value Low LO oL Low LO Setting the Reference Value Set the reference values so that Upper is greater than Lower lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt CALCulate LIMit STATe CALCulate LIMit UPPer CALCulate LIMit LOWer 8 8 IM 765501 01E 8 5 User Defined Computation Create using a text editor ora similar tool In user defined computation the GS610 parses a text file created on a PC or a similar device is stored in the MAT
311. the PC Signal direction Output SG Signal Ground Signal ground RS Request to Send Handshaking used to receive data from the PC Signal direction Output CS Clear to Send Handshaking used to send data to the PC Pins 1 Signal direction Input 4 6 and 9 are not used 9 Pin to 25 Pin Adapter and Signal Names CND O l 3 2 2 7 8 5 3 4 6 7 The numbers inside the parentheses are pin numbers for the 25 pin connector RS 232 Standard Signals and Their JIS and CCITT Abbreviations 9 pin connector RS 232 CCITT Pin Symbol Signal Table Name 5 AB GND 102 Signal ground BA TXD 103 Transmitted data BB RXD 104 Received data CA RTS 105 Request to send CB CTS 106 Clear to send 14 2 IM 765501 01E 14 2 Serial RS 232 Interface Connection Signal Wiring Example The pin numbers are for the 9 pin connector In general use a cross cable PC GS610 PC GS610 SD 3 3 SD Ro 2 gt 2 rp RS 7 7 RS cs 8 8 cs se 5 _1 5 sG SD 3 3 SD rp 2 gt Rp RS 7 7 RS ce s gt e cs SG 5 5 SG CTS RTS handshaking is not possible CTS RTS handshaking is possible IM 765501 01E 14 3 suonedlunwwoJ zZez sSYy eB 14 3 Handshaking Method No Handshaking When using the serial RS 232 interface for transferring data it is necessary to synchron
312. the Wire soft key to select 4W or 2W If you select 4W the remote sense indicator 4WIRE at the left of the display illuminates Remote Error Wire cs I F Setup Log aw 2w Setting System Explanation The GS610 has two types of sensing 2W and 4W 2W _ Two terminal connection local sense 4W Four terminal connection remote sense The connection diagrams are given on the next page If the current flowing through the Hi and Lo terminals is small select two terminal connection 2W When the output current is large a voltage error occurs between the Hi and Lo terminals that are being sensed due to the effects of the lead wire resistance In such case select four terminal connection 4W and connect the measurement lead from the SENSE terminal close to the DUT This enables the voltage to be sensed with the effects of the lead wire resistance reduced This function is effective when the current is large and the voltage appearing at the DUT is small such as in alow resistance measurement Note When making a four terminal connection be careful that the connection to the SENSE terminal does not get cut If it does an error occurs in the voltage between the Hi and Lo terminals because the voltage is not sensed correctly When making a two terminal connection use the OUTPUT terminals If the SENSE terminal is used the GS610 cannot generate the voltage or current correctly and can cause a malfunction IM 765501 01E 4 3
313. the bits in the status byte The bits that are cleared for each operation are shown below When a Query Is Made Using the STB Command No bits are cleared When a Serial Polling Is Executed Only the RQS bit is cleared When a CLS Command Is Received When the CLS command is received the status byte itself is not cleared but the contents of the standard event register which affects the bits in the status byte are cleared As a result the corresponding bits in the status byte are cleared except bit 4 MAV since the output queue cannot be emptied by the CLS command However the output queue will also be cleared if the CLS command is received just after a program message terminator 16 3 3 Standard Event Register Standard Event Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 PONURQCME EXE DDE QYE IRQCOPC Bit 7 PON Power ON Set to 1 when the power is turned ON Bit6 URQ User Request Not used always 0 Bit5 CME Command Error Set to 1 when the command syntax is incorrect Example Incorrectly spelled command name 9 used in octal data Bit 4 EXE Execution Error Set to 1 when the command syntax is correct but the command cannot be executed in the current state Example Parameters are outside the range Bit3 DDE Device Error Set to 1 when execution of the command is not possible due to an internal problem in the instrument that is not a command error or an execution error Bit2 Q
314. the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the AUTO Vil UMT Vs IS phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt and gt are used to refer to the operation TO of selecting or setting items or entering COMPARE TALE values using the rotary knob numeric wae OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and POWER swe omr Tie right arrow key For details on the no al ay me operation using the rotary knob numeric wn e c 9 o r0 keys QD and see sections 3 8 or a 3 9 1 Press TIME to display the Time menu 2 Press the S Delay soft key to display the source delay setup screen Delay M Delay Period P Width lus SOus 50 00ms 25 00ms 3 Use the rotary knob or numeric keys and lt and gt keys to set the source delay Source Delay us Delay M Delay Period P Width SOus 50 00ms 25 00ms 4 If you use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Source Delay 5 us ms S Enter IM 765501 01E 5 11 5 6 Setting the Source Delay Explanation Source Delay The wait time from trigger input to the start of source change can be specified Selectable Range 1 us to 3600 000000 s Trigger a Int or Ext m Source delay 4 gt Source value Source y oe delay Measurement Measurement time Calcula
315. tically such as when a short circuit occurs when generating voltage a large transient discharge current is generated from the output capacitance e If a voltage source power supply amplifier signal generator etc is connected as a load the load voltage source may be unstable due to the output capacitance e Take the time it takes for the output capacitance to be charged and discharged when determining the response time of the source voltage Current Range Setting Current Limiter Range Output Capacitance 20 uA 200 uA 2 mA 20 mA 200 mA 3A 2A 1A 0 5A 5 uF or less 0 55 uF or less 0 05 uF or less 0 02 uF or less lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SOURce SHAPe SOURce VOLTage LEVel SOURce CURRent LEVel IM 765501 01E no s 5 5 Procedure DISPLAY S Se a SOURCE MEASURE MENU COMPARE V 1 Q MEASURE NULL VALUE LOCAL OUTPUT CONTROL power msc mme Ge Ger Cay ho al KEY LOCK MODE O Setting the Pulse Source Mode e To exit the menu during operation press ESC at the upper left of the operation panel e Inthe procedural explanation below the phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric keys D and keys BS key and right arrow key
316. ting surface 20 460 3 Eo 5 R T Ps Soq0 5u00 N aononjlngo ao dg N o 132 0 3 g al cel Sy Mounting surface 20 aiee O00000 o 000 Qa a BREISE 9 O oO 556 amg ooolong O 000000 o 000 i coojooud oono ao 575 SS o gt suoleoiioeds Note Be sure to provide support from the bottom of the GS610 avoiding the vent holes Allow at least 80 mm of space around the GS610 for ventilation Unless otherwise specified tolerance is 3 however tolerance is 0 3 mm when below 10 mm IM 765501 01E 18 9 Appendix Appendix 1 Computation Definition Specifications File Format Computation MATH can be performed by creating a text file equation definition file containing equations and statements similar to BASIC on a PC 2 placing the file in the MATH directory on the GS610ROM disk and 3 selecting the file on the GS610 The file is a text file consisting of statements To write multiple lines of statements use a line feed code CR LF or CR LF for the delimiter However in the case of a compound statement described later the line feed code is parsed as a delimiter of the statement composing the compound statement Variables constants and functions are not case sensitive You can arbitrarily insert blank lines between statements for better readability
317. tings or the settings corresponding to the setup data file you specified in advance see section 11 3 Selecting the Power ON Setting Note ____ If the GS610 does not operate as described above when the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the power switch and check the following points e Check that the power cord is securely connected e Check that the voltage supplied from the power outlet is correct See section 3 3 e You can initialize the settings of the GS610 See section 11 2 If the GS610 still fails to power up when the power switch is turned ON after checking these points it is probably a malfunction Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs e If you are turning the power switch ON after turning it OFF allow at least 5 s before turning it ON For Making Accurate Measurements At the installation location indicated in section 3 2 allow the instrument to warm up for at least 60 minutes after the power switch is turned ON before starting the use of the instrument Shutdown Operation The setup data and measured results immediately before the power switch is turned OFF are not retained The same is true when the power cord gets disconnected from the outlet It is recommended that important setup data be saved to the SETUP directory on the non volatile disk GS610ROM see section 2 9 USB Storage Function IM 765501 01E 3 7 suoneiodg UOWWOD pue uoneiedaid JUSWUNASU e 3 5 Wiring Precautions
318. tion ess es Source measure cycle lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SOURce DELay 5 12 IM 765501 01E 5 7 Turning the Output ON OFF Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the store Ca wa Dra 12 ro aw J ss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering RECALL MATH NULL values using the rotary knob numeric ioci OUTPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and power Cmc Ome sweep omr Taie right arrow key For details on the fo al ee won _ operation using the rotary knob numeric oS C keys and see sections 3 8 or S 3 9 Output ON Press OUTPUT The OUTPUT key illuminates while the output is ON Output OFF Press OUTPUT while generating the signal to stop the output When the output stops the OUTPUT key turns OFF Explanation Output ON The output relay is activated and source measure cycle is repeated Output OFF The output relay is disconnected and the source measure cycle stops Note When the output relay is activated the source level is set to zero When Output Is ON The output relay turns ON with the source level set to zero After the output relay is activ
319. tions due to stray capacitance and lead inductance use twisted pair lead wires for connecting the OUTPUT Hi and OUTPUT Lo terminals Likewise use twisted pair lead wires for connecting the SENSE Hi and SENSE Lo terminals IM 765501 01E 3 6 Setting the Power Frequency To exit the menu during operation press ESC at the upper left of the operation In the procedural explanation below the phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt and gt are used to refer to the operation of selecting or setting items or entering values using the rotary knob numeric keys and keys BS key and right arrow key For details on the operation using the rotary knob numeric keys QD and see sections 3 8 or Procedure DISPLAY a panel MEASURE SOURCE o MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE COMPARE VALUE OUTPUT CONTROL POWER sweep omr me no al A KEY LOCK MODE O E 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the soft key to display the System menu e setae abby sca tm 3 Press the LineFreq soft key to select 50 or 60 External Beep Display LineFreq Product Next 1 0 on ore tl ENS Info 1 2 Explanation The power frequency of the GS610 is automatically selected when the power is turned ON Usually it does not need to be changed The value corresponding to 1 period of the frequency 20 ms or 16 6 ms in the integration time see section 7 5 Se
320. tput relays ON OFF control signals of zero generation and comparison result output The BNC input output terminal and the external input output connector are independent Therefore different roles can be assigned and used simultaneously BNC Input Output Terminal One signal can be assigned to each terminal Multiple signals cannot be assigned Input terminal Output terminal External Input Output Connector Multiple signals can be assigned Pin assignments are shown below Signal Name and Function Function SignalType Active Pin of the Type of BNC External Input Terminal Output Connector Trigin Trigger input Edge L 2 pin BNC IN Sweep Start In Sweep start input Edge L 3 pin BNC IN Ctrlin IntLock Interlock input Level Lo 4 pin BNC IN Output Relay control input Both edges ON OFF 5pin BNC IN Zero Zero source control input Both edges ON f OFF 5pin BNC IN TrigOut Origin Trigger output Pulse a 6 pin BNC OUT SrcChg Source change timing output Pulse F 6 pin BNC OUT MeasBgn Measure start timing output Pulse Ff 6 pin BNC OUT MeasEnd Measure end timing output Pulse L 6 pin BNC OUT PulsEnd Pulse falling edge timing output Pulse L 6 pin BNC OUT SweepOut Origin Sweep synchronization output Pulse E3 7 pin BNC OUT TurnEnd Sweep 1 turn end timing output Pulse L 7 pin BNC OUT AllEnd Sweep all end timing output Pulse L 7 pin BNC OUT CtrlOut IntLock Interlock through output Level Lo 8 pin BNC OUT Output Relay
321. transmitted communication command is displayed in the response display area The returned message is read only Displaying the Communication Environment Click the word Status in the Web server window to display the communication environment pop up window 2101 x GS 610 Status 1 02 DHCP sc o 10 0 156 1 00 00 68 86 40 0 7655 1303 o 782 o o Ethernet Speed 2008 ASE Tx Ful Duplex Refresh The communication environment of the GS610 is displayed Press Refresh to update the d isplayed information 12 10 IM 765501 01E 12 5 Web Server Function FTP Server Function Click the word FTP in the Web server window to display the FTP server P ftp 10 0 158 56 Microsoft Internet Explorer E lo x File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Back gt Gsearch Gyrolders G9 By GE xX A E Address ftp 10 0 158 56 Z C60 Links gt GS610RAM GS5610ROM 10 0 158 56 Server 10 0 158 56 User Name Anonymous Click here to learn about browsing FTP sites User anonymous IZE Local intranet The GS610RAM folder and GS610ROM folder are linked to the volatile memory GS610RAM and non volatile memory GS610ROM on the GS610 The files in the GS610 memory can be viewed duplicated deleted or transferred to the PC from the remote panel For details on the volatile memory GS610RAM and non volatile memory GS610ROM see section 2 9 USB
322. tting the Integration Time varies depending on the selected power frequency lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SYSTem LFRequency IM 765501 01E 3 9 suoneiodg UOWWOD pue uoneiedaid JUSWUNASU e 3 7 Setting the Date Time and the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press C C O O O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE Inthe procedural explanation below the STORE AUTO W O ro Mum Msas phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU ee ma and gt are used to refer to the operation RANGE 7 a 5 EOL e MULL AUTO ao of selecting or setting items or entering es TT He 2 values using the rotary knob numeric OUTPUT CONTROL keys C and keys BS key and POWER MISC TIME SWEEP START TRIG right arrow key For details on the C D mA Do al KELO operation using the rotary knob numeric a SHFT keys and G see sections 3 8 or 3 9 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the System soft key to display the System menu e Setup Error Wire csv I F Log 4W 2w setting System 3 Press the Next 1 2 soft key External Beep Display LineFreq Product Next 1 0 On Off A 50 60 Info 172 Setting the Date and Time 4 Press the
323. u use the numeric keys press a soft key corresponding to the desired unit or the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Zero Offset 1 0 mY y Enter Zero Source Impedance 5 Press the Zero Z soft key to select Hiz or Loz Pulse Zero Zero Z Cal Base Offset Hiz Loz Exec 5 14 IM 765501 01E 5 8 Zero Generation Explanation Zero Generation When generating voltage 0 V is generated When generating current 0 A is generated Setting the Zero Offset An offset can be specified on the zero value when generating zero output Selectable Range of Zero Offset 110 000 V to 110 000 V Nole If the zero offset value exceeds the source range of the selected range setting the zero offset is set to the upper or lower limit of the range setting Setting the Zero Source Impedance The impedance when generating a zero level signal can be selected When Low Impedance LoZ Is Selected When Generating Voltage or When High Impedance HiZ Is Selected When Generating Current The source value is set to 0 e When High Impedance HiZ Is Selected When Generating Voltage or When Low Impedance LoZ Is Selected When Generating Current The source value is set to 0 and the limiter is set to 0 5 of the range setting no s lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt OUTPut STATe SOURce VOLTage ZERO OFFSet SOURce VOLTage ZERO IMPedance SOURce CURRent ZERO OFFSet SOURce
324. u use the numeric keys press the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Store Count 5 tok ks Po det Turning Auto Storage ON OFF 5 Press the Auto soft key to select On or Off Count Auto Meas nly 10 on off on OFF Turning Measurement Only ON OFF 6 Press the MeasOnly soft key to select On or Off When measurement only is turned ON only the data when the measurement is ON is stored For example only the data when measurement is ON can be stored if measurement ON OFF is switched during a program sweep Turn measurement only ON if you want to output only the lines that contain measured data in the result file Count Auto MeasOnly On OFF On OFF Starting the Storage Operation 7 Press STORE The storage operation starts and the STORE key illuminates Stopping the Storage Operation 8 Pressing STORE again after the storage operation is started stops the operation The STORE key turns OFF IM 765501 01E 9 1 sonjeA uoneyndwos jesnsneis Huljjesoy pue s jnsey peinseeyy Bunos el 9 1 Storing the Measured Results Explanation Store Count The specified number of points of measured results is stored Selectable range 1 to 65535 Turning the Auto Storage ON OFF When turned On the storage operation can be started automatically when the sweep operation is started The store count in this case is automatically set to the sweep count However if the sweep count exceeds 65535 the store count is set to 65
325. ueries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Current gt SOUR CURR PROT ULIM 1 75 SOUR CURR PROT ULIM MAX SOUR CURR PROT ULIM SOUR CURR PROT ULIM MAX Note that the current limiter is activated when the source function is set to voltage SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage SOURce CURRent PROTection LLIMit Function Syntax Example Description Sets the lower current limiter value for generating voltage or queries the current setting SOURce CURRent PROTection LLIMit lt Current gt MINimum MAXimum lt current gt Sets the limiter value to the specified value MINimum Sets the limiter value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the limiter value to the maximum value SOURce CURRent PROTection LLIMit MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Current gt SOUR CURR PROT LLIM 2 5 SOUR CURR PROT LLIM MIN SOUR CURR PROT LLIM SOUR CURR PROT LLIM MIN Note that the current limiter is activated when the source function is set to voltage SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage SOURce CURRent SWEep SPACing Function Syntax Example Sets the sweep mode linear or log or queries the current setting SOURce CURRent SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic LiNear Sets the sweep mode to linear LOGarithmic Sets the sweep mode to logarithmic SOURce CURR
326. ueue overflow Read the error using SYSTem ERRor or clear the error 16 35 16 40 queue using CLS 361 Parity error Check that the communication settings on the GS610 and 14 6 PC match If the settings are correct check the cable and lower the baud rate 362 Framing error Check that the communication settings on the GS610 and 14 6 PC match If the settings are correct check the cable and lower the baud rate 363 Input buffer overrun Set the handshaking to a setting other than OFF 14 6 Lower the baud rate Query Errors 400 to 499 Error No Error Message Corrective Action Page 410 Query INTERRUPTED Check transmission reception procedure 16 3 420 Query UNTERMINATED Check transmission reception procedure 16 3 430 Query DEADLOCK Keep the program message shorter than or equal to 64 KB 16 3 17 4 IM 765501 01E 17 2 Error Code Description and Corrective Action Instrumental Errors 100 and up Error No Error Message Corrective Action Page 100 Expression syntax error Check that the syntax of the MATH definition file is correct App 1 101 Too complex expression Keep the total number of constants variables and operators ina App 1 MATH definition less than or equal to 256 Keep the total number of constants variables and operators in all MATH definitions less than or equal to 1024 201 Interlocking Release the interlock and then turn the output ON 202 Hardware abnormal Wa
327. upExecuteTrigger are valid If you wish to activate triggers only with communication commands select external trigger and do not apply triggers to the BNC input output terminal or pin 2 on the external input output connector on the rear panel Note If another trigger is activated in the middle of a source measure cycle that trigger is discarded If the trigger timing is not synchronized to the source measure cycle period the starting point as in this case the sampling error indicator SampleErr illuminates in the status display area of the display To prevent sampling errors from occurring increase the interval at which triggers are activated or shorten the source measure cycle see section 2 2 Source Measure Cycle Below are ways of shortening the source measure cycle e Set the shortest source delay and measurement delay possible If measurements are not needed turn the measurement function OFF When making measurements set the shortest integration time possible Turn OFF the auto zero function see section 2 4 Measurement e Turn OFF the auto range function of the source and measurement range settings Turn OFF various computation functions e When performing a sweep turn OFF the auto storage function see section 2 8 Store Recall IM 765501 01E 2 13 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 6 Sweep There are three sweep modes linear sweep log sweep and program sweep To disable the s
328. urrently OFF SENS AZER STAT ON SENS AZER STAT Syntax Example SENSe AZERo EXECute Function Executes auto zero Syntax SENSe AZERo EXECute Example SENS AZER EXEC SENSe AVERage STATe Function Sets the average state ON or OFF or queries the current setting SENSe AVERage STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns averaging ON 0 or OFF Turns averaging OFF SENSe AVERage STATe 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF SENS AVER STAT ON SENS AVER STAT Syntax Example SENSe AVERage MODE Function Sets the average mode block or moving average or queries the current setting Syntax SENSe AVERage MODE BLOCk MOVing BLOCk Sets the average mode to block MOVing Sets the average mode to moving SENSe AVERage MODE 1 Currently set to block 0 Currently set to moving Example SENS AVER MODE MOV SENS AVER MODE SENSe AVERage COUNt Function Syntax Example Sets the average count or queries the current setting SENSe AVERage COUNt lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum lt Integer gt Sets the average count to the specified value MINimum Sets the average count to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the average count to the maximum value SENSe AVERage COUNt MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt lnteger gt SENS AVER COUN 10 SEN
329. using the USB storage function See section 6 6 Program Pattern File and 4 3 USB Storage Function Saving the measurement result data using the storage function See section 9 1 Storing the Measured Results Connection Procedure 1 Connect the first GS610 between the collector and the emitter of the transistor 2 Connect the second GS610 between the base and the emitter of the transistor 3 Connect the first GS610 to a PC using the USB cable App 6 IM 765501 01E Appendix 2 Application Examples Procedure Preparation 1 Create a sweep pattern source pattern used to vary collector emitter voltage Vce of the transistor using a general purpose spreadsheet application on your PC If the amount of voltage change is constant you can also use the linear sweep see section 6 1 Setting the Log or Linear Sweep lox amp File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help X Wl Arial 710 BZ U E2 2 A D26 fe 0 05 il 2 0 1 3 0 15 4 0 2 5 05 6 0 3 Zal 0 35 8 0 4 g 0 45 10 0 5 m 055 t2 0 6 1a 0 65 14 0 7 15 0 75 16 0 8 17 085 18 0 9 19 095 20 1 21 1 1 22 1 2 23 13 o o X M 4 gt MN Tr _Yce f Sheet2 Z Sheet3 KII Ready 2 Save the pattern sweep data that you created in step 1 to a file in CSV format 3 Transfer Copy the pattern sweep data file to the internal memory GS61
330. ut connector or queries the current setting Syntax ROUTe DIO8 ILOCk OUTPut ZERO ILOCk Outputs the interlock state OUTPut Outputs the output state ZERO Outputs the zero state ROUTe DIO8 gt ILOC Currently set to interlock state OUTP Currently set to output state ZERO Currently set to zero state Example ROUT DIO8 OUTP ROUT D108 IM 765501 01E 16 33 SpueWWOD UOHesIUNWIWOD g 16 2 Commands 16 2 10 System Commands SYSTem Group SYSTem DISPlay STATe Function Sets the display state ON or OFF or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem DISPlay STATe 1 0 ON OFF 1 or ON Turns the display ON 0 or OFF Turns the display OFF SYSTem DISPlay STATe 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example SYST DISP STAT OFF SYST DISP STAT SYSTem DISPlay BRIGht Function Sets the display brightness or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem DISPlay BRIGht lt Integer gt MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN lt Integer gt Sets the brightness to the specified value MINimum Sets the brightness to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the brightness to the maximum value UP Increments the brightness DOWN Decrements the brightness SYSTem DISPlay BRIGht MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt lnteger gt Example SYST DISP BRIG 2 SYST DISP BRIG DOWN SYST DISP BRIG
331. uto range but the time of each source measure cycle will be irregular In addition if the range setting changes the source level will be discontinuous e When fixed range is used the sweep operation is carried out in the range setting best suited to the source level with the highest resolution lt lt Corresponding Command Mnemonic gt gt SOURcCe MODE SOURce LIST SELect SOURce LIST CATalog SOURce LIST DELete SOURce LIST DEFine 6 6 IM 765501 01E 6 3 Selecting the Termination Mode Procedure DISPLAY e To exit the menu during operation press O O O C O C ESC at the upper left of the operation panel MEASURE SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the store Ca wa Dra 7 2 ro aw J ss phrase rotary knob numeric keys lt MENU MEASURE MENU SOURCE and gt are used to refer to the operation i f selecting or setting items or enterin RECALL MATH NULL i o 9 9 9 values using the rotary knob numeric Loca TPUT CONTROL keys and keys BS key and power Cmc ie sweep orant Tie right arrow key For details on the fo al mee we operation using the rotary knob numeric r0 keys amp D and see sections 3 8 or a 3 9 1 Press SWEEP to display the SWEEP menu 2 Press the Last soft key to select the sweep termination mode Mode Last Repeat Start Stop Step Log Ren Keep i Value Value Count Explanation
332. uto range OFF SOURce VOLTage RANGe AUTO 1 Currently ON 0 Currently OFF Example SOUR VOLT RANG AUTO ON SOUR VOLT RANG AUTO Description This command and SOURce CURRent RANGe AUTO are equivalent 16 16 IM 765501 01E 16 2 Commands SOURCe VOLTage LEVel Function Syntax Example Sets the voltage source level value or queries the current setting SOURce VOLTage LEVel lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum lt Voltage gt Sets the voltage level to the specified value MINimum Sets the voltage level to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the voltage level to the maximum value SOURce VOLTage LEVel MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum value lt Voltage gt SOUR VOLT LEV 99 999 SOUR VOLT LEV MAX SOUR VOLT LEV SOUR VOLT LEV MAX SOURCe VOLTage PBASe Function Syntax Example Sets the pulse base value for voltage pulse generation or queries the current setting SOURce VOLTage PBASe lt Voltage gt MINimum MAXimum lt Voltage gt Sets the pulse base value to the specified value MINimum Sets the pulse base value to the minimum value MAXimum Sets the pulse base value to the maximum value SOURce VOLTage PBASe MINimum MAXimum No parameter Queries the current value MINimum Queries the minimum value MAXimum Queries the maximum
333. weep function turn it OFF The sweep key illuminates when the sweep mode is not OFF Basic Sweep Operation The sweep function repeats the source measure cycle by automatically varying the source level In this case a start event is needed for starting the sweep operation in addition to the trigger that starts the source measure cycle The sweep function starts in a start wait condition The GS610 can receive triggers only after receiving a start event Once started the GS610 repeats the source measure cycle by varying the source level for the subsequent triggers that it receives When a sweep operation is completed the GS610 transits to the start wait condition again Basic Sweep Operation Start Sweep state Waiting for start Sweeping Waiting for start x i Trigger i v i Source measure Source measure cycle first cycle last 2 14 IM 765501 01E 2 6 Sweep Sweep Mode Linear Sweep Sweeps using evenly spaced step values that increase linearly from the specified start value to the stop value e When the source mode is DC e When the source mode is pulse Stop value 4 Stop value 2 P a 8 a 3 i Step value Base value Initial t r i Initial t Tri A rigger coun rigger coun value start 99g value Start gg Log Sweep Sweeps exponentially from the specified start value to the stop value at the specified step count The step count can be set arbitrary in the range of
334. wnload the most recent system file System bin from YOKOGAWA GS610 Web page http www yokogawa com tm GS610 to your PC 2 Connect the PC and the GS610 using a USB cable 3 Copy the system file System bin to the volatile disk GS610RAM Executing the Firmware Update 1 Press MISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the System soft key Remote Error Wire cs I F Setup Log 4w 2w Setting Susten 3 Press the Next 1 2 soft key Psion Beep Display LineFreq Product Next 1 0 On Off mi 50 60 Info 172 4 Press the FirmwareUpdate soft key The system file automatically opens and the update operation is carried out If a system file does not exist on the GS610RAM an error message is displayed Time Time Disk Firmware Next adjust Zone setrtest pormat Update 2 2 5 When the update operation is complete a message prompting you to power cycle the GS610 appears If the message is displayed cycle the GS610 power UN OT SS Do not turn the power OFF after you select FirmwareUpdate until the system is completely written If you do the GS610 may malfunction When the system firmware is updated all of the data files stored on the GS610RAM are cleared Be sure to move important data files to a different directory in advance IM 765501 01E 17 9 Ey eoueusjUleWy pue BunooysajqnoiL 17 5 Updating the System Firmware Explanation When updating the system firmware the most recent file must be stored
335. ximum Power Consumption Approx 200 VA Maximum Common Mode Voltage Between source measurement terminal and case 250 Vpeak External Dimensions Approx 213 W x 132 H x 400 D mm excluding projections Weight Approx 7 kg Key Lock Key lock can be set Recommended Calibration Period 1 year Standard Accessories Power cord 1 pc Measurement lead 1 set red and black 1 piece each Alligator clip adapter small 1 set red and black 1 piece each Rubber feet 2 sets 2 pcs in a set User s manual this manual 1 pc 18 8 IM 765501 01E 18 7 External Dimensions Unit mm Rear View P AB 6 om SS ann nee 13 213 _ YOROGAWA Bile T 858 aco e90000 eoond g Soq S5ea0 nooloe sD a0 s slsel sr o N e Dimensions with the JIS rack mount kit Mounting surface 20 if ooo l 3 goo OO0O0000 oo BER SS ee oOoojooo ooolnegosd Mounting surface 20 2 ooo 3 ooo ooo ooo o 000000 o0 000 Bees o0 000 oaoaa jaoaann oon ooo oono ao oono ao aS se Rii ao sel Rai e Dimensions with the EIA rack mount kit Moun
336. y Area Comparison Result Display For the procedures see section 8 4 Displays the judgement result of the comparison High Over the upper limit In Within the limits Low Under the lower limit Trigger Mode Display For the procedures see section 4 1 Displays the selected trigger mode Int Internal trigger Ext External trigger Imm Immediate no trigger wait Source Mode and Sweep Mode Displays For the procedures see sections 5 4 5 5 6 1 and 6 2 Displays the combination of the source mode and sweep mode The following eight combinations are available DC DC source Pls Pulse source DCLinr Source mode DC and sweep mode Linear DCLog Source mode DC and sweep mode Log DCProg Source mode DC and sweep mode Program PlsLinr Source mode pulse and sweep mode Linear PlsLog Source mode pulse and sweep mode Log PlsProg Source mode pulse and sweep mode Program Wait Indicator For the procedures see section 2 5 and 6 5 Displays the various wait conditions during operation WaitTrigger Waiting for trigger WaitStart Waiting for sweep start Calculating Calculating sweep data IM 765501 01E 1 3 suolouny pue soweNn Wed 1 3 Names and Description of the Displayed Contents High Limiter Indicator For the procedures see section 5 3 Turns ON when the high limiter is active Low Limiter Indicator For the procedures see section 5 3 Turns ON when the low limiter is active
337. y the IP address setup screen DHCP IP SubNet Default Term On Off Address Mask Gateway CR LF overview 6 Use the numeric keys to set the IP address IP Address 10 IFER 60 S ee ee E 7 Press the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Setting the Subnet Mask Turn OFF DHCP according to the procedure described earlier and then set the subnet mask 5 Press the SubNet Mask soft key to display the subnet mask setup screen DHCP IP SubNet Default Term On Off Address Mask Gateway CR LF overview IM 765501 01E 12 3 uondo 2e yu z u1 473 5 12 3 Setting the CP IP 6 Use the numeric keys to set the subnet mask SubMet Hack PP D ee ee a 7 Press the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Setting the Default Gateway Turn OFF DHCP according to the procedure described earlier and then set the default gateway 5 Press the Default Gateway soft key to display the default gateway setup screen DHCP IP SubNet Default Term On off Address Mask Gateway CR LF overview 6 Use the numeric keys to set the default gateway Default Gateway 10 156 1 as ee d e 7 Press the Enter soft key to confirm the setting Setting the Transmission Terminator Turn OFF DHCP according to the procedure described earlier and then set the transmission terminator 5 Press the Term soft key to display the Terminator menu DHCP IP SubNet Default Term i On Off Address Ma

GS610 Source Measure Unit User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents